T H E H EA LI N G H A N )

R EVI SED AND ENLAR GED

BY
Sidney A Weltmer D S T
.
, . . .

By S idney A Weltm er
. .

Al l ri ghts reserv ed

Second e dition printe

d June, 1 922 .

Third edition printed Au gust, 1922 .

Fourth edition printed September, 1922 .

T H E H E A LI N G H A N D

Teach ing the principles of healin g through

the three fold method of
-

Suggestion through the hand .

Suggestion through the s poken word

and written word .

Suggestion through telepathy as ex ,

plained in the home method of

healing .

BY
PROFE SSOR SIDNEY A .

W ELTMER
Doctor of Suggestive Therapeutics .

Publish ed by

T he Weltmer Institute of Suggestive

Therapeutics Co .

Nev ada Mis souri U s A

, , . . .

d ar t s
as
.
ful to everyone who reads it .

Whether thi s reading is only for a few moments to merel y

g lance at its pages or to read it consecutively ch apter after
ch ap ter ; it has in it, in every line of it a statement of fact l earn
,

ed from every day life .

The purpose of the writer is to present the bas ic principles

of the Law of Life and the lesson s th at life teaches .

R eviewmg the pages of every day li fe we know th at we ao ,

qu ired all of ou r knowledge in respons e to those th ings o f en

v ironm ent whi ch made u s think .

Those in fluences th at cau sed u s to think right th at in ,

spired u s to learn more to do more and to exerci se the intent o f

, ,

helpfu lness in wh at we thought and did were mo st val u able and

, ,

that which has value to one person has value to all .

It is a self evident fact o f exp erience that nothing comes to

u s that is molded into constru ctive th ought or act ion th at does ,

not come ou t of u s in response to something th at made u s think .

That something which caused u s to th ink no matter in ,

what form it was presented to u s is suggestion , .

The one who can help most his fellow man is one wh o knows
what su ggestions were helpful to him when he made his re
sponse to th em and he will kn ow wh at su gge stions to give and in
,

wh at manner to present them th at they will be most helpful to

,

those he desire s to serve .

In th is book is set out simply but clearly an idea of service

which all can understand We define service as that influence
.

which one exerts th at help s anoth er or that one offers to another

,

by which the person to whom it is offered is enabled to make his

respon se s in su ch a manner that they enable him to help hims elf .

Th ere are three desirable impul ses in each life seeking op

p ortu n ity for ex pre ssion. They are h eal th , happines s and pros

perity.

Health is first comprehend ed in ou r con sciou s l ife as a phy

sical condition satis factory to the individu al A clo se inspection .

will show th at health is merel y the expression of someth ing and ,

th at meth ing is life That someth ing ex isted before the fles h
so .

it occupies was organized into a body .

Lo ng before he even realized that h e had a body the real ,

individu al life in each person unconsciou s of how he did it

, ,

helped to build th is organization and establish ed the laws and

rule s for th eir admini stration .

The Operation of these laws within the physical organism

without change from the ori ginal order establish ed carries on ,

the life processes in a perfect manner .

When this order is und isturbed in its activity the body oc ,

cu pied is in a state of health .

We know now th at heal th is this perfect life stream flowi ng

through th e body wh ich it shaped and occupies .

Happiness is health in another fo rm and is composed of the ,

righ t th ings of life properly understood rightly related and con , ,

stru ctively exp re ss ed in th ought wh ich find s its outlet in doing

,

th ings with thi s body through th is body and u sing this body
, ,

to perform th e activities which requ ire contact with the ph ysical

wo rld al so u sing its mental powers in deal ing with the relation
,

ship that exists between the th ought selves o f oth er individual s

and h im self .

Pro sperity is the unh ampered and u n interrupted ou t flow

of righ t intentions th rough the h ealth y body and the sound
m ind of a m an .

Pro sperity is th e application of the laws of ph ysical well

bein g con sciou s ri ght thinking applied to the thin gs wh ich we
, ,

know and express in su ch manner that everything it touches is

increased everything it serves is h elped everything it speaks to
, ,

is enli ghtened and everyth ing to whi ch it tu rn s its atten tion is

,

enri ch ed thereby .

Pro sperity is th e exp re ssion of a m an who is ph y sically well

and mentally s ound exerci s ing th at cou rage wh ich m akes hi m
,

able to bestow the gift s wh ich h e has i nh e rited as a spiritual be

“
ing th at of power of love and of a sou nd m in
, , ,

Exercis ing these gifts he pro spers and cau ses all upon whom ,

he bestow s his gifts to sh are in his pro sperity .

i
Th s boo k is divided into t h ree s ep arate s ection s T h e first .

deals with suggestion s whi ch pertain to ph ysical health and ao

tion and esp eci ally teach how th ese su ggestion s m ay be con
v eyed from th e mind of the h eal er to th e min d of the patient
throu gh th e cell s of the patient s body through the agency of
’

th e h u man h and .

The second section of th e book treats al so of ph ysical h ealth

and ph ysi cal expres sion but will teach h ow to offer thes e su g
,

gestions through the agency of spoken and written words .

The third section of th e book deals with silent influence

of tho u ght de scribes defines and explains the omnipresence of
, , ,

mind intelligence power and pre sence

, , .

The language of thi s department of psych ology is called tel

epath y and in th i s s ection is tau ght as far as i t is known the
, , ,

perfect method s of exerci sing and express ing telepathi c thou ght .

In thi s department the philosoph y and p sych ology of prayer

and silent su gge stion is exh austively tre ated and n u merou s in ,

stan ces are given which apply to th e general reader and en

lighten many wh o h ave had th ese my sterio u s experience s of

communi cating with th ei r own h i gh er s elve s and with the h igher
,

things of life itself .

Following th e con crete di scussion of the three subj ects

enumerated in th e foregoing paragraphs Heal in g by th e Laying,

On of Hand s Sugge stion through the Written and Spoken Word

, ,

Sugge stion through th e employment of telepathic means we give ,

th e reader an extended sympo sium of a di scu ssion of the Real

M an as we study him from th e view point of ori gin present ex
, ,

istence and de stiny Al s o an extens ive di scus sion of the prim ary
.

and f undamental principle s of th e l aw s of mental h ealing based

upon th e actual experience s of th e auth or which we feel will ,

g ive th e r e ade r adeq u ate inform atio n th at will en able him to

understand h imself and to prep are him for th e practical study
of the principles of Su ggestotherapy .

Believing that we h ave rendered a service to h um anity we ,

offer thi s book knowing th at all who read its contents and u n
,

derstand its meani ng will be immeas urably benefited .

 FOREWORD

The hu m an hand is trained from infancy to ex pres s the

thought or purpose of the mind which controls it .

The hand is th e tool which th e mind depends u pon when it

wants to get anyt hing done .

Though ts of action naturally tu rn to the hand for their

The h and is the first means of expression .

The baby u ses the hand long before it learns to talk .

T he savage who has but a few words in his vocabul ry de

a
pend s upon the hand to ex pres s his thought .

T h e h and mini sters it carries aid

, .

T he hand lifts the fallen mini sters to the sick ; it is peculi

,

arly the organ of ex pre ss ion of the good wishes of the kindly

disposed .

Wh en we are hu rt we instinctivel y place the hand upon the

,

inj ured part.

When another suffers and we sympathi ze we instinctively

,

u s e the hand to soothe hi s pain .

Clasped h and s are the universal pledge of friendship and

From the earliest dawn of civilization the h and h as been

used in th e mo st sacred ceremoni al s .

The hand is the natural organ of expression and its actions

,

are mental symbol s to whi ch man has learned to mak e respon se

through untold ages of ex perience and adaptation .
 CONTENT S

Life and Life s Motion

’

Nature Go od to M an .

Practical Application of
Exp erimental Study in Telepath y
My Ini tial Experience in Telepathy
A Search for Better Methods
Closing Thought s
Study of th e Real Man
M an as a Physi cal
M an and h is Rel ation to

M om entu s —
"uesti on W hat is M an 7

T he Infini te Viewed as a

T hought
Con sciou sness

Forgiveness
Concentration

T he Positive and the Passive

Su gg estion
Laying on of Hand s
Telepath y and Thought Tra n sference
 C HAPT ER "

T HE HAND AND THE ANCIENTS .

The expression th e hand of God is frequentl y u sed in th e

, ,

B ible and with a wide range of meaning F or instance it is used

, .
,

to signify God s eternal purpo se and executive power ( Acts

’

His providential bounty and goodne ss ( Psal 1 04 His .

mighty power to preserve and defend ( John 1 0 : 28 His ,

sovereign power ( Psal His help ( Neh

. Psal .

His favor ( Luke His spirit ( 1 st Kings Ezek

His providence ( l st Chron Job . .

By the laying on of hands priests were consecrated min

,

isters were ord ained and special gifts conferred on indiv1du al s

,

( Num . Acts l st T im At the command of

.

God Mos es by the l aying on his h and s appointe d Josh u a his

, ,

su ccessor ( Num . The Apo stles throu gh the laying on of ,

hand s conferred the Holy Gho st on those who had been bapti zed
,

( Acts
If you will study th e manner in which Jesus u sed His hands
in healing and the dir ections which He gave his disciples for
using them for the same purpo se you will probably get an en
, , ,

larged idea of the im portance and pl ace which Jesu s intended the
laying on of h ands should h ave among His followers Jesu s .

Himself heal ed the sick by laying His h ands upon th em : He l aid

His h ands on a few sick folk and healed them ( Mark
”
,
“
Now when the su n was setting all they that had any sick with
,

di vers diseases brought them u nto Him and He laid His h ands
” “
on ev ery one of them and healed them ( Lu ke
, And He
laid His h ands on h er and im med iately sh e was m ade straight
( Mark
”
and glorified God
Apparently the u se of His h and s was commonly regarded
“
as a regul ar part of His procedure for Jairu s said to Him , My ,

little dau ghter lieth at the point of death ; I pray Thee come and ,
”
lay Thy h ands on h er th at she may be healed ; and sh e sh all live
( Mark
After comm anding His di sciples to go into all the world
” “
and preach the gospel to every creatu re Jesu s decl ared these , ,

signs sh all follow th em th at believe ; they shall lay h an ds on th e

”
sick and th ey sh all recover ( Mark
18 THE HEALING HAND

Th at these were not mere idle word s from the mouth of

Jes us is shown by the fact th at it was through th e laying on of
the h ands of Ananias that Paul received his si ght after he had
been smitten with blindness while on his way to Damascu s ( Acts
“
And Paul al so h ealed in th e same manner : And it
came to pass that the fath er of Publiu s lay si ck of a feve r an d of
.

a bloody flux to wh om Paul entered in an d p rayed and lay his

,
”
hands on h im and h ealed h im ( Acts
We have qu oted only a few of the many passages in the
Bible ( C ru den s C oncordance gives more than 500 such ) in which
’

th e h and is us ed as an in strument in conveyin g some th ought

of blessing or in h ealing .

B u t they are sufficient to sh ow th at both th e proph ets and

Jesu s understood th e power of th e h and and m ade an extens ive
and varied u se of it .

Jesu s even made h ealing by th e l ayin g on of h and s o n e of

th e tests of the gen uinene s s of the belief in Him of those who
profe ss to follow His teachings ( Mark 1 6 : 1 8) It is not strange ,

therefore th at th e h and has pl ayed an important part in Chri s

,

tian literature and in th e sym boli sm and ceremonies of the

chu rch but under th e in fluen ce of the word s and ex ample of th e
,

proph et s and of Jesus is it not strange th at Ch ri stian people

,

h ave not further developed th is instinctive idea that the hand is

the means for blessing and h elp "
From the tim e of Edward the C onfess or to th e rei gn of
“ ”
" ueen Anne th
, e En gli sh and F r en ch rul er s Tou ch ed an d cu red
thou sand s of suffers from scrofula .

Althou gh th e h and as a mean s for expressing consciou s

thought is most important it is far more important as a mean s
,

for impre ssin g and awakeni ng re spon se from th e un con sciou s

It is th e uncon sciou s mind th at mu st be arou sed in all h eal

in g for it is upon its action s that all h ealin g depend s The u n
, .

con sciou s mind or th e h ealin g m ind

,
— God s h ealing power in
’

—
m an is the onl y h ealer of the ill s of m an It is th at force
.

“ ”
whi ch has been called Nature by ph ysician s since the time of
“ ”
Hippocrates who tau ght that Nature is th e first of Ph ysici an s
, ,
“ ”
and who u sed the Vis medicatrix naturae ( the healing power
of nature ) as th e found ation of h is philo sophy of medicine .
 THE HEALING HAND 19

Whether Hippocrates conceived of Natu re as an intell igent

power or force within the individual or wheth er h e con sidered it
,

a blind force acting under certain l aws we do not know but we

, , ,

do know th at some of th e ancients considered Nature as the hand

or word of God or even as God h im self in al l th in gs th at exi st
, , .

“ ”
Spinoza T he God intoxicated m an regarded Nature as
, ,

Infinite Intelligence permeating al l th in gs imm anent in al l

,

thi ngs the only power which could react to external stimuli
, .

Modern thinkers teach th at Nature is subjective mind be

cau se it operate s u nder intelli gent l aws and that all action s of ,

th e obj ect s of N ature are intelligent action s .

Mind is that power in n ature which can react through th e

things of environment ; which make s natural rel ation s orderly .

Mind is the source of the universal h armony wh ich keep s the

stars in thei r cou rs e s and m ake s th e earth bloom with summer
,

and sleep with winter ; whi ch m akes a man a m an and keep s h im

so thr ou gh strife and turm oil and heal s his ill s and bind s up
,

his broken hear t wh en life has hom e too h ardly upon him .

T h e mind acting is the mind th inking T h e produ ct of .

thinking is thought The mind s action is the mind s thought

.
’ ’
.

In other word s an action of th e mind is a thought and th e

,

proces s of mind acting is thinking .

All thoughts wh eth er un con scious or consciou s are expre ss ,

ed but many of th em are expressed only in th e organism of

,

the thinker .

The m ind n eeds no word s to command th e hand

'

T he intricate ram ification s of the nervou s system are th e

means whi ch th e mind u ses for expre ss ing such th ought s in the
different parts of th e body But there are no nerves to connect
.

different bein gs with each other .

So it becomes nece ssary to u se some special means by whi ch

thoughts may be conveyed from one person to anoth er Such .

a mean s we call l anguage and th e organic proce ss of u sing lan

u
g ga e f or the convey an ce of t h ou gh t from one th inke r to ano th e r

There are a great many form s of speech T h e spok en word .

is not the onl y one it is not even the one most u sed
,
.

It is merely that to whi ch th e term is mo st com monly applied

becau se it is th at form of expression th at does nothing but speak
20 T HE HEALI NG HAND

and is the form of eech most closely associated with words

sp ,

which are the form u sed in reco rding langu age .

There are many oth er forms of expression whi ch are ev en

more expressive than vocal speech .

Gestural speech is a very important form of mental expres

sion . The gestures the expression of the face or of the eye
, , ,

the m anner th e tone of th e voice all of tho se unprem editated

, , ,

more or less uncon sciou s expressions which accompany the,

spoken word are more potent in determining the im pression cre

ated th an the spoken word s th ems elve s .

Ge stu res m ay be very effective alon e but the spoken word

without gestures rarely has much force ex cept in the written
form And even here no amount of ski ll in the u se of word s
.
,

can quite make up for the l oss sustained when the ge stu re s of

th e speaker are lackin g .

Any mean s us ed for the ex pression of thou ght m y be

called l angu age and speech is any process th at employs such a
,

means .

The u se of th e hand is therefore a form of speech and in ,

fact it is th e m ost effective form of speech that we can u se .

T he h and is the ch ief sou rce of powerful gestu re .

The h and alone may be so ex pres sive that no other form

of ex pression is nece ssary .

Irre spective of th e u se of the hands in the sign language

of the deaf and dumb the h ands are of all organ s of speech th e
, ,

The h and speak s to the con sciou s mind by means of the

appeal s which it make s th rough the sen ses .

The soothing touch th e comforting pres su re the warm th

, ,

it brings to the painful part the manipulations of massage th e , ,

firm clasp and all su ch actions cons titute th e l anguage by whi ch

, ,

th e hand conveys the thought of one person to the consciou s

mind of another .

The l anguage of the hand which conveys thou ght to the u n

consciou s mind is h owever of quite another variety
, , .

It is a langu age of motion but of quite anoth er typ e of ,

motion th an those which we have noted above .

The language of the hand wh ich conveys the h ealin g thought

of the therapist to the di seased tissues of the patient is th e
22 THE HEALING HAND

Moti on I repeat is th e principal fact in the universe There

, , .

fo re it behooves u s to study motion in itself apart from its spe

,

cial form s There are three ch aracteristics of al l motions

. .

Every motion is a movement of ( 1 ) something ( 2 ) in some ,

d irection and ( 3 ) at some rate Of th ese three ch aracters we

.

are mo st interes ted for the time in the thi rd

, , .

It is the rate of motion of matter that determ ines the audi

bility and then th e pitch of the sound ; it is the rate of the motion
of ether wh ich determine s wh ether we shall see light and what
colo r ; or feel h eat o r be sunbu rned or be affected by the X R ay
, ,
-
.

It is th e rate of th e motion of water wh ich determi nes its

carrying powe r th e rate of motion of th e bul let which deter
,

mines the force of its blow .

And it is the rate of th e protoplasmi c motion of the living

,

being which determines its cap ability of carrying on the func

tions of life .

Wh en protopl asmi c movements are at th e proper rate the

being enj oys smooth interchange of motion between its different
part s and between it self and its environment and we call that
state of exi sten ce he alth ; but wh en t he se rate s of motion are

disturbed we call th e resulting conditio n di seas e .

It mu st be ou r concern to find means to re store to the sick

man the power of keeping the proper rate of protopl as mi c motion
in his body for smooth operation Wh atever will do this wil l .

re store h is he alth .

But we mu st not fall into the error of thinking that thi s

motion mu st be re stored to the body directly as we would raise
or lower the number of vibrations of a strin g in ord er to get

the pitch desired Remember that the living thing has power
.

to determ ine its own protoplasmic motions Th at power is .

, ,

indeed th e seat of its life It is the po ssession of th at power

, .

th at makes it alive That power al so gives it self motion

.
-
.

Any obj ect that doe s not po ssess this self movin g power -

is dead and moves only as extern al force is applied to it .

We do not know what rates of motion what varieties nor ,

wh at combinations of motion are required for any liv ing thing

to make its condition th at of smooth operation which we indi cate
“
by the term health .
 T HE HEALIN G HAND 23

A s consciou s being s, we do not kn ow the rate of th e health

”
motions of eith er ourselves or any oth er being But we do .

know unconsciously what h ealth motions are required for ou r

“ ”

ow n organi sm s, and each other living thing uncons ciou s ly knows

for itself what metion is required to make it manife st h ealth .

F u rthermore, it knows how to make its organi sm move at th at

rate and in th at combination of varietie s .

Th erefore, ou r task is to find the mean s for inducing th at

”
part of u s which knows to produ ce in the organism thos e m o
tions which are required for its perfectly smooth normal

Of all ou r agencies for do ing thi s the human h and is the

,

most important The hand of the therapist has in its own tis
.

’
sues in health and at all times wh en expres sing th e th erapi st s
,

strong in tention to bring healin g those rate s of movement wh ich

,

are normal to th e body .

These motions are of unknown forms and rates but we may ,

be certain th at they are very fine and complex They no doubt .

belong to those forms of moti on generally known as vibrations ,

and h ereafter We sh al l speak of them as the vibrations of the

hand .

“
B y v ibrations, however we mean no discernible quiver
,

or other trembling movement of the h and but th os e invi sible

,
“ ”
health vibration s in its ti ssue s which are commu nicated to
the tissues of the pati ent and so cause h is uncon sciou s mind to
bring all the ti ssues of his body to similar vibration s .

We have good illustrations of the se relations in the study

of sound Every h igh school boy knows that when you vibrate
.

one tuning fork of a certain pitch near to another of exactly the

sam e pitch the se cond fork will be set into vibrati on by th e fi rs t
,
.

This is call ed sympatheti c vibration and the second fork is said

to vibrate in sympathy with th e first .

Sym pathetic vibration occurs throughout Nature You m ay .

h ave noti ced wh en you were singin g from mu sic that when you ,

s in g certain not es the book or sh eet of mu sic in your h and w ill

v ibrate .

The back of your chair often vibrates to certain tones wh en

you sit listening to lecture s It is said that a fiddler once fri gh t
.

ened the gu ardians of the suspe nsion bridg e at Ni agara Fall s

24 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

until he mad e th e bridge quiver ominou sl y .

Every material obj ect if set into vibration, will emit some
,

certain note and it will sympathetically respond to th e same note

when produced outs ide of itself .

When we talk of the heal th vibrations of the therapist s

“ ’

hand we are not talking about sound vibrations These health .

“

”
vibrations are probably much finer and far more complex than
any so und vibrations. But we find in sympath etic sou nd vibra
’
tions a good illus tration of what occurs wh en th e th erapist s
hand is placed upon the painful and diseased tissues and restores
them to health and ease .

T h e normal vibrations of the hand are communicated to the

patient s ti ssues where the hand touch es them
’
.

These tissues are thereby cau s ed to vibrate at that rate and

in that manner which means health j u st as the tuning fork t e
,

sponda sympathetically to anoth er of its ow n pitch .

By recourse to oth er phehom ena of sound we propose to il

lustrate ou r second proposition th at wh en the unconscious mind
,

of the patient find s that part u nder the hand v ibrating at the
normal life rate the health rate it wil l be induced to bring the
, ,

res t of the organi sm into the same rate of vibration .

This we can il lu strate by reference to the actions of the

vocal and articulatory apparatus in singing and talking .

T he pitch of the voice in speaking and sin gi ng is determined

by the vocal cords while articu lation and tone quality depend
mainly upon the resonance chambers of the head and face espe
cicll y those in the mouth and nose controlled by the tong ue T he .

voice box , the larynx is made up of cartil ages, mem branes and
, ,

muscles supplied with nerves which control them In addition .

to the larynx and its speci al vocal structures, the whole respira
tory apparatu s is brou ght into such close rel ation to the special
speech organ s th at the vibrating cord s are supplied with any de
sired volume of air for settin g them into motion and for carry

ing their vibrations outwards through the mouth and no se where

the organ s of articulation determine the tone quality .

If you have never done so feel the small of you r back or

, ,

v ou r abdominal wal l or the ches t wall or the mu scles of the

, ,

ncck w hen you sing or speak in a strong v oice You no dou bt

.
 T HE HEA LI NG HAND 5

will be surprised to discover that mu scles in all of these regions

are brought into strong action in the process .

And not only are thes e muscles brought into action in the
,

production of the voice but th at action is controlled and co or

,
-

dinated action All of thes e widely separated parts are carefully

.

re gu lated with reference to each other and to the d esir ed res ul t .

study of sound has shown that for each tone produced there is
requ ired a certain rate o f vibration wh ich wi ll produce th at pitch
and no other .

Men talked and sang for a long tim e be fore thi s was known
to science and even now that it is known, very few speakers or
singers concern themselve s about it when they learn to u se th e
voice .

No am ount of conscious knowledge of pitche s and combina

m
tion s of pitch es will enable the s ger consciously to control the
vocal cords so as to produce any certain tone s Thi s 18 all done
.

All th at happens in the conscious mind is that the singer

forms a cl ear idea of the tone desired and then tr u sts the unson
sciou sly controll ed mechani sm of th e voice to produce it
- .

ratory a pparatus in order to bring under bett er control the vol

ume and to supply always the required am ount of air ; and it
,

may be necessary to correct certain bad consciou s habits but ,

when it comes to the matter of making the vocal cord s tak e th at

ten sion th at wi ll produce j u st the exact number of vibration s
per s econd re qui red for the de si red tone,the co nsciou s mi nd is

powerless The unconsci ous mind attends to that

. .

Tak e for instance, the note middle A Th is tone is pro

, , .

du ced by 435 vibrations per s econd No other rate of vibration

.

wil l produce it And onl y a certain tens ion of any certain set of
.

vocal cord s can mak e that nu mber of vibration s per second .

From time to time as the length and thickness of th e vocal

cords ch ange with
growt h or th e condit ion of health the neces,

sary tension ch an es
g .
26 THE HEALING HAND

The con scious mind knows nothin g of these conditi ons but ,

the unconscious mind keep s perfectly informed of them and

makes th e necessary adaptations .

Wh en a speaker desires to speak or sing at the pitch of A

and with a certain force the un co n sciou s mi nd wh ich is in con
,

trol of th e vocal apparatus brings the vocal cord s under a cer

,

tain tension pu ts the air in the lun gs under a certain pressure

,

and sh apes th e tongue in certai n form s with th e result that th e

,

de sired tone is produced .

If it is desired to sing a high er or lower tone the vocal cords

are made to vibrate accordingly .

One h as only to desire to make any note within the range

of the vocal powers and th e unconscious mind throu gh th e appar
s tu s at its di spo sal will set th e vocal cord s to vibratin g at the

necessary rate whether the consciou s mind knows anyt hing at

,

all about the proce ss or not .

Now that same uncon sciou s mind that knows how and is ,

able to control all of th e intricate mech anis m s wh ich produ ce the

voi ce knows how and is able to control the vibration s of the

, , ,

h and and of the rest of the body .

The th erapist who is trained to do thi s can desire that hi s

hand shall vibrate at th e health rate and th e uncon sciou s mind
will make it do so .

When this vibration is communi cated to th e ti ssu es of the

patient his unconsciou s m ind will be given a su gge stion which ,

carried into effect will caus e th e p atient s unconsciou s mind to

’
,

bring al l of the ti ssues of his body into vibration at th e h ealth

rate .

It is no more di fficult to make th e ti ssue s vibrate at the rate

nece ssary for h ealth than it is to make th e vocal cord s vibrate
at the rate to produce some cert ain tone .

Thi s is one of th e th ings th at the un consciou s mind natur

ally kn ow s h ow to do Th i s is one of the thin gs that it h as been
.

doing through out th e life of the patient something that it h as ,

inherited the knowled ge of how to do .

If we can but remove the influences that h ave interfered

with its doing th i s and if we can give a st rong impulse su gg s
,
e ,

tion , to do it there is no reason why it shoul d not bring the ti s

,
 T HE HEALIN G HAND 27

sues into a perfect harmony of vibration at the rate that means

perfect h ealth .

Th at th e hand can be used to speak the suggestion th at will

bring about thi s resu lt has been proven in innumerable cases
where th is was the principal or the on ly treatment u sed .

One of the difficult problems offered to medical science is to

admini ste r a remedy th at will restore a normal condition of th e
capill ary ci rcul ation with out de stro ying the life of th e patient
.

This can be do ne within a very few minute s by the suggestioni st

who knows howto convey his su ggestion throu gh the v ibration
of his hand .
 CHAPT ER II
STATEMENT OF SPECIFIC CASES
A Mr S . from Indianapolis came under ou r care about two ,

years ago His phy sical condition pre sented a cas e of pernicio u s
.

anemi a with a temperature of two degrees below normal skin ,

sh owin g no su rface circulation m id and contracted and breath, ,

ing difficult accompanied by ex treme weakne ss

, .

The suggestion neces sary in thi s case should call upon hi s

subj ective mind to restore a normal capill ary circu l ation This .

su gg estio n was delegated to th e h and I ts active principle was .

th e intention to arouse the subj ective mind in to h armoni ous ac

tion with the purpo se stated .

T h e hand was applied to the pati ent s body al lowed to t e

’
,

main for a period not to ex ceed twenty minutes at the end of ,

which time perfect capillary circul ation resul ted and a normal
tempe rature was in evidence .

This was repeated in twenty four hou rs On appearing for - .

the second application the patient had retained more than one
,

half of the temperature induced by the first treatment .

At th e end of a series of about twelve applications a normal ,

circulation no rmal appetite and incr easing strength was so much

,

in evidence th at the patient was di smi ssed returned to his ,

du ties and continued to improve until perfect heal th was the

,

res ult .

There has been no relapse bu t a condition of steady improve

,

ment has obtained showing th at the subj ective mind reins tated
, ,

in control of the ph ysical functions has maintained its ascend ,

ency although thi s p atient is not conscious of the operation of

,

hi s own mind which assisted the sugge stion of the healer in re

sto rin g him to health .

T h e above is one of many hundred s of cas es varyin g onl y in ,

degree wh ich have responded in th e same manner to su ggestion

, ,

wh ere its transm i ssion has been conveyed to the patient s bod y ’

without any explan ation given to the patient obj ectively as to

th e proce ss of his recovery .

Three years ago a M r M from Iowa aged sixty four ap

.
,
-
,

plied for treatment His affliction was cataract of th e eye s

. .

One eye was entirely gone and the other was rapidly fault
y
.
80 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

end of ano ther week patches of eczema as large as my hand had

disappeared from his body At the end of three weeks he had.

written to s ome friend s in Chi cago and Washington that he was

j ust about well And at once th e telegram s began to po u r in
.

upon him asking him to accept the post at Was hington

, .

He came to me one morning and said I think I am about ,

”
well ; I seem to be gettin g well ; what shall I do 1
“
Wait until tomorrow morning and I will tell you what to
do I replied
, .

T he next morni ng h e h ad more telegram s and when he ,

asked me wh at he sho uld do I advi sed him to accept the ap ,

pointment He did so and since has served the government in

.
,

th at important po sition .

No sugge stion s were offered to him ex cept wh at were con ,

v eyed by my h and No counter su ggestions were offered by him

.
-
.

He never even specul ated on how su ch a result could come from

su ch treatment He seemed to get the idea I had given him that
.

if h e could wi th his voice catch a tone and produce it he cou l d

, , ,
“ ”
cat ch in his affected tissue s th e h ealth vibration in my h and
and exp re ss it in bodily h ealing .

An yone in that attitude of mind with enou gh e nergy to ,

apply for treatm ent and who can assume that attitude toward
,

the treatm ent m ay be sure that th rou gh the healing hand th ere
,

can be conveyed to him the h ealin g word t h at can awaken his

healin g mind and make it master of th e body .

Let me recount another instance in wh ich th e healing hand

was u sed as th e chief or only means for influencing the pati ent .

A m an came for treatment for con stipati on of long standing I .

believe th at he told me th at h e had suffered from constipation

in a very aggravated form for sixteen years .

A cting on the th eo ry th at his trouble was due to insufficient

secretion into and insuffi cient movement of th e colon I pl aced
, , ,

my h and s on h is body with the intention that th ese defects

should be remedied ; th at he should secrete more fluid into the

bowel and was h out th e accu mul ated masse s wh ich had adhered
to its wall s in pl aces that more vigorou s movement s should
,

carry ou t the content s and di sch arge them and th at th i s im ,

proved condition sh ould continue I continued the treatment .

with th at unch anged intention for about twenty minutes .

 THE HEALING HAND 81

After th at one treatment th e patient was relieved and h as

had no recurrence of his old trouble in th e twenty years that
have elapsed since th at time .

It would be easy to recall four or five hundred cases that

have come under ou r immediate noti ce some showing an instan
,

taneou s re sult oth ers requiring from a week to four week s of

,

daily repetition of the same suggestion before a complete cure

was made .

In anoth er cas e a m an suffered so severely from frequent

attack s of sciatica which sometime s l asted a week or more that
, ,

he was u nfitted for the work he was doing th at of Ch ief of th e

,

Fire D epartment of ou r city In his case th e h ands were pl aced

.

on h is body with th e intention that th ey would convey to his

inner mind the su ggestion to rel ax perfectly and that his nerves
would be restored to perfect h ealth In thi s cas e th e response
.

was immediate and the trouble h as not recurred during a period

of twenty years .

In a case of chroni c di arrhoea continuin g from the time of

the C ivil War until th e spring of 189 7 th e h and was applied as
,

th e su ggestion for a period of not to ex ceed five minu te s during

which th e uncon sci ous healing mind of this old ex confederate -

soldier restored norm al action with perm anent re sult s .

A certain l ady had for a number of years suffered all th e

ner vous di sorders incident to the menopause T h e symptoms .

from which sh e suffered mo st were loss of sleep and th e irri ,

tation of a nervous cough Local ph ysi cians had exhau sted all
.

known remedies without avail She applied for treatment whi ch

, .

con sisted in applying th e hand s to the back and front of the

chest and to th e bas e of th e b rain with th e intention of stim
u lating th e principal v asomotor centers and produ cin g general

nerv ou s rel ax ation After treatment on three succe ssive days

.

she was cu red. That was twenty one years ago and sh e is stil l
-
,

in perfect health .

We have dealt with the h and as a source of suggestion to

the con scious mind through gesture ; as a source of su ggestion
,
“ ”
to the un con sciou s mind throu gh th e h e alth v ibrations wh ich
it transmits to the ti ssue s with which it is in contact .

I t yet remains for u s to study th e h and as the source of an

emanation whi ch passe s from th e th erapi st to the patient This .
32 THE HEALING HAND

emanation has been kn own from the earliest times an d yet even
tod ay we understand very little of its nature or properties Each .

new observer in each age has called it by a different name ac

co rding to his idea of its natur e or properties Am ong the many
.

names by wh ich it has been designated are magnah magnum "

“
by Van Helmont odic force by Reichenbach animal magnet
, ,
” “ ” “
ism by Mesmer vital magneti sm and human electricity by
,
"

others It was u sed in earlier times by names unknown to u s

.
,

th e transmiss ion of thi s emanation probably being the obj ect of

th e first manipul ations which later were developed into the tech
nic of mas sag e .

A classi c example of the tran smi ssion of th i s emanation is

found in the fourth ch apter of II Kings whi ch recounts the story
,

of Eli sh a s restoring life to the son of the Shunammite

’ ‘

Frequent referen ce s are to be found in ancient literature to

th e practice of emfloying vigorou s h ealth y persons for givi ng
strength to ver y weak or very old person s .

The h and is us ed for the purpo se of communicating this

emanation in all countries throu gh some form of h ealing rite .

Th ere can be no doubt th at thi s is one of the sources of th e heal

ing power of the h and .

Al l of the name s wh ich h ave been given to th i s em anation

from the body are obj ection able becau se they rest upon some
th eory of its nature .

We do not know enou gh about the nature of this emanation

to name it from that point of view We know much more about
.

wh at it is not th an about wh at it is We know that it is not

.

electricity nor magnetism in any exact meaning of th ese terms

, , .

We do know however that it flows from the h and s into the

, ,

bodies of others wh ere it cau ses many to experience a gentle

tingling sen sation ; th at it is vi sible to mo st people under certain
circum stance s ; that it will m ak e water glow faintly in the d ark ;

that it will ch ange the taste of water ; th at in water and oth er

carriers it will convey th e intention of th e th erapist to the pa

tient without the patient s knowledge of what that intention

’

was ; and that at least a considerable part of th e credit for m an

u al h ealing seems properly to belon g to th e beneficent power of

th is emanation .
 T HE HEA LING HA ND 33

In the absence of more defini te information as to the nature

of this emanation it has seemed undesirable to name it according

to some idea of what it is ; h en ce my son Dr Ernest Wel tm er

, .
,

has made yet another name for it He has cal led it m anefflu v
.

ium a term literally meani ng a flow from the hand This name
, , .

describe s its source onl y and says noth in g about its nature
, .

Wh ile the term is a good one I stil l find it somewhat cu m

,

bersom e and we have grown ac cu stomed to u sing one of the older

terms vital magnetis m that I frequently u se the older term
, ,

even now th ough it is not really as good as the new one In gen .

eral I u se the two terms interchangeably I sh all do so in this

.

book .

Experim ents by means of which m aneffl u viu m or vital m ag

n etism is mad e vi sible as it flows from th e h and show that some ,

persons produce more of it th an oth ers and that the amount of

th e emanation varie s with th e same person at different time s .

Those who are most successful and who have had mo st prac
tice in th e u se of the hand s in the treatment of the sick show the
greate st flow and when a pe rson makes an effort to produce a
,

greater flow and wh en he thinks of the h and as he u se s it in

,

healing the flow is increased in proportion to the inten sity of the

,

mental state .

While we wou l d not like to make a rule even from the many
observation s which we have made in this manner we yet feel ,

th at it is entirely probable that great therapist s of all time s h ave

h ad a great flow of thi s vital magnetism from th eir h and s .

It is very probable that this is th e source of th e idea that the

h and conveys a h ealing power from the therapist to the pati ent .

It is probable that thi s is wh at the woman received wh en she

touched the hem of Jesu s robe and h e knew th at vi rtu e h ad
’ “

g one out of h im ( Mark

Many a person who was expecting nothing of the kind h as
felt th at he was giving some force to another when he has placed
his h and upon some one who was suffering or hurt And many .

a sufferer has felt th at he was receivin g some power from the

therapi st even though neither had any idea that such a force was
,

being comm u ni cated from one to the other .

These many separate but convergent lin es of ev idence point

,

stron gly to the reality and importance of m anefflu v iu m or vital

34 THE HEALING HAND

magnetism as a source of h ealing in the therapeutic u se of the

Wh enever I place my h ands upon the body of patient it is

a
always wi th the intention not only that my h and s shall take u p
,
“ ”
the normal h ealth vibration and tran smi t it to the tissues of
the patient but al so that they shall trans m it to his body a strong
,

current of m anefflu v iu m which is to work out in his body my

intention for his perfect heal in g .

On the whole we m ay consider that vital magnetism or

,

manefflu viu m is an impo rtant source of the h ealin g power of the

hand independent of the sugge stions of the th erapist and the
exp ectations of the patient .

I ts production is under th e control of the therapi st and the

effect that it will have upon th e patient depend s upon the thera
i intention It i wit h ut doubt one of h impo t nt e
’
t t
'

p s s . s o e r a ag n

cie s u sed in manu al h e alin g one of th e sou rces of th e therapeuti c

,

power of the healing hand .

 Ou r physics teach that all temperature wheth er in a
us ,

pi ece of wood or a piece of flesh is the rate of movem ent of the

,

atom s compo sing that th in g .

Then health is per fectly expre ss ed in a movement of the

body which is normal in a temperatu re which is normal normal
, ,

in pul sation n ormal in sensation and normal sensation is no sen

, ,

sation at all unl e ss one of th e senses wi shes to u s e th e power

which it po ssesses .

Therefore magneti sm is this life force which after attracting

to it self all that is needed to make it perfect find s expres sion at
th at particular rate which produces th at temperature .

This life force whi ch comes into ou r bodies wh ich we have

attracted by that power of attraction wh ich each soul po sse sse s ,

which we call magneti sm exists about u s j u st as th e electrical

, ,

energy exi sts in diffusion in the atmo sph ere and is gath ered by
a machine wh ich vibrate s at th at rate of movement by ou r atti

tude of agreein g with ou r environment agreeing with the high er

,

elements we mu st choo se to be th e recipient of th i s life in its

,

perfection if we wi sh to u se it and tran sfer it from one to an

,

other.

Then what do we need to do to make ou r hand convey a nor

mal vibration We only have to ch oose that it should expre ss
that life force j u st as th at life force exist s in its normal con
dition.

Then what would be th e re sult " Th at rate of motion which

is normal become s the rate of motion expre ssed in ou r h and and
that is the rate of motion for which every human sou l is callin g .
 THE HEALING HAND

Uncons ciou sly we would know how to answer that call but
ou r consciou sness can only an swer by be ing wil lin g that it sh al l

fill u se and control u s as it naturally doe s

, .

A great many exp eriment s have been made for the purpos e
of testing th e power of vital magnetism to produce effect inde
pendently of sugge stion and with the result th at we are con
v inced that it h as thi s power .

Even where th e suggestion element is reduced to the mini

mum th e effect s of its application are con stant wh en it is em
“ ”
ployed on sen sitive subj ects .

MAGNETISM IS THE EFFE CT OR RES ULT OF THE I N

TENTION EITHER C ONS CIO US OR UNC ONSCIO US ON T HE
,

PART OF THE PERSON WHO EXER C ISES IT .

Let u s th ink for a moment about what we h ave considered

m agneti sm to be and t h en get hold of the new con ception or the
im portant conception of it Th en you can choose the one you
’
.

please .

First magnetism was considered the quality of each per

,

son s n ature e scapin g from th em

’
There was no questio n about
.

the fact that a person in lively mood has one kind of influen ce
and in a sad mood another kind of influen ce .

That there is somethin g th at goes from the hand or some

thing that goes from the sol es of ou r shoes which leave s enough
,

in ou r footprints to enable th e bloodhound to track u s and to

di scriminate between the tracks we make and between the track s
anoth er person m ake s we do n ot deny , .

Howeve r if th is particul ar emanation has any h eal ing in

,

flu en ce we do not know it and h ave never been able to dem on

strate it .

In th e study of magneti sm we only need to change the su g

g e stion You. sa y W h at doe s,su gg e stion h ave to do with it
Su ggestion offers th e th ought for adoption to the person ad
dressed If th ey adopt that thought th is adopted thought pro
. ,

du ces a correspondin g movement in the thou ght of the person

adopting it T h e movement does not change
. .

Magn eti sm is the vibration in the h uman body which is pro

du ced by th e though t entertained by th e p erson occupying that
body If th at person s thought is directed to some one abou t
.
’

him then the infl uence is in accord ance with the intention or
 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND
’
38

been done in life has been trusted to the hand An y require .

ment of the one th at wi shes to do the greatest amount of goo d

in the world is eas ier to do than not becau se it is natural .

Wh en we have conformed to the laws of life and growth we ,

have conformed to nature .

Whenever we allow ourselves to be the mediu m through

which thoughts of encouragement though ts of growth and o f ,

h appiness go out to the world we are not acting al one We ar e

, .

j oined with the greatest company of constru ctive thinkers an d ,

h ave all of God s power to help u s wh ich is eas y to do becaus e

’
,

it is natural .

We find th at the quality effect and power of magnetism as

,

a h uman influence is determined by th e th ou ght th at proj ect s

that in fluence T h e person who has only his own happiness an d

.
,

the happines s of the world at large at heart is constantly radiat ,

ing an influence th at is helpful an influence that is adaptabl e

,

to every person and congenial to every person who comes in

contact with it .

There is still another means by wh ich the h and affects the

patient for therapeutic effect Thi s is in eliciting reflex w
.

spons es from th e nervous system .

These respons es are al so very important but they depend ,

so mu ch for their expl an ation upon an atomi cal and physiologi cal

g ro und s th at t h ey cannot be p rop erly deal t wi th in an arti cl e of

this general nature .

Let it suffice for this phase of manual treatment that wh e n ,

ever the h and s are applied to the body nerve stimuli are carri ed ,

to the central nervous system whi ch are distributed throu gh th e

outgoing nerves in su ch fash ion as to bring about changes in th e
function s of the internal organ s independently of what the pa
tient th inks or ex pects .

These effects depend upon the po sition of the th erapist s ’

h ands and reflex nerve path s between the skin and the deeper
organs . Although not alway s as powerful as the stimulation s
which resul t from other forms of manu al suggestion and appl i
cation s manual reflex su gge stions as th ese are called are ver y
, , ,

dependabl e and may be u sed with great effect by th ose who u n

derstand the manual reflex nerve path s and how to u se them
- .
 THE HEALING HA ND 89

Now we have seen that th e u se of the hands in therapy

brings into play several strong forces which may be used for
promoting h ealth .

It is not strange th at th e hands are so successfu lly used in

healing ; rath er it is strange th at th ey are not more generally
,

us ed for thi s purpose .

The hands are used however for giving th erapeutic su g

, ,

gestions and for conveying the mind s healing power mu ch more

’

commonly than is suppo sed .

All person s who u se the h and s in giving treatments of any

sort whatso ever em ploy wh ether they are aware of it or not , all
,

th e healing agencies that we have been studying .

All others who minister to the sick, even though they do not
touch the patient u se the hand in giving gestu ral su ggestions
,

which often are more important than th e drugs or other agenci es

which they u se .

In many forms of treatment the credit for the cures belongs

,

far more to th e beneficent power of the healing hand than to the

remedi es to whi ch th e credi t is given
’

I n all th es e cases th e importance of the hand wou ld be ia

creased by their intell ig ent u se and it is to be hoped that th e

time will come when all th ose who mini ster to the sick will be
well versed in the th eory and technic of the therapeutic u se of
th e h ealin g hand .

The absolute pitch of h ealth is ju st life in norm al action .

We do not know what that rate of action is any more than a ,

s ing er m ay know what num be r of vibration s are neces sary to

produce the tone A but you can intend that the normal life move
,

ment in you r h and and no oth er movement sh all be expressed

through that hand wh en you u se it for h ealing
,
.

“
An y one can sooth e and heal by l ayin g their h and s upon the
and a trained Su ggestoth erapist develops wonderfu l skill
”
si ck
,

by contin ued intelligent practice .

Th ere is in each person no matter how physically deranged

,

or mentally di sturbed th e de sire for health and comfort

, Such .

a con sci ou s de sire suggests h ealing to the subj ective or natural

h ealing force s in the ti ssues so th at more than 60 per cent of all
,

peo epl who “

fal l ill get w el l"
without f u rth er h el p T h e 40 per .
40 THE HEALING HAND

cent who do not get well with out help h ave the same heal ing hel p
from within but do not util ize it
, .

T h e h ealing h and stimul ates the lagging nerves stim ul ates ,

th e affected ti ssue cell s cau ses h yperemia by means of the man

,

effl u v iu m transmitted to the affli cted tis sue s an d als o j o ins wit h
,

the natural h ealing forces with in the patient s body and th e ’

,
“ ”
normal health vibrations crowd out the disease condition s j us t
as in the 6 0 per cent of case s that were h ealed wi th out calling

h elp.

The therapist has to know th at h e tru st s hims elf to arous e

normal movement in the affected tissues .

He conveys th at vibration through his h and to th e patient s ’

body and so to th e subj ective mind of th e p atient that is

, ,

running its mech ani sm Th en he let s it alone

. .

He can take a body so disturbed that it has the wrong tem

p ratu re a h eart pumping rapidly t ryin g to take care of the
e ,

circul ation th at is backing up on it p ain s m ay be su rging throu gh

,

th e body but if the patient allows him to put his h ands on him
,

and offers no con sciou s obj ection h e can po sitively ch an ge the

,

entire circulation of the blood in an y person s body within fifteen ’

minutes T h e patient h elp s T he subj ective mind of th e patient

. .
,

whi ch enables th e p atient to sing nat u ral A by simply wanting

to and trying takes up th e vibration whi ch the Su ggestotherw
,

pist has in h is hands and applies it to his entire ph ysical

,

organism .

I s that always the case " It is always th e case provide d ,

th e one wh o se hand is doing the work doe s not ch ange hi s

thou ght with regard to what he wants th at hand to do .

T h e be st way to do that is to th ink I will put my hand ther e

f
‘

and let it convey one h eali ng th ou gh t for fifteen minute s It .

will take aspecial effort of yourself to change the intention you

h ave delegated to your h and That is th e wh ole secret of th e
.

laying on of hand s and that is all the secret th ere is about it .

If you can wi ll th at yo ur hand shall convey your intention

through the body of your patient to his subj ective mind and you
put that h and on any body who will j u st let you hold it there
,

and then you do not change your thought w i th regard to what

you want that hand to do you can ch ange the vibration o f any
,
 THE HEALING HAND 41

body that is alive in fifteen minutes I have had many patients

.

who have made this response in four m inutes .

There are many way s by whi ch we know whether we get

resu l ts or not . Many people have found th at they cou ld h elp
oth ers by j u st putting th eir hands on th em It is because they .

have never learned to di stru st the hand They m ay speak words .

in which they do not have full confiden ce they may express ,

though ts in which they do not believe ; but when they u se th e

h and healing attends it becau se th ey depend upon th e h ealing
,

h and for what they give it to do .

The life motion is a normal motion T HE MOVEMENT OF .

LIFE U NDIST URBED IN ANY PHYSICAL ORGANISM IS

, ,

Th ere is j u st one kind of health and reasoning from ana

, ,

logy there is j u st one kind of disease We have entangl ed ou r

, .

selves in an interminable mess of name s and su perflu ities nam ,

ing th is condition one di sease and that anoth er until we are

, ,

los t in a maze of technicalities We have lost sight of th e fact

.

that there is but one right way and all others are wrong Yet .

th e human mind in its search for truth is constantly striving ,

cons tantly seeking th at one way .

All th at one of you need s to do if you have not had the

any ,

ex perience of causing h ealin g by layin g you r h ands on th e sick ,

is j ust to try it Wh en I first began my teach ing of h ealing I

.
,

was sure that anyone who laid his h ands on th e sick with the ,

intention to help coul d succeed in giving benefit nine times wh ere

,

he would fail once because his intention woul d be th at of giving

,

h elp When he does these two simple things h ow much power

. ,

doe s he bring to his assi stance do you think I Think what you
‘

can command wh en you determine your h and shall carry the

“ ”
th ou ght of health In addition to the health vibration and
.

healing powers from within you draw upon the whole universe
, ,

and all the power it h as to keep things in h armony is joined in

with th e movement you have delegated to you r hand to be con
v eyed to the bodily ti ssue s and subj ective mind of your patient .

T he people who h ave come h ere and got the be st re sults are
“
those who h ave come saying I know noth ing about wh at to do ;
”
I concede that you know it all You do it ; I will leave it to you
. .
42 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

F or twenty five years I h ave been searchi ng for words by

-

which I cou ld convey to you a message as powerful as that

which I can silently give to you th rough the healing hand I .

“
have been searching for the Lost Word Wh en I shall have
.

“ ”
fou nd th at Word I can sp eak healing for all men .

My message will then be clear to all I do not feel that I

.

“ ”
h ave found th e Lo st Word, but I believe that th e h ealing word
whi ch I can speak with my h ands is a satisfactory s ubstitute
“ ”
until that Lo st Word h ll be found
s a .
 CHAPTER IV
—
SUGGES TION THE SPOKEN AND WRITT EN WORD
While it is with modern thinking to consider
not con si stent
m an of neces sity, a creature of circumstances as be ing depend
, ,

ent upon h is environm ent or bound by th e laws of h eredity we ,

cannot enti rely ignore th e infl uence s wh ich are con stantly modi

fying his pl ans in his efforts to adj u st h im self to the difference

of opinion of individual s and to the difference wh ich one find s
ex isting between appearance s and actual condition s .

M an is eith er a master of his ci rcumstances th us ov ercom ,

ing his inh erited tendencie s and u sing o nly such influences as he
ch oo ses from h is envi ronm ent or el s e h e is subj ect to and is
,

dependent upon th e circumstance s of environment and heredity .

Th ere are two g eneral classes of su ggestion direct su g ,

g e sti on and a u to s u gge s

-tion T h e s.u gg e stion s offe r ed to anot h er

or received from another are called d irect su gge stions Auto .

suggestions are tho s e dete rmination s or self ch o sen influence s -

wh ich begin and end in th e person s own self ’

.

If we wi sh to know on general principles what are th e in

flu ences that shape ou r lives we will have to analyze and cl assify
ou r beliefs If we wi sh to kno w wh at influen ces we h ave exerted
.

upon others we wil l have to find out what we h ave caused oth ers
,

to believe for each statement and each act of ou rs th at cau ses

,

another to adopt some new belief is a su ggestion wh ich we h ave

given and wh i ch h e has received .

We are very likely to feel ours elves immu ne f rom the in

flu ences of su gge stion simply becau se we do not act directly upon
th e advice of anoth er overl ooking the fact th at every tim e we
,

entertain a belief we respond to a sugge stion .

Taking th i s general view of the subj ect we fin d th at su g,

g es tion ente rs into an d fo rm s th e a ctive pri n ciple of ever yt h ing

th at influences ou r lives or that enables u s to infl uence the lives
of others .

Sugge stion s do not impart knowled ge to the human mind ,

or at leas t no more th an relative kn owled g e We do not receive

.

knowledge directly through suggestion We receive through this .

source only tho se beliefs upon wh ich we base activiti es which

,

lead to knowledge .
 THE HEALI NG HAND

It is an interesting and not altogether unprofitable mental

ex erci se to undertake to sep arate in ou r own mind s the things , ,

wh ich we believe from th e things which we know ; but before any

one can make him s elf capable of offerin g suggestions which
would be of general benefit and u sefulness to manki nd he must ,

be able to do this .

What we believe right or wrong shapes ou r lives Wh at

, , .

ever or whoever indu ces these beliefs inj ects into ou r lives the ,

basi s upon which we act and ou r actions terminate in eith er des,

tru ctiv e or con stru ctive res ults .

That suggestion is a power for evil that it can be ju st as ,

poisonous as th e doctor 8 mo st deadly dru g or as dangerous as ’

,
’
the soldier s keenest sword or the savage warrior s mo st poison
’
,

ed dart that it can wipe out a n ation at a stroke or give birth

, ,

to a republic or to a great movement that will result in th e

,

world s advancement is not difficult to realize These facts ar e

’
, .

accentuat ed wh en we fully understand that suggestion in it s ,

variou s phase s con sis ts in whatever influence induces belief u p

,

on which h uman activity is based .

T h e growt h and unfoldment of mil lions of soul s h ave been

arrested and th eir development retarded by being told th at man
is at be st a weak and limited creature
, , .

Generally this suggestion h as come from religious thought

,

and has be en utte red by th os e who believed th at what th ey said

was true Th ey believed thi s becau se anoth er wh ose veracity
.

th ey did not question had told th em that it was true and so , ,

adverse and deadly su gge stions were handed down through tra

dition poi soning and dealing out death to th e h uman race

, .

Others taught that life is indestructible immortal eternal , ,

and constantly unfolding Th is teachin g being in keeping with .

the n atu re of th e h uman mind was appropriated its influence , ,

felt and con stantly growing even thou gh th e masses were u n

, ,

consciou s of it it h as tod ay become a wo rld wide influen ce and

,
-

is exerting its power in th e increased vitality of the h uman race ,

manifesting its intelligence in universal unfoldment along intel

lectual lines in th e mechanical world in almo st innumerable in
, ,

v ention s and in th e mo ral uplift th at is ob servable in every

,

expression of human life ; all becau se man h aving cau ght th e ,

spi rit of immortality ceases to think of th e end of thing s and

,
46 THE HEALI NG HAND

It is no wonder th at the founder of Chris tian Science bu ilt

in so short a time a gigantic enterpri se and created such world
wide influence She utilized with all of their meaning the su g
.
, ,

gestion s which contro l the influence of belief upon th e hum an

mind .

WHATEVER IND UC ES BE LI EF IS S UGGESTION A ND ,

EVERY NEW BELIEF BE C OMES I N ITS TUR N A NEW , ,

SO UR CE OF SUGGESTION .

This general th ought is finding lodgment in the minds of the

great mas s of h u manity and is being accepted as a belief It is .

one of th e great sugge stions that th e race h as tak en Acting .

upon this m an is fearlessly u sing Infinite Wi sdom whi ch su b

,

round s h im ; h e is feelin g the safety of Infinite Presence ; he is

recogni zi ng the potency of Omnipotent Power and under th i s ,

belief wh ich acts as a su gges tion m an is advancing with out fear

, ,
.

T hi s thought is becoming universal in all civili zed nations ,

but it is possessed as an almo st uncon scious belief by the great

mass of creation It h as been given to the hum an mind to
.

utilize th e n atural forces and material s which th ey find abou t

th em l argely th rough the efforts of the fearless few who hav e
,

demonstrated in their work and in th eir lives the possibility of

perfection al ong lines of invention and human endeavor It has .

al so been greatly accelerated by tho se engaged in scientifi c t e

search who h ave di scovered th e l aws which govern th e ori gin

,

of th ings the prin ciples wh ich lie at th e beginni ng of al l we

, ,

m i ght say of life itself I n fact each m an who h as been su c

, .
,

cessfu l has throu gh his very su ccess su gge st ed greater po ssi

, ,

bilities to others .

M an seein g another 8 work approach perfection at firs t

,
’
,

worships the m an as a geniu s then worship s the genius withou t

,

th e m an and th en discovers th at thi s achievement is po ssibl e ,

not becau se of any p articul ar i ndividual but becau se of the ca ,

pa cit y of m an to comprehend perfect law and to apply its prin

cipl es .

The term sugge stion has been long considered as belonging

, ,

onl y to th e vocabu l ary of the hypnoti st or th e mental healer .

T h e idea of its general application has been lost in th e limited

attention whi ch th e average th inker h as given to the subj ect .

But with ou r pre sent knowled ge of the mind of the influence s ,

 THE HEALING HAND 47

which cau se mental activity and with the general conclusion that
all beliefs received into th e mind are su gg estions th e produ cts ,

of belief of circumstan ces of h u man attainments of nature s

, , ,
’

products we are compelled to broaden ou r idea of its scope

, .

Whatever in man s environment arouses belief whatever springs

’
,

out of his own processe s of reasonin g when he compares one con

cept with another one belief with anoth er and th en reache s a
, ,

conclu sion fo rm s a determination wh ich res u lt s in action ; starts

,

into activity th e mo st powerful of all forms of suggestion auto ,

sugg estion So we find that thi s idea which a few years ago
.

s eemed to be the prerogative of only a certain clas s wh o were ,

hardly worthy of respect is th e mysteriou s force which h as fu r

,

nish ed both the food s and poi sons both th e su cce ss e s and fail
,

ures in all walks of life has been man s inspiration h as been

,
’
,
’
man s fate .

The term suggestion has been gen erally accepted to mean

, ,

any influence from with in or without th at will cau se th e mind

to act .

SUGG ESTION IS THE ESSENTIAL ELEMENT IN ALL

ADVI C E THE ACTIVE PRIN CIPLE IN A LL INSTR U CTI ON
,
.

BELIEF IN SOME FORM IS THE R ESPONSE WH I CH

MAN GIVES TO S UGGESTI ON .

Therapeutic suggestion with wh ich we expect to deal re

, ,

lates entirely to the repair of di seased ti ssues of th e human

body or to the restoration to h armoniou s action of its disturbed

We upon the po stul ate th at th e mind of m an either con

s et

sciou sly or uncon scio u sly control s all th e fun ction s as well as ,

th e movements of his body ; th at all diseased con dition s of th e

body are the result s of mental attitude and th at the elimina , ,

tion of di sease is al so d ependent upon the attitude of th e mind

toward the body in which th e di seas e exi st s ; th at that part of
th e mind wh ich perceive s through the medium of th e sen ses is
understood to be the obj ective side of man s mind while th at ’
,

part of m an wh ich responds to th e impressions sent into it by

the obj ective side of the mind is th e subj ective or uncon sciou s ,

mind and that th is sub jective part of one s self is the part of
,
’

mind that control s the involunt ary forces of th e body Assum .

ing that the reader is famili ar with th i s postul ate we sh all pro ,
48 THE HEALING HAND

ceed to deal with those suggestions which will rou se into activity
the latent forces exi sting with in th e subj ective mind .

We regard th e subj ective mind as having perfect faculti es

which wh en allowed to perform th eir functions in the natural
,

way produce perfect results That pecul iar faculty upon which
, .

th e su ggestioni st depend s for respons e to h is effort s to h elp hi s

patient we call the Law of Ph ysical Control or th e Faculty of
, ,

Phy sical Government Thi s faculty unperverted from its na

.

tural cou rse we repeat perform s its fun ction s in such a manner
, ,

as to keep all part s of the body in p roper working orde r and all ,

function s in a state of normal activity Th is particul ar facu lty .

upon which the psych ologi st depend s for response to his su g

gestio ns is wh at th e ph ysici an form erly de signate d th e patient s
’

Co n stitution which h e declared was very frequently able Oper

, , , ,

ating u nde r th e direction of an oth er mysteriou s fo rce which h e

called Natu re to re si st th e deadly action of th e medicine he gave

, ,

and reinstate h ealth in th e di seased body of his p atient .

In the system of healin g where suggestion is th e recog

,

ni zed remedy th e Th e rapi st offers h is su gge stion to th e su b

,

j ectiv e mind of his patient and regard s all reparative processes

as th e Operatio n of min d He regard s th e diminutio n of fever
.
,

th e elimination of waste matter the restoration of norm al cir ,

cul ation as th e result of ri gh t thou gh t acti v ity

, He look s upon .

di seased conditions imperfect circul ation and imperfect di ges

,

tion as th e re sult of wron g thought activity and knows th at ,

when h e has removed the cause of these obj ectionable condition s ,

as h e will do wh en h e turn s th e current of thou gh t into its prop

er channel s th ey will di sappear and h ealth will r e sult .

A therapeutic suggestion is one that rou ses into activity

th e l atent force s of th e subj ectiv e m ind of th e patient and caus es
it to rel ax undue tension s to start into normal activ ity its prope r
,

functions and th ereby elimin ate di sease .

It is understood that a su gge stion is th e expre ssion of a

thou ght and is pre sented by th e th erapi st to the patient with
,

th e pu rpo se of making it th e patient s thou ght T h e patient be

’
.

ing di seas ed and in pain h is m ind diverted from th e perfect op

,

cration of th e l aw of p h ysi cal control cannot thi nk rightly ,

He .

d oes not know what to th ink nor does h e believe th at h e can be

,

g i n to arran g e h i s t h ou gh t s in su ch a m ann er as to ov ercom e th e

 T HE HEALING HAND 49

inh armony which is di sturbing his body The therapi st know .

,

ing what to think suggests to the patient the right thou gh t for
,

h is acceptance .

If th e proper suggestion is given by the th erapist and is

adopted by the patient to th e extent of becoming his own

tho ught the result will be beneficial but if the suggestion is not
, ,

received unr e servedly by the patient th en th e th erapi st h as th e

,

alternative of introdu cin g it in anoth er way H e can now in .

stru ct h is patient to do somethin g whi ch in th e doing will re

, , ,

quire the patient to think the though t which will h elp h im I f .

thi s fail s to reach th e mind of the patient th e therapist can then ,

delegate his thou ght to hi s hand exercising th e intention th at

,

the thought he wi shes the subj ective mind of th e patient to

adopt sh all be conveyed to the patient s body in th e fo rm of vi
’

bration In this way th e patient s subj ective mind takes up the

.
’

movement and applies it th rough th e exerci se of th e faculty of

,

physical control and throu gh th e mech ani sm of the vaso motor

,
-
,

affect s th e ci rculation of the blood Thi s movement which

.

t hrough the circul ation of th e b lood reaches every po rt ion of the

ph ysical organi sm is a movement of the mind Wh eth er th e
, .

patient is con scious or u nconscious of the fact matters very little

so far as result s in healin g are concern ed However if th e pa .
,

tient is consciou s of th e fact that in overcoming the ailment in

re spon se to th e th erapeuti c suggestion h e is exerci sing a faculty
,

of h is own mind h e will h ave acquired a knowled ge of h ow to

,

overcome th e affliction s of h is body in succeed ing experiences .

The mo st effective means known to th e writer of transmit

tin g therapeutic suggestion to another person is that wh ich is ,

conveyed th rou gh th e vibration of th e h uman h and but th i s is ,

tru e onl y wh ere the mind of th e th erapi st is thorou gh ly con

versant with the operation s of th e mind in controlling the body .

In former times wh en one could h eal by th e l aying on of

h ands he was con sidered a divinely chosen person endo wed with
,

th is gift by a special di sp en sation of Providen ce Tod ay we .

know th at h ealin g by th e l ayin g on of hand s is th e re sult of

knowledge of how to think th e proper thou ght and h ow to dele ,

g ate and tru st th at t h ou gh t to the h an d in its appli cation It .

does not mean any special power of mind but it does depend ,

upon a greater knowled ge of the powers which dwell in the mind ,

50 THE HEALING HAN D '

and a knowledge of how to u se the se powers T he art of h ealing .

is now reduced to a scientific kn owled ge of natural law and th e

tech ni que of its systematic application .

It is not th e accidental touch of the hand th at h eals it i s ,

th e tran sm i ssion of definite purpo se proceed ing through th e ,

vibrations of the hand as a med ium emanating from a mind , ,

h aving knowled ge of the intri cate processes of th e workings of

the mind and trained to receive and tran smit thou gh t vibration s
, .

The application of the h and h as in it th e element of action I ts .

tou ch conveys more meaning than formulated words It speak s .

th e very l angu age of th e subj ective mind It transmits wh at

.

has been con s idered for ages th e mysteriou s force of hum an

electricity and associates between the two individu al s harmon
,

ious action of th at oth er mysterious in fluence known as h uman

magnetism It pas se s the senti nel which exi sts in th e form of
.

th e cons ciou s or obj ective mind interpret s its message to th e

,

subjective m ind of the patient and command s reco gnition an d

respon se wh ich p roduces the d e si red re sults Wh atever m ay be

.

th e h ealing influen ce h uman ele ctri city h uman magneti sm etc

, , ,

or wh ateve r virtue th ere m ay be in th e vibration per s e is not ,

essential to know but we do know that the trained m ind of th e

,

t h erapi st wh o understand s wh at thou gh t to th ink and knows ho w

to delegate th at thought to the hand can th rough th is metho d , ,

of offering sugge stion s accompli sh th e greatest re sult s in th e

,

work of healing .

We know that all phy sical or organic tissue is compose d

morphologically of cell s ; th at al l morbid or di s eased conditi on s
are th e result of abnorm al mental or ph ysi cal interfer ence wit h

th e action of cell s ; that all cell s h ave an individu ali zed in telli
g en ce an d are able to com m u n icate to some extent intellig enc e ,

to conti gu ous cell s In m an th e brain cell s ramify every part of

.

th e organi sm th rough th e prol ongation of their axi s cylinder s

or ( nerve fibre ) Th ei r special function is to transm it intelli
.

g en ce . The p h y s i ca l b a s i s of c ell s like

, al l ot h e r m atte r i s th e ,

molecule ( smalle st divi sibl e part of matter capable of independ

,

ent exi stence ) The molecule is always in a state of motion

.

( vib ration ) p r
,odu c in g h e a t a cc o r din g to t h e ra pidity of vib r a

tion T h e vibrating molecules of sub st an ce impart their rate of

.

vibration to th e ether whi ch permeates all bodies and in tu rn

 THE HEALING HAND 51

effects the ch aracter of its vibration especially is this true wh en

,

the two bodies are in contact ( th e h and of the operator on the

patient ) Bes ides th i s mechanical tran smi ssion of vibration the
.
, ,

cutaneou s covering of the h and posse sses very h i gh ly speci al

ized sen se organ s virtually part of th e brain and capable of

, ,

transmittin g a high degree of intel li gence ( intention ) Th i s is .

e speci ally seen in deafm u ti sm wh ere the organ s of touch replace ,

as carriers o f intelli gence and s en sation all of th e oth er o rgans ,

of special sen se ex cepting taste and smell I n lower form s of

, .

life in th e ant s the bee etc all com munication is tran smitted
, , , .
,

by touch the contact of the antenn ae Th i s antenna] l angu age

, .

amount s p racti cally to tou ch telepath y .

Hen ce it matters little wh eth er th e transmi ssion of intell i

g ence by th e nerve be due to a simple vibratory mo vement or a
ch emi cal m agnetic or elect ri cal ch an g e of its mo lecules It is .

certain th at th ereby not only a phy sical alteration of vibratio n

can be p roduced by l ayin g on of hand s but th at i ntelligen ce or

, ,

intention can be introduced which wil l reach directl y th e subj ec

tive mind of th e patient and th ere in au gu rate and start into ac
,

tiv ity th e thought thu s introdu ced T he subj ectiv e thu s stim u
.

l ated by th e powerful intention of the therapi st start s into op ,

cration th e only power knowled g e or mean s

, ( the subj ective
mind ) by wh ich a di seased bodily condition ever was or ever will

A woman from Il lin ois cam e to me for treatment who had a

very painful enlarged condition of the abdomen and high tem
, ,

peratu re .

Th i s l ady had been in a ho spital for two week s wai tin g for ,

an operatio n when t em peratu re an d othe r conditi on s were ad

j usted But during h er stay in th e hospital th e di stres sin g con

.

dition increased in stead of decreasing .

When she cam e to me she h ad to be brought into the hou se

on a stretch er On account of her ext rem e sens itiveness sh e was
.

loo sely clo th ed and h er moth er told me sh e could not be touch ed ,

th at I would have to depend on th e spoken su ggestion entirely .

I placed my h and s on th e abd ome n and on each side about

midway of the enl argem ent Aft er holding m y hand s in thi s
.

position about twenty five minutes assu ri ng h er th at the

-
,

thou ght vibration being conveyed to h er mind throu gh the cell s

52 THE HEA LI NG HA ND
'

of would result in reducing the swoll en condition an d

her body,
temperature all pai n and some of the swelling was gone and sh e
,

was able to stand on her feet .

Immediately following this treatm ent which was the noon ,

h ou r she was helped to her carriage and went to her moth er s

,
’

home five blocks away She was put to bed and fell asleep at
.

once not waking until six o clock in the eveni ng when she took
,
’
,

some nouri shment and dropped to sleep again Next morning .

all swelling was gone and tem peratur e normal .

This was an instance of absolute response to the Layi ng on

of Hand s Her recovery was so rapid and the condition follow
.

ing so perfect I was not able to determine wh at was the matter

,

with her .

Another case in point is th at of a young l ad y eighteen years ,

of age who during a period of strenuous work in school and the

, ,

attend ant ex citement of social affairs associated with probably ,

some degree of homes ickne ss became sudd enly blind , .

The u sual medical mean s were employed to ascertain the

cau se of the trouble and th e us u al remed ie s applied with out
, ,

re sul t ; when a week after w ard s sh e applie to h e writer for

d t
relief th e eyes were thorough ly dil ated there was a blank stare
, ,

in th em and the u su al test s for detecting blindness were u sed

with the resul t that th e diagnosi s of her medical cons ul tants was
confirmed—sh e could see nothing .

There was a h igh state of nervou s excitem ent in evidence ,

ex treme ten sion in th e muscles of the neck contraction of the ,

scalp and rapid pul sation of the heart Aside from these symp .

toms the young lady s eemed to be in perfect heal th .

The patient was a fine sen sitive subj ect and while I knew ,

th at sh e coul d respond to the spoken suggestion th at the laten t

power ex i sted within her to equ alize h er forces remove all con ,

traction and liberate the pressure which prevented the prope r

action of the organ s involved th e expedient of the h and was con
,

sidered the bes t means of conveying th e sugge stion in this case .

Having determined upon the proper intention to exercise ,

the suggestion was delegated to th e h and wh ich I held on her ,

head for th irty minutes At the end of this time perfect relax
.

ation of the entire body was in evidence breathing pulse and , ,

54 THE HEALING HAND

and a so mewh at d ifferent attitude toward the th erapist Here .

,

th ere mu st be th e same trust in the therapist and the mean s

he u ses but there is l ackin g much of the stimu li that are so hel p
,

ful in the other cas es Here th e patient s h ave to depend upo n

.
,

the knowledge of the therapist finding expression through th eir

own powers They have to depend upon th ems elves as well as
.
,

upon the therapist ; they h ave to trust both the therapi st s ’

knowledge and their own powers They lack the tangible rea .

son for tru sting th e th erapi st th at th ey h ave wh en he appli es

the soothing hand to their tired worn tissues gi ving immediat e , ,

and tan gible relief .

There is a universal tendency to depend upon action and a ,

tendency h ardly less universal to di strust assertions that are

not backed by some sort of performan ce T he sick when they .
,

come to him for help mu st h ave some very strong reaso ns for
,

tru sting in the therapi st s power in order to be sati sfied with

’

unaided sugge stion e specially wh en th ey h ave always been us ed

,

to the application of some sort of ph ysical remedy for the very

sli ghtest ailment .

When the sufferers awake to the fact that the th erapis t

is dep ending l argely upon the action of powers contain ed with in
th eir own pain racked bodies they h ave another difficu lt oh
-
,

stacle to surmount before they can give that unques tio nin g tru st
th at is so necessary to th e acceptance of suggestion Th ey fin d .

it h ard to depend upon someth ing that is with in themselves for ,

every pain that th ey feel comes as a te stimony that they are no t

capable of taking care of th eir bodie s and for th e th erapis t to ,

l ook for strength in bodies th at feel so weak to th eir poss essor s

as theirs do to th em s eem s little le ss th an ridi culou s
,
.

The glamour of my stici sm and miracle is hard to replace

with the more pro saic and potent lesson in self reliance ; more -

valuable but accounted less highly on account of the homely

,

origin with in They are not always able to understand th at th eir

.

trouble is often a mi sdirection of power and th at the sam e ,

power that they u se to reco gni ze th eir pains is amply suffi cient ,

if properly applied to relieve them ; they are suffering too mu ch

, ,

as a ru le to wi sh to seriou sly tak e up a study of the law of

,

psych ology .
 THE HEALING HAND 55

The obj ect of th e therapist is to induce his patients to th ink

as he wants th em to th ink He should know what sort of
.

thoughts for th em to think and then understand what means

,

are to be used to attain thi s end .

H e is working on the h ypothe sis that if a man think s the

proper thoughts he will not get sick and that fallen sick he can
, ,

be restored to health by thinking correctly The thoughts he .

wants his patient to think are thought s of hope and good cheer ,

thought s that quick en the flow of the blood make the pulse ,

steady and strong m ake th e breathing deep make th e di ge stion

, ,

and as simi lation good keep the ex cretory organ s actin g norm
,

ally and make all of th e secretion s of the body ample in qu antity

and of the ri ght qu ality and compo sition F or th e therapist th e.

most important of the patient s attitudes is th at of trust in the

’

means he is u sing to restore th em to health and everything that

assi st s him in establi shing this confiden ce in h imself and his
meth od s is of value He mu st know perfectly wh at suggestions
.

to give he mu st be acquainted with all th e method s which are

,

of u se in controllin g the thought of his patients .

In di scu ssin g the subj ect of suggestion th rough th e spoken

and writt en word we are dealing with the same principle in each ,

ex cept in th e manner of presentation .

During a period of twenty six years I have carefully studied

-

the different effects produ ced by the same suggestion stated in

spok en word s and als o in letters book s and oth er printed matter
, , ,

and strang e to r el ate my experien ce prove s to me th at th e

, ,

written word contain s eith er a gr eater vitality or el se secu res

more careful attention on the part of the one to wh om it is ad
dr ess ed th an does th e spok en word .

There m ay be reason s for thi s th at we could di scover by

careful con sideration First the sugge stion given in a letter
.
,

s ecu res the attention of th e one to wh om ad dre ssed and doe s not
elicit at least a spoken obj ection or question but is responded to
in the form in which it is presented securing only one interpre
,

tation of it unm odified by any re statement th at migh t be -

brought ou t by question s whi ch are likely to ari se wh en you

speak to your patient Second it can be reviewed many times
.
, ,

with the result th at it pre sents itself in the same form each time
attention is given to it .
56 THE HEALING HAND

D u ring th e past quarter of a centu ry we have addresse d

th rough letters alone more than people in th e service o f
ou r Home Meth od of Healing with the res ult that more th an
,

ninety per cent of tho se taki ng th ese treatments have given

favorable respon ses We h ave reach ed mo re than
.
p eo

ple throu gh the written word presented in the various books

which we h ave written and sent out in to the world Ju st what .

the percentage of respon se to th e subj ect matter of the books -

has been we would be unable to even conj ecture but feel th at ,

the most powerf ul of al l the agencies that h as ever come into

man s experience or that he has learned to u se is the written
’
, ,

word .

Th is whole book t o each of its readers is the written word

and it is my earne st desire th at eve ry truth it pre sents m ay fin d
a benig n re spons e in th e mind of the reader F or th e reader s
’
.

benefit I wi sh to call attention to the various examples given

in this book of th e spoken sugg e stion and to sugg est th at sh ould
,

you de sire to u s e any of the example s as your own you are at

liberty to change th ese spoken su ggestions into written word s
in letters or books that you mi ght wi sh to write if you desire to
help oth ers .

About four years ago I received a telegram from a gentle

m an some fifteen h undred miles away des cribin g his condition ,

and askin g for treatment He was sufferin g from mo st intens e

.

neuralgia affecting all part s of th e body In this case I was ac

, .

qu ainted with the temperament of th e patient and had personal

knowledge of these attacks While sufferi ng from th em th e pa
.

tient was alway s in an inten sely contracted condition and relax ,

ation had to be brought about before th e p ain could be amelior

ated .

In this particul ar instance th ere was every evidence of tele

pathic interchan ge My reply was immediately wr itten and
.

“
wired to the patient It contained th e se word s Be stil l and
.
,

rel ax no m atter how it hurt s complete in stru ction s will follow

, ,

by mail ”
This message was received by th e patient as nearl y
.
,

as we could cal cul ate at th e moment it was formul ated by me

,
.

When the telegram containing th e word s was received by th e

patient s family he had been asleep for two hours and was not
’
, ,

awak en ed or shown the tel egram u n til the following day but h e ,
 T HE HEALI N G HAND 57

was impressed with the thought th at he d eclared he had seen

so

the telegram, and, immediatel y upon comprehending its meaning,

he had dropped asleep The resul t was im medi ate and complete
.

Another cas e is th at of a lady aged sixt y

four who had been -
,

a bed ridd en invalid for twenty years but who appli ed for treat
-
,

ment ex pressing the des ire to be perfectly well and strong A c

, .

companying h er application for treatment was sent a very com

plete d escription of her ail ments and all her feelings ph ysical ,

and mental whi ch h owever conveyed the idea th at sh e was

, , ,

totall y unable to do anything for h erself In this cas e I knew .

that the pati ent s low estimate of her own streng th was her
’

principal weakness ; th at sh e must be aroused by gentle but firm

sug gestions in the form of com mand s to do little th ing s at first ,

and rapidly incr easin g the ex tent of h er activity With my .

sugg es tions I gave h er tasks of increasing di ffi culty unt il on th e

fourth morni ng after receivim my in structions th e exerci ses ,

for th e day in cluded aris ing dres sing herself and wal king down
,

stairs to the morning meal Th is suggestion was followed out

. ,

as the patient afterwards wr ote me by refu sing to reason upon ,

it When sh e first saw that on the fou rth day she was expected
.

to do thi s sh e felt as th ough sh e was simply enterin g anoth er

,

course of treatment which mu st certainl y re sult in failure as ,

had all th e oth ers she had tried before applying to me , She .

decided to try howev er as I had told her in th e preliminar y in

, ,

stru ction s th at sh e mu st without fail try everyt hing asked of

, ,

her if I should undertake to offer h er any help The final result

, .

Eight years h ave gone by and this l ady s go od health , in her

’

sev enty -second year, is noted by th e newspaper pre ss , sh e being

the moth er of a man of national reputation .

T h e foll owing example bring s out th e nece ssity of one s ad

’

j usting himself to those unchangin g forces about him with whi ch

he mu st associate but wh ich h e cannot ch ange
,
.

T wo prominent l adies living in a di stant city contempl ated ,

a tr ip E
to u r ope Whi
. l e the anti cip ation of meet i n g f riend s re ,

newing acqu aintances and vi siting pl ace s of interest after ar

rival at t h eir d estination fill ed th e ir
, mi nd s with ple a sin g fan ci es ,
58 THE HEALING HAND

there was the d read of seasickness which they knew th ey mus t

inevitably suffer unle ss some means were employed by wh ich
,

th i s u npleasant experience could be averted .

A few days before th eir departure th ey thought of applyin g

to me for su gge stion s that would h elp in thi s particul ar in stance .

Thes e l adie s are intelligent hi ghly cultured and not at all di s

,

po sed to be faddish They both believed in th e power of tele

.
e

path y or thought transference I gave them regul ar absent

,
.

treatment and s ent in structions wh ich if th ey understood and ,

put into practice would teach them th e lesson of adj ustin g them
,

selve s to every movement of th e sh ip until th ey would s impl y

vibrate in uni son with its every motion Th i s was n ecessary .

,

s in ce th e sh ip s motion could h ardly be affe cted by any o f th eir

’

movements .

Upon arrival at their European destin ation th e ladies both

wrote me stating that their voyage taken during the vernal
, ,

equinox and rath er tempe stuou s coverin g a period of fou rteen

, ,

days had been one of th e mo st enjoyable event s of their lives

, .

Not th e slighte st dispo sition to seasickness had been ex peri enced

by eith er of them Notwithstanding they placed h igh value u p
.

on the suggestions given each exp re ssed th e firm belief th at my

,

thought accompanied them and su stained th em by keeping aliv e

in th eir subj ective mind s th e d eterm in ation of co ntinual agree
ment with the movements of the steamer .

Another case somewhat similar to the se is that o f a l ady I ,

once treated for infl ammatory rheum ati sm Sh e lived in Florid a .

at the time sh e wrote m e and wanted ve ry mu ch to come to

Nevada as sh e had formerly lived h ere but could not think of

, ,

travelin g in h er condition .

In this cas e I us ed the idea of th e j ou rney sh e wi sh ed to

make as the fo cal point upon which to concentrate her attention .

My princip al suggestion to her was that she would rest perfectly

quiet for ten days and by th at tim e she would be able to make
,

the j ourney Th i s su ggestion was combined with oth er minor

.

one s wh ich would lead h er to make some sligh t u se of h er m u s

cle s keep h er bu sy and contented in th e thou ght th at she was
,

working t oward th e de sired result take h er mind off of her feel ,

ings and leave h er no time for discouragement .

 THE HEALING HAND 59

The resul t was what I had hoped for When she received .

my letter holding out to h er th e promi se of recovery and the as

surance th at she would be able to do th e th ing sh e mo st wi sh ed

to do sh e s ays that sh e felt a strong vibration cou rsing through

,

h er body along th e nerve s wh i ch soon changed to a sen se of

warmth and well being which l asted thro ughout each treatment
-
.

Sh e at once began to look forward to the time de signated with ,

confiden ce that it wo uld be as I said Sh e followed th e in stru o

.

tion s I gave h er expe cting to be benefited by them ; her whole

,

attitude was one of h 0 pe or rath er of perfe ct trust in m e and

, ,

confiden ce in th e exerci ses I gave h er to practi ce an d th e re sult ,

could have been noth ing l ess than the s ucce ss it was She was .

able at th e time stated to take the train an d make th e t rip to

, ,

Nevada in comfort .

Here I u sed th e patient s activities to enforce my su gges

,
’

tion ; I insp ired hope in h er breast and g ave th e unconsciou s mind

a ch ance to exerci se its h ealin g powers un hampered by the in

terference of th e con sciou s mind In fact I made her con scious

.
,

mind assi st the uncon scious faculties by keepin g its whole out
look filled with vivifying h ope that quickens and stren gth ens the
h eart action and set s into norm al vibration all th e cell s of the
body By giving h er something to do between times I kept h er
.
,

mind occupied with the thoughts of recovery and prevented her

from thinking about h er trouble s I made every u se of h er own
.

powers wh ich were arou sed into activity by th e suggestions I

g a ve a n d wh i ch p roved amply able to re sto r e h er to h e alth wh en
th ey had been properly d irected to that end .

Nature s force s are equal to th e task of restoring to h ealth

’
,

anybody no m atte r h ow weak an d di se ased so long as th e organ s

,

are intact and even after the se are gone sh e can still sometimes
,

r epl ace th em Few indeed realize what Nature ( th e un con sciou s

.

m ind ) has done and is continu ally doing for th em It has buil d .

ed the body from a bit of protoplasm 1 1 5 0 of an in ch in di ameter

-
,

into the mo st wond erou sly wrou gh t mechani sm in all creation ,

th e minute st cell of wh ose stru cture perform s wonders and pos

s e ss e s intelli gen ce of wh i ch we can con sciou sly fo rm no adequ ate

conception .
 CHAPTER V
NATU RE GOO D TO MAN
If he will only go to her man never gets too old or too ,

broken in health for Mother Nature to cradle him u pon her

bo som and knit up and repair the worn and torn tissu es and fu r ,

nish him with stren gth and to spare for all his requ irements
—
.
,

She keep s eternal vigil over him at all tim es slum bers not nor
s leeps . She knows no fear ex cept the poison inocu lated by ad
verse suggestion Accepts no defeat and fights impendi ng dis
solution itself
.

Th is is the only power th at ever h eal s tru st it

. — .

Why should you let men inj ect into your body of which th ey ,

know litt le medicines of wh ich th ey know les s

, , It is recorded .

that John Bahler of Battle Creek Mi chigan prayed for twelv e

, , ,

years for the restoration of h is sight after th e eyeball s had been ,

removed and new eye s grew in the empty sock ets

,
Ph ysiolo .

g i st s would s ay th at thi s is impo ss ible but fo rtuna te l y th ey d o , ,

n o t se t the limit to n atur e s powe rs If th e the

’
rapi st k n ow.s h ow
to give th e right su ggestion s and get the ri ght response from the
patient th ere is noth ing th at cannot be cured or at any rate no
, ,

one living has a right to say that any case is hopeless .

With the Suggestive Therapist th e movement of the mind

called thought is the remedy , T h e intention which prompts th e
.

movement or thought gives to it a specifi c character T h e

, , .

vehicl e through which th is movement or rem edy is transmitted

from the mind of th e th erapi st to that of the patient wheth er ,

it be by the laying on of h ands vibratory manipu lation written , ,

statemen t spoken word or telepathic vibration is called su g

, ,

ge stion .

I do not re gard th e su ggestion per se as having any healing , ,

property but the re sulting movement of th e mind finding phy

, ,

sical exp ression in vibration is th e h ealing power , The quality .

or inten sit y is gove rned entir el y by the p u rpo se which prompted

it which purpo se we call intention
,
.

Hence th ere are as many kinds of intention that we need to

, ,

understand as th ere are human needs to be supplied requ irin g a

, ,

knowledge on th e part of the th erapi st of a wide range of

specific forms of su gge stion .
.

Many therapists h ave undertaken to make on e or two forms

of suggestion cover all of the variou s phases of human distress
62 THE HEALING HAND

phase of pathology to the student or of discu ssing prognosi s in ,

any manner whatever with the patient .

One who has h ad a wide experience in suggestive therapeu

tics has seen results obtained where every indicatio n pointed t o
,

disaster and death th at wou ld j u stify a sweeping statement s uch

,

as th e following : Under no circumstance s no matter what m ay ,

be the appearance s allow yourself to give expre ss ion to any

,

thing wh ich will di scourage th e patient or in any sen se decreas e

h is hope .

T h e mo st potent remedy th e patient can adminis ter to him

self is to sincerely believe th at he can recove r .

Let th e sugge stive therapi st remember that h e g ives su g

ge stions in everything h e doe s th at makes an impression upon
the mind of the patient ; in th e tone of h is voice and in his man
ner of mo vement in th e si ck room as well as in wh at he say s to ,

h is patient or to tho se about him in the pres ence of th e patient

, , .

Whenever h e doe s anyt hing th at in th e slightest degree caus es

doubt di stru st or di scouragement in the mind of th e patient h e
, ,

is admin isteri ng poi son .

After many years of constant exp erience in adm ini stering

s u gge stive t reatment to many th ou sand s of people I have reach ,

ed the conclu sion that no one has any right nor can be in an y
way j ustified in offering a su gge stion that involves a doubtfu l
.

or di sastrou s re sult in an y case wh i ch m ay p res ent it self to hi m

for relief .

Believing that mind is th e only power in the universe that

cre ate s perpetuat es and repai rs t h at it wo rk s by processes which
, ,

of th emselve s are i nvisible and wh ich in pote ncy are infinite it i s ,

not within th e province of th e finite mind of m an to say to what

extent th i s mind can act as a repairer NO MAT T ER no WHA T .

EXTENT APPEARANC ES OF DESTR UCTION MAY SEEM

TO JU STIFY IT NO MAN HAS THE RIGHT TO SAY T O
,
“ ”
AN OT HER THERE IS NO HOPE FOR YO U
,
.

When we look abroad and see th e work of Creation the ,

p roduct s of Nature we are filled with wonder both at its extent

, ,

and its perfection and we are con strained to cry out

,
Al l thin gs ,
”
are po ss ible " In dealing with the hopeless sick we wi sh to bear
thi s in mind that th e power invoked which is In finite Mind is
, , ,

immeasurable and we are onl y j ustified in tal king of th at whi ch

 THE HEALING HAN D 68

is po ssible With ou r lim ited kn owledge of th e extent of an

.

Infinite Power it is so fooli sh for u s to question even tenta ,

tiv ely what m ay seem but a mere po ssibility

, .

In mo st cases co m ing under my perso nal observation wh ich ,

have ru n into more th an a h und red th ou sand I mi gh t say th at ,

they have com e to me as a l ast re sort Most of th em h ave been

.

pronounced either hopele ss or incu rable .

When I began my work I l aid down a certain rule to follow ;

I would try to fi nd a mean s of relieving all case s whi ch come to
me regardle ss of the di sease from wh ich they were suffering
,

and that I would willin gly m ake a h und red different tri al s of th e

same case before allowin g my self to entertain an y idea of dis

cou ra g em ent And

. wo rki n g on t h i s h yp o t h e s i s t h at no di sease
“
i s incurable I found th at th e differen ce in th e su cce ss in dif
,

ferent cases was NOT D EPEND E NT UPON T HE DISEASE

FROM WHICH THE PATI E NT WAS SUFFERIN G B UT UPON ,

THE DEGREE OF CONFIDENCE WHI CH THE PATI ENT

HAD IN HIS ABI LITY TO GET WELL OR IN MY ABILITY ,

TO HELP HIM .

However most cases come with th e qualification of h aving

,

bel ief in my ability to h el p th em or th ey would not appear Th ey .

al s o have uncon sciou sly to th em s elve s in mo st cases a belief in ,

their ability to recover Thi s is th e first thing we have to

.

streng th en wh en th e patient p re se nt s h im self be cau se it is as , ,

we all kn ow the vibration of his own mind acting in h armony

, ,

with the po sitive mi nd of th e therapi st that brin gs about the ,

h ealin g re sult .

The foregoing deduction s from my experien ces furni sh th e

bas is for my opening statement that th ere are m any s u gges
,

tion s that mu st be given in order to cover th e wide range of the

need s of th e variou s patients suffering from the vari ous ail
ments and in th e varyi ng degrees of di scouragement which they ,

present ; and al so j ustifie s th e statement that the th erapist is at

no time j u stified in telling a patient his case is h opele ss To .

illu strate th e l ast statement I will give a few concrete ex am ples .

S everal years ago a young wom an was brou gh t to the In sti

tute from Kansas suffering from goitre and apparently hope
, ,

les s Carried in on a stretch er she told me between spell s of

.
,
64 THE HEALING HAND

c hoking of her pitiable condition and begged me for j ust one

,

word of encouragement and h ope .

Physicians h ad said she could never recover ; th at h er lu ngs

were practically gone and rh eumati sm was evident in advan ced
stage ; that the h eart action was of su ch ch aracter that death

might be momentarily expected and that sh e wou l d be fortu nate

to live th ir ty days .

I found the patient in as good mental state as was possible

“
under such conditions Sh e said I kno w you can cure me and
.

I just have to get well I told h er sh e could get well althou gh

.
,

appearances would not j u stify me in makin g that stat ement but ,

I had learned th at back of all th ese appearances lies infin ite

power which finds ex pression wh en th e belief in health and
,

strength becomes so intens e th at th ere is no room for any oth er

thou ght Thi s suggestion was accep ted An immediate im

. .

provement was evident Th ree week s l ater this young l ady left
.

for her home not enti rely well but thorough ly as sured of final
, ,

and complete recovery wh ich came wit hin th e next six month s
, .

Anoth er case is th at of a l ady sixty three years of age who -

,

h ad called a physician to examine h er Thi s cas e was one in .

whi ch th ere was inten se pai n in th e pelvic regi on accompani ed ,

by inflammation and distention .

T h e first ph ysician pro noun ced it malignant tu mor in a state

of infl ammation operation indicated but on account of the ag e
, ,

and high temperature of the p atient declined to take furthe r ,

steps with out con sulting anoth er p h ysi ci an .

Doctor n u mber two was called who agreed with th e first as

,

to the disease but po sitively advised against an operation as it

,

would cost the life of the patient on account of th e state of th e

,

inflammation and th e area involved .

A th ird phy sician was called and like th e oth ers made an
—
, ,

ex min tion e h x min tion ad aggrav ted th e case and

a a ac e a a h a —
he too agreed that th ere was a tumor and th at it was malign ant ,

and propos ed to operate after a day or two of p reparation could

be m ade with th e promi se th at the patient MIGHT survive the
'

operation .

The first two do ctors left th e patient without any hope

whatever either from the operation or recovery T h e third of
, .

fered no hope of recovery unle ss an operation was performed .

,
 T HE HEALIN G HAND 65

with about one chance in hundred that sh e might survive the

a
application of th e mean s of cure .

I was then called and disagreed with the doctors as to the

, ,

tu mor diagnosed the case a pelvi c peritoniti s and sugges ted

, ,

th at if anyth ing co uld help her it would be my treatment ; that

I sincerely believed I could give her relief and if so the chances ,

were largel y in her favor for complete recovery .

Left alone with the patient th e first question as ked me was

, ,

My ans wer was You can

“
“” ”
C an I get well I T h e nex t ques
, .

tion was What is th e matter with me I ”

My an swer was I “ ‘

, ,

do not know ALL I KN OW about you is how to help you

,
”
, .

This the patient believed becau se I h ad in th e meantime been

able to pl ace my h and s upon the painful p art of h er body with

out adding to the pain Ins tead it had a soothing effect This
. .

treatment was the application of the h eated hand to wh ich had

been delegated the intention of reducing to a normal condition ,

as qui ckly as po ssible all th e con ge sted blood vessel s in th e

,

My firs t movement in behalf of th i s patient was to in spire

hope in which I was success ful In an hou r the patient was
, .

resting easy In anoth er hou r she was sound asleep Within

. .

twenty four hou rs all acute inflammation had sub sided and in
-

fi ve day s there was complete recovery .

Th ree years h ave elap sed with no return of the ailment and
at no tim e s in ce th at day has there been any di sturbance wh at
ever within th e body of that patient T h e doctors who pro .

nou nced h er case hopele ss by h is suggestion admini stered poi

, ,

son. The doctor who offered hope even thou gh in a doubtful ,

manner admini stered a portion of the remedy but not in such

,

potency as wou l d have resulted in h er recovery .

Another case in mind which occurred some ten years ago

, ,

was that of a woman sufferi ng from uterine can cer who had ,

been given thirty days to live She came from Texas to Nev ada
.

on a stretch er In addition to this malady of cancer she was

. ,

takin g large quantities of morphine and it h ad become a fix ed

T he disposition to refuse a h ard case was very diffi cult

“

to overcome, when first brought into th e presence of th is lady .

Howev er, she believ ed she cou ld be cu red I agreed with her .
66 THE HEALING HAN D

and promised my entire effort s to ass i st her in h er determinatio n

to recover .

Eleven weeks later this woman had no trace of cancer and

within forty eight hours after treatment began she was as ab so
-
,

lu tely free from th e mo rph ine h abit as th ou gh she h ad never

taken it Ten years have gone by and have brought no relap se
. .

This cas e taught m e that u nder no circumstances no matter

, ,

what the appearance of the patient would I damn th em with ,

“
THERE IS NO HOPE Thi s lady h as vi sited th e I nstitute
.

several time s since and is th e very pi cture of h ealt h Wh en .

brou ght to my office with cancer sh e weigh ed eighty two pound s -

.

On all of her subs equent vi sits sh e has weigh ed unifo rmly one
hundred and eighty pounds .

An other cas e was that of a gentleman who came from Oh i o ,

in a wh eel ch ai r wh i ch he had occupied for seven years having ,

been paralyzed by comin g in contact with an elect ri c cu rrent ,

while acting as conductor on an electric car His lower limbs .

were very much wasted and totally h elple ss but th ere was nor ,

m al sensation in them .

Wh en th is gentleman came for treatment he was in a h ow

ful state of mind He asked if we had ever had an y one as bad ly
.

crippled as h e wh o h ad received ben efit at ou r h and s

, I replied .

that we had He wanted to kno w wh at was required of h im I

. .

asked h im if h e could believe that h e could get well He sai d .

“ ” “
I want to believe it I said It is j u st as easy for you to ass um e
.

” “
su ch a po ssibility as to want to assume it He said Do you.

“
mean that wh en I assume a thing to be true I believe it I ,
” “
certainly do I replied
, Th en I will as sum e with all my heart
.

and with all my streng th that I can recover pe rfect u se of my

”
body he said
, .

He dates his healing from th e moment that h e assumed his

recovery to be po ssible In ten days h e was walking with out any
.

support cane crut ch ch ai r or anyth ing el se

, , , F or m any years .

h e has been one of th e mo st succe ssful practitioners in th e st ate

of Ohio h aving heal ed hu ndred s of people some of whom were
, ,

as badl y in need of h elp as h e him self h ad been .

T h e foregoin g cas e s all came to me as hopele ss one s and the ,

purpose of thi s ch apter is to encourage the practitioner who is

at the begin ning of thi s work to put into it his very bes t serv
,
 THE HEALIN G HAND 67

ices ; not to allow appearances to deceive hi m or to cau se him to ,

admini ster even by the sli ghtest look a poi s on ( fear su ggesti on )
, ,
-

wh ere a healing potion ( hope sugges tion ) might be the means

-

of saving a life .

Wh en I first began my practical work of healin g after hav ,

ing ex perimented for mo re th an a year I was cal led to th e door ,

of my home in Sedalia Missouri wh ere I met a gentleman wh o se

, ,

voice was choked with emotion and whose manner indicated the
greate st di stress He brokenl y informed me that he h ad call ed
.

on me to come to h is hou se and try if po ssible to ro u se h is wife

, ,

into con sciou sness before sh e p assed away .

He explained that th e physi cian who had h er in ch arge h ad

told him that I could u se some psych ic or h ypnotic power th at
would probably arou se h er into a state of cons ciou sne ss that
would enable h er to recogniz e h er friend s and bid them a fin al
farewell I told him I would cal l in a little while
. .

At that time I was still investi gating deep h ypnosi s and when
I was called to the door I was experimenting with a boy about
ten years of age in deep trance Returnin g to h is side I asked
.

“ ”
the boy if I should treat th i s lady He said Certainly.
, .

“
C an I help h er I asked He said You cannot offer a kind
word you cannot arou se hope you cannot even w
.
,

, , ish a suffering
person well without helping h im Of course you can help h er . .

“
What must I do 2 I inquired “
“”
Go and treat h er
. he said , .

“ “
Give her your best service you r be st thought
, Wh at am I .

“
to expect as th e result of su ch t reatment I asked That doe s .

” “
not concern you he replied
, Your duty is to go and offer u n
.

”
quali fied tru stful s ervi ce
, I asked him if h e th ou ght sh e would
.

g et well He
. said t h at th at w as a que stion wh i ch no m an h ad
a righ t to ask ; th at it was a p art of tho se wh o feel th at th ey

can h elp h umanity to offer to h elp th em ; th at th e power wh i ch

came into expre ssion wh en kind word s or deed s were offered ,

and which is beyond th e compreh en sion o f m an mu st be u sed ,

by man as th e agent for its ex pre ssion without anticipation or ,

any oth er form or re serv ation qualifyin g it .

I went to the bed side of thi s l ady a few moment s l ater and ,

learned th at sh e had undergone an operation in July The date .

u pon which I called was the second of September following I ,

.

found th at she had been given large quantities of m orphine and

68 THE HEAL ING HAND

that there had been very little time since the operation when ,

sh e was not under its influen ce .

Th ere was everyt hi ng in thi s case coupled with my l ack of ,

experien ce to cau se me to he sitate or to feel that whatever I

,

could do mi gh t not exte nd bey ond giving temporary relief How .

ever th i s feeling was only momentary and was displaced by an

,

overwhelmin g des ire to g ive thi s young moth er wh ose age was ,

twenty nine back to her little ch ild of four years and to her
-
, ,

hu sband onl y a few years her senior

, .

The ph ysician expl ained to me evidently believ ing his ,

patient did not h ear or understand as h e did so in her presence

,

th e utter hopele ssne ss of th e case sayi ng that sh e was thorou gh

,

ly dis eased from one end of th e al imentary canal to th e oth er ;

th at h e hoped I would be able to arouse h er and assured me th at
thi s was as far as I mi ght expect any re sult I told him that my .

full purpo se was to cure th e patient I s eemed to beli eve rig ht

.

th en th at such a thing was po ssible .

Though not u sing a drug ju st then he was administering

,

poi son by h is su ggestion to whi ch my as sertion th at I expected

to cu re th e patient proved an immediate and effective antidote
, .

After staying all night with th e case I was rewarded by

seein g th e patient sit up in bed and partake o f a moderately good

breakfast and three d ays later sh e came to my office a distance ,

of sixteen blocks .

Several time s in later years I h ave h ad the pleasure of a

vi sit from th i s lady and was reassured by her that th ere is not h
ing impo ssible to one wh o believes to the extent of offering h i s
unqualified service in the effort to relieve the di stresses of
,

humanity .

In the foregoing chapters we spoke of su ggestion in its

b roade st sens e as an y influence whi ch start s a new train o f
thought .

In th e following ch apters I shall discu ss th e power of su g

g e stion w h e re th e th ou gh t o ri gi n ate s in th e mind o f th e sende r ,

or th erapi st and without an o ral or written expre ssion is com

, ,

mu nicated to th e mind of th e patient or receiver with or withou t ,

the latter s knowledge Thi s brings u s at once into the realm

’
.

of telepathy .
70 THE HEALING HAND

That thoughts are transmitted and that suggestions are

given and received with onl y the sugg estor consciou s of th e fact
,

that su ch suggestions are being sent is a proven fact A great , .

number of instances in my own experience have convinced me

that not onl y has th e purpos e or intention of my mind been con
veyed to the mind of anoth e r without that person s knowledge
’

but th at the very word s which I wou ld have u sed h ad I written

or spoken my su gge stion were reproduced by the one w
, ho re
ceiv ed th e me ssag es .

Man y have acted upon these suggestions in such a mann er

th at th ey would have had to think the thought which I sent
them in order to do what th ey did
, .

Th ere are only certain kind s of suggestions however which , ,

can be sent to th o se uncon sciou s of bein g receivers More par .

ticu larl y is th is t rue of the silent sugg estion th an of any oth er ,

form of suggestion .

No person will receive that to which he would not give con

sciou s con sent or th at wh i ch even in th e sligh tes t con scious
, ,

ne ss h e would ch allenge deny doubt or debate in any mann er

, , , .

T h e telepathic thou ght upon wh ich a person wil l act mus t

be recogni zed as th e receiver s own He mu st th ink that it has
’
.
‘

h ad its ori gin in h is own mind .

Hence th e only though ts whi ch we have been able to send

, ,

that patient s would receive were so formulated by the s ender

,

th at wh en they reach ed the receiver he accepted them as his own

thought s and thinking th i s acted upon them
, , .

Sugge stion s sent in th i s manner are effective only wh en they

are in h armony with th e receiver s de sires his high er aspira
’
,

tions his deferred h ope s or with his h alf realized ambitions

, , .

In my experien ce I h ave been able to reach and hel p only

those wh o h ad a desire to h elp th emselve s The difficulty th at .

attend s th e tran smi s sion of telepathi c me ssages does not lie in

the difficulty of eith er sendin g or receiving th e messages but it ,

lies in learning h ow to bring into operation those high er forces

of man s being which can in no way lend con sideration to or
’
,

take an interest in th e sordid common place unimportant oh

, ,
-
, ,

j e ct iv e thin g s of life It is only.in th e ope ration of th e hi gh er

powers of man s n ature telepathi c forces can be u sed

’
.
 T HE HEALING HAND 71

Y ou ould never send a th ought that wou ld make a m an com

c
mit a crime because the vibrations of such thought would be
,

entirel y lost in the invi sible eth er as th ey wo u l d not be com

,

prehensible upon the pl ane of thought or th inkin g wh ere crime

,

tho u ghts are generated .

You could no more receive a thought that the eth er will

transmit whil e engaged in groveling pursuit s than th e teleg
, ,

rapher could take off a message from th e wireless receiver in .

a boil er shop .

The thoughts which find adm ission into the mind are th ose ,

which awak en some sm ou ld ering ambition whi ch lift man into a

,

plane where h e can do things th at he has desir ed to do but has ,

no t before felt himself able to accompli sh whi ch make him

,

master of tho se th ings wh ich he has desi red to accompli sh but

to which h eretofore h e has felt unequal lacking will power or
, , ,
-
,

the determinati on or sufficient strength of ch aracter to carry

,

to complete consumm ation .

 C HAPTER VI
PRACTIC AL APPLICATION OF TELEPATHY

the ladies mentioned the fact that her h usband was an inv ete
rate smoker ; th at h e felt it w as inj uring h is nerve s and under

mi ning h is h ealth ; that his greates t desire was to get al ong

without this stimul ant but th at he felt he h ad not the will
,

power to discontinue nor the courage to suffer the attending

,

cons equence s .

I told th em th at he really had the power within hi ms elf to

di scontinue th e h abit and to live without smoking ; that all h e
“
n eeded to do was to think I can get al ong all ri ght without it
,
.

I do not w ant to smoke I will not smok e now I will wait until
. ,
”
I really want to smoke I can live without it . .

“ ”
But th e lady answered th at is the very thing he th inks
, ,

h e cannot do ”
My answer was No matter what he thinks
.
“
,

now h e has the capacity to think he can and I believe that I

, ,
”
can help h im th ink so .

We agreed that the subj ect should not be mentioned to the

p atient who by th e way is one of th e prominent merchants of
, ,

Nevada and whom up to th at time I h ad never met

, , , .

I formul ated as above a few though ts which were in the,

form of determ inations with the intention that each time the
,

opportunity or d esire to smoke aro se the thought which would ,

“
follow this idea woul d be I do not want to smoke now I can
, .

”
g t along with out it
e I gave the command to thi s th ought that
.

it should appear and intru de itself upon th is gentleman s mind ’

wh enever its pre sence was needed to strengthen his determina

tion until he was confident of his own mastery
, .

Two week s later I was informed by the wife that her hu s

band h ad not smoked a single time since h er vi sit to my office .

His own story is very intere stin g He said that about fou r .

o clock ( the time at which the ladies had called , at ou r first

’
,

meeting ) he h ad reached into his desk for a cigar and mad e his
“
preparation s to light it when the thought came to him , I do
,

not wish to smoke j ust now and he lai d the ci gar down A few
”
, .
 THE HEALIN G HAND 78

hours later on going into that part of the office he saw the
, ,

cigar lying there and it occu rred to him that he h ad gone longer ,

th an us ual witho ut smoking and was surprised that he still did

,

not wish to smoke .

After the eveni ng meal which time he always spent in the

,

enj oyment of his cigar by force of habit he went to his cigar

,

box and picked up a ci gar prep aratory to lighting it when th e ,

“
thought came to him I haven t smoked for three hours and I
,
’

can do without it now .

This exp erience was repeated for two or three days with ,

occasional returns of the desire to smoke but this desire was not,

indulged and at the end of that time all craving and even the ,

habit which becomes an alm o st perpet u al act with the smoker

, ,

of reachin g into his pocket for a cigar or a match with which to

light it di sappeared
, .

It was a year before I became sufficiently acquainted with

the gentleman to tal k with him on the subj ect or before his wife ,

de sired to inform him of th e means by which he had bee n liber

ated . When th is time came I was invited to his hou se to dinner
,

and all parties h aving knowledge of th e incident were present , .

On this occasio n was made known to thi s gentleman for the ,

first time the means employed to assi st his determ ination to

,

live without smoking and th en he rel ated to me in much greater

, ,

detail h owever th e exp eriences given above

, , .

In this case the gentleman was perfectly willing to quit

‘

smokin g but the obj ective side of h is nat u re had failed to recog

nize th e power that d etermination can bring out of the depth s

o f the subj ective mind Thi s m an only needed the aid of my
.

personal effort to encourage him to make the determination ,

which called into action th e power to overcome th e h abit from

which he was suffering .

He still lives in Nevada I see him every day and he is not

.

only thoroughly confident of his ability to ris e above an y demand

his body might make but h e feels confident since th i s expe rience
, ,

that he is able to carry to a successful termination any worthy

am bition th at may ari se in his mind .

Another case is that of three men whom I have never met .

The moth er of these th ree men was attending my In stitute as a

p ati en t She
. had im pli cit confiden ce in the powe r of one m ind
74 THE HEALIN G HAND

to communicate with other min d s . She rel ated her story in thi s
w1se :
I h ave three sons all of whom are addicted to the us e of
,

tobacco and strong drink Two of th em have become almost in .

chris tes The oth er is a periodical drinker and is very fond of

.

”
his tobacco .

Sh e said that each of her sons was very desirous of over

coming th e liquor habit but that after th e failure of m any ~

p raye r s a nd pe rs u as i on s on h er p a rt s h e h ad decid e d th at n one ,

of them had th e streng th with in h ims elf to overcome th e desir e

for liquor T wo of th em desired as much to be free from th e

.

tobacco habit as from the craving for drink .

However the periodical drinker cu j oyed his tobacco and re

,

fused even to cons ider that it in any way inj u red him .

I told th e lady I was sati sfied that we co uld ad d to the de

term ination of all of th em suffici ent strength of purpo se to over ,

come the drink h abit and th at I was sure we could help th os e

,

who were willing to ris e above the craving for tobacco ; but that
I was su re th at no mind could be reached by a thought to which
it was not receptive ; h owever we would make the effort , .

A s in the case before mentioned the th oughts intend ed to ,

h elp th em were formul ated in such a way th at th e persons re

,

ceiv ing them wo u ld th ink th ey wer e their own thou ghts To .

“
each of those men we sent th is tho ught I am greater th an my ,

craving for wh i skey I can live without it I do not care for it

. .

”
now . Those thoughts were to ri se into con sciou snes s appro ,

pris te to the occasion when the crav ing appeared or wh en an

, ,

opportunity to drink was offered or when under any circu m ,

st an ce s th e subj ect mi ght be brought forward or th e temptation

presented The same th ou ghts were formul ated with regard to

.

tobacco .

T h e thought s were intended to appe ar in th eir minds as

“
their own ideas We intended that each one should th ink I will
.
,

g o tod ay wit h out u sin g tobacc o I w ill g o this w h ole week wit
. h
out u sing whiskey I can do it I am greater th an my appe
. .

”
tites .

wo month s after thi s lady s return to her home in a wes t

T
’

ern state I was very mu ch pleased to receive a letter fro m her

,

in whi ch she stated that from the moment we comm enced send
 THE HEALING HAND 75

ing this thought all three of h er sons had ch anged th eir atti
,

tudes T h e youngest one who was the most inveterate drinker

.
, ,

arose the morning foll owing th e day upon whi ch we had mad e
thi s compact dre ssed and hurried to his brother who lived a
,

quarter of a mile from him and m ade th e annou ncem ent that he
h ad determi ned never to drink another drop of liquor and that
h e would never again taste tobacco He had continued up to th e .

time of her writing master of th e situation

, .

When he made th is announcement th e s econd son an swered ,

“
h im by saying How queer " Wh en I awakened this mornin g I
,

felt th e us ual craving for a little whi skey .

On going into th e room wh ere I kept my bottle I saw a ,

pitcher of water wh ich my wife had set on the table to rinse

down my morning drink T h e th ought came to me, I will drink
.
“

”
thi s water and omit th e wh iskey This son continued the u se
.

of tobacco and an occasional drink of wh i skey on retiring , for

about ten day s wh en h e di scontinued the u se of both
, .

T he third one th e periodi cal drinker was just recovering

, ,

from one of h is spree s and on th e same day wrote a letter to th e

oth er two broth ers stating th at wh en he had found him self sob
,

ered from his several days dru nk h e h ad felt th e queerest feel

’
,

ing of power wit hin and was convin ced that th i s would be his
,

l ast spree He however continued the u se of tobacco and at the

.
, ,

time the moth er wrote me, told h er that he believed it was a part
of hi s life to indul ge in th i s stimu l ant T wo years later he told .

h is moth er that if h e had the determination he believed he ,

wou ld quit tobacco She at once as su red him that he could do

.

so and later on I was info rmed that he h ad acted upon the amok
,

ing sugg estion with the same success that h e had upon th e drink

I have given the foregoing cases in detail becau se of the

pe cu li ar readiness with whi ch this thought was received , and as
an aid to thos e who have re l atives whom th ey wish to help .

In formu l atin g the thought for tho se person s, care was tak
en to pu t it in such form th at each receiver would reprodu ce it as

an impul se of his own Having no kn owledge of an outside in

.

fl u ence, but thinking they thought it themselves th ey acted u p ,

on it
.
 T HE HEA LI N G HA ND

This brings out another interes ting point T h e th re e

also .

brothers were not together On e of th em lived several h u nd red

.

miles from the other two who lived a quarter of a mile ap a rt

, .

This experience convinced me th at more than one mind cou ld re

ceive the same thou ght from on e sender It also il lu s trate s th e .

power which each one possesses to help another wh en h e so d e

Based upon this experience I have been enabled to form u ,

late instructions which show parents how to h elp those ch il dre n

who would resent personal advice but who innately desir e to do ,
"
the things which th eir parents believe th ey do not desire to d o ,

because of having tired their mind s by continu al reference to t h e

fault s the children po ssess without awakening or appeali ng to
,

the higher manh ood or womanh ood that sho u ld be brought into
action to overcome the fault s
, .

At least ten years ago I received a tel egram fro m a ge ntl e

,

man who was a total stranger to me wh ich read as nearly as I , ,

“
can remember Brother choking to death with goitre Physi
, .

cian s give him thi rty s ix hours to live-

Operatio n impossible . .

Send immedi ate h elp .

I remember distinctly how th is cas e impres sed me I im .

agined my self o ccupyin g th at man s body Somewh ere deep in ’

.

th e i ntuitive side of my bein g I conceived th e thought th at re

gardles s of the appe aran ce of thin gs I co u ld rel ax th at body , ,

that I could take every parti cle of tension from every nerve ,

muscle and sinew of that body and drop it wholly into the care
and keepin g of Infinite Law wh i ch created it I could trust it .

ab solutely to Inf inite Being .

A telegram followed some th ree hou rs later saying Pa

tient resting easy Breathing natural Suffocation gone C on
. . .

”
tinne treatment A few days l ater I received a letter explaining
.

in detail that the patient at th e hour I formulated for him the

,

thought of relax ation pe rfect tru st and perfect confidence in a

,

Perfect Law, dropped asleep fro m wh ich h e awakened a few

,

hours later with nearly half the disturbance h aving di sappeared

and with in a week all trace of th e goit re removed a permanent ,

cu re re sulting .

This case illustrates the fact th at there is lyin g l atent with

in each human mind the capacity to rise above physical condi
,
 CHAPT ER VII
EXPERIMENT AL STUDY IN T ELEPA I HY ' '

I have had a great many experiences in whi ch telepath y ap

p ear ed to me to t ake a mo r e or le ss impo rtant part I h ave no t .

often spoken of many of th ese experiences for the reason that ,

they are compounded of so little fact and so much mystery that

many of my readers wou l d believe them phantasies .

Perh aps before I proceed it would be well for me to ex plain

what I mean by thes e experiences being compounded of fact and
mystery I mean by mystery th e unknown part of th e th ing
.
,

partly known Every mystery is based on fact to the ext ent

.

that there is someth ing wh ich has really h appened something ,

which is genuine someth ing j ust as real as the ordinarily taken

,

for granted phenomena of every day life .

T h e mystery is not in the h appening itself but is in ou r in

ability or fail u re to understand it In fact we inj ect into every
.
,

thing which we call a mysteryall of the mystery which it posses

ses. T h e same fact which would appear an unsolvable mystery
to the i gnorant would be noth ing more th an any oth er simple
occurrence to the m an who understands j ust what 18 taking place .

The reason for my exp eriences with telepathy seeming m ys

teriou s to me and to those to wh om I talk about th em i s th at we ,

do not understand what they mean ; we do not u nderstand th e

connection between th em and th e ordinary facts of every day

life and th ey seem to extend into th e realms of the unknown .

They defy ou r every effort to cl assify and place them leav ,

ing u s with only wonder wh ere we would have understanding .

If we are satisfied to wonder instead of maki ng fur ther effort to

understand if we are one of those who fo oli shly th ink th at wh ich
,

is stil l unknown is unknowable th en th i s sens e of mystery whi ch

,

we feel in th e presence of phenomena wh ich defy class ification

is a bad t hing for u s But if on the oth er hand it but s erves to
.
, ,

s timul ate u s to greater intere st in the occurrence s wh ich we do

not understand and make s u s work the harder in ou r efforts to

fath om th eir meaning a mystery is a boon to th e man whose
,

ignorance creates it .

It is with the belief th at many of my readers belong to the

latt er class and th at th ey will find in my recountal of the facts of
my experiences with telepath y food for serious and possibly on
,
 T HE HEALING HAND 79

lightening though t that I set myself th e task of recording a few

,

o f th es e .

I shall not attempt to make this a complete history of my

ex perien ces with telep ath y for in th e first pl ace I am sati sfied
, , ,

from observing th o se experiences to wh ich I h ave gi ven a con

sciou s telepath ic in terpretation th at th e number of experience s
,

in which I have been uncons ciou s of an y telepathi c element far ,

outnumber th ose which I h ave cons ciously known .

I shal l not attempt to describe all of my conscious ex

p er ien ces with th i s mean s of communi cation for m a,ny o f them
are in essence repetition s and some of th em are too vagu e in
,

proper outline to be of value .

I cannot hope to give th ese exp eriences in chronological

ord er for of l ate years th ey h ave b ecome so numerou s and as
, ,

p r eviou sly ment ioned m any

, of th em so like e ach oth e r th at I
have lo st all sen se of th eir relation ship in time .

In Septem ber 19 07 my associ ate s and I started an experi

, ,

m ental study of telepath y in which I was usuall y the sender of

,

the me ssages and in wh ich a varying number of people in dif

—
ferent parts of th e world sometime s as many as eigh t thousand
— each Thursday ni ght endeavo red to receive the messag e wh ich
I sent .

Thi s experiment h as been continued almost without inter

ruption since th at d ate and wh ile it m ay not h ave re sulted in
,

th e conclusive evidence which we exp ected to quickly reap when

we began ou r work as to th e reality of mul tiple trans mi ssion
,

and reception with one sender it s t il l h as t au gh t u s a great many

,

lessons and has given me unu su al opportu nitie s for exp eriencing
telepath y ph enomen a Without concern ing myself with th e re
.

s ult a of thi s experim ent I wi ll r ecoun t a few of my ex perien ce s

in thi s second stage of my acqu aintan ce with p ractical telepath y .

Many of thes e epi sode s are directly conn ected with the telep ath y
experiment but m an y oth ers are in no dir ect way rel ated to it ;
,

yet I trace all of th em more or less to th e exp eriment for th e ,

reason th at it is in th i s school th at I h ave develo ped the tele

pathic sensitiveness wh i ch m ade it po ssible for thes e l ater ex

I h ave mentioned prev iou sly th at telepathy is ev idently a

process belongin g wholly to the unconsciou s mind and all we
80 THE HEALING HAND

know of it in con sciousness is that we understand and we com

m u nicate with oth er minds at time s and under certain conditions
other than tho se wh ich ordinarily obtain in ou r com mu nicati ons
with each oth er .

I am sure that every telepath ic me ssage that has ever been

received and tran smitt ed h as in s ome wa nne ted up th e con
y co c
sci ou s faculti es and come i nto ou r con sciou sne ss by th e wa of
y
int u ition or by some way other th an th at of ou r consciou s
,

thinking .

We find that very few people can u se thi s method o f com

m u nication consciou sly and th o se who cl aim th at th ey can al ,

ways prove to be a failure wh en you undertake to inve stigate

their claims Wh at I mean is this we cannot carry on a con
.
,

versation by telepathic mean s wh ere both parties are aware of

th e conversation and can exp re ss it with as much clearness as
two people can talk tog eth er using th e o rdinary means of com
,

m u nication .

But that it is a fact that we do receive message s from other

m ind s and from oth er parts of ou r own mind s I h ave not th e ,

sh adow of a d oubt In fact I know that su ch communi cation

.
,

is not only po ssible but th at it is frequent and it is almo st

,

universal .

T h e main thing which I wi sh to impre ss upon you as far a s ,

I kn ow anyth ing about th e subj ect is that it h as not ris en into

,

th at place whe re we can call it an intelligent and con sciou s mean s

of communicatio n between m i nd s Telepathy to be as u se ful as
.
,

conve rsation sh ould be as readily and as frequently employed

, .

We ou gh t to be able to u se it wh en ever we wi sh .

We find th at all of th e d ifferent force s from which we

g a th er a n y kn o wled g e t h at came ou t of th e obj ective self cam e ,

j u st as telep athy h as come It h as come to u s when we were not

.

th inking It h as come to u s not accidentally not at th e moment

.
, ,

asked for In all in stan ce s wh ere we h ave th es e s ubj ective thin gs

.

o r th e se ext raordi n ary th i n gs t ake pl ace in h uman bei n gs th ere ,

h as bee n someth in g p receded it th at prepared the mind for it .

We noti ce som etim es an apparent di gre ssion from th e ordi

nary l aws of n atu re We h ear of people wh o h ave their second
.

sigh t. We often read of people who have acquired the third set
 THE HEALIN G HAND 81

of teeth and
we call these freaks of natu re We call them ex
, .

traordinary event s .

About seventeen or eighteen year s ago I made a rath er ex

tens ive inquiry to find out if po ssible about as many people who
had received th eir second sight as I could learn of wh o were ac ,

cessable I found eleven people All of th ese were men except

. .

two . T h e youngest was seventy six years of age and th e olde st -

was ninety eight -

.

I expected to find some particular th ing th at would give the

reaso n wh y th e se people h ad th at parti cul ar experien ce Out of .

th e eleven th ere were two who h ad acquir ed accordin g to their

, ,

own statement s th e th ird set of t eeth , All that I coul d learn .

of th at however was from the persons th emselves In such in

, , .

st an ce s t h ere was th e dis appointin g thi n g in th e teeth as well as

in the second si ght I wanted to know if some particular th ing

.

in th i s parti cular lifetime was th e govern in g cau se .

In every one of th e eleven cases th ere was a family h istory

runnin g back to three and four and in some to so m any g enera ,

tion s back th at th ey could not rememb er that some member of ,

th e family as far back as they could tell h ad att ai n ed th i s second

sight Hence ou r natu rali st s would say thi s came thro ugh th e
.
,

avenue of unco n sciou s h ereditary suggestion One m an was .

very much elated He was th e m an who was o nly seventy six

.
-

years old He said h e h ad been able to read without spectacles

.

and his si ght was as k een as it was at twen ty years of age ever

sin ce h e was sixty four and h e said

“
None of my ancestors re
-

ceiv ed th e ir second si gh t until th ey were seventy five years of -

”
age . He beat th em eleven years an d seemed to be very proud
of it .

But in every in st ance we found some preparation for the se

thin gs The method by which th e se people acquired th e su g
.

g e stio n th e pe r
,
iod in wh i ch th i s p rep aration b eg an was so re

mote that it was impo ssible to trace it .

Thi s held good in every one of th e eleven people that I in

v es tigated Not one of th em was th e first member of his family
.

as far as h e knew to h ave th i s second si gh t and tho se who h ad

, ,

th e th ird set of t eeth j u stified it seemed to expe ct it becau se , ,

he said amon g h is ancestors there was a member that his parents

82 THE HEALING HAND

had told h im and th eir parents had told them about and th e ir
parents had told th em about it, ru nning back four or five gener
aticas , th at it was not an uncommo n th ing for members of their
families to have th is exp erience All of thi s we call preparation
. .

In present consciou s m eth od of investigation whatever

ou r

can be traced to an y recolle ction of an ambition any.recollecti on ,

of a conscious desire any hereditary th ing all of th i s stands as

, ,

preparatory to th e accomplishment of th e th ing wh ich comes to

us . Now let u s see wh at a long long time elaps ed
, .

If you read the book of Luke you will see that th at man wh o
was to be born th e Savior of mankind is t raced through a gene
alo gy th at seem s to be unbroken for generati on afte r generation ,

clear back to the hou se of Jacob And th en all of the spontan

.

eou s proph ets aro se and l ooked forward down through th e vi stas

of ti me preaching through gen eration after ene ti n p di t

, g ra o re c ,

ing thi s individual ; the m an wh o seemed to manife st so far as ,

history gives th ose subj ective states in whi ch there was a per
feet consciou sne ss of everythin g that was going on eith er in th e
seen or th e uns een wo rld ; eith er in the past pres ent or futu re
, ,

no matter whi ch way He looked He seemed to have a clear view

.

of it all ; no matter at what point he li stened He seemed to get .

the h armonies out of tho se pl ace s ; no matter to what He turned

He seemed to be able to read its hi story from the beginning .

He understood th e processes mental spiritual and ph ysical

, ,

of th e mu stard s eed wh en He told you if your faith was like it

yo u cou ld do like it does ; that is you could do all that you were
,

intended to do .

We cannot conceive for a moment that we can do these

things without a preparatio n But the world is being prepared
for it . Wh erever th e Chri sti an religion has been preach ed all
of th es e th ings these wonders of the present time have been
,

foresh adowed in that teaching Paul foreshadows it wh en he

.

“
says Now we see as thro ugh a gl ass darkly but th en face to ,

face
But you say th at is when we get to h eaven
, , Paul is .

not talking about h eaven h e is talking about wh at man will

,

evolve into when h e comes into a full con sciou sness of his own
spir itual self .
 T HE HE ALING HAND 88

He is talkin g about this thing which must come and when ,

it do es come when m an has risen into that place wh ere he can

,

communicate with th e invi sible an d a sufficient numbe r come s ,

then all looki ng forward to th at event shall be coming togeth er ;

not all shall sleep but all shall be changed ; all of the scal es sh all
,

fall from hu m an eyes th e flesh and the world shall dis appear
, ,

and m an shall evolve into perfection .

Those wh o have not quite evolved into full spiritual know

ledge in that one great eventful day which he is pleas ed to call
th e day of j udgment mu st come into that pl ace
, .

But what is the preparation for telepathy l T he very same

‘

preparation th at exists for h eaven ; th e same preparation that

ex ists for the m an who finds h ims elf furth er advanced now th an
he was a year ago ; the same preparation that is necessary to any
succes sful progres sive upward movement
, , He m u st believ e .

that s u ch th ing s can be .

He mu st believe that he h as to evolve into something greater

and ri s e into h ei ghts more sublime into an understandin g more
,

comprehen sive and mo re perfect th an th at whi ch he now enj o ys .

He has to look forward to a time wh en he m ay know th es e

This is his preparation and th is has been the preparation of

m anall along He is forging ah ead he is lookin g forward h e is
.
, ,

im pelled by his h 0 pes he is pu sh ed out by its urge and h e is fol

,

lowing the pictu res th at it paint s ahead of him and he is gradu ,

ally preparing h ims elf ; some mo re rapidly th an oth ers Wh en .

he is prepared th en comes this knowled ge .

Some will say Well th at one who work s the hardest strives
“
, ,

the hardest for it may be the one wh o attains it first

,
”
.

It doe s not come in response to strivi ng We know that if .

we u se the faculties that we call the perfect faculties of mind ,

th at we have to trust them ; we have to j ust simply as s u m e that

th ey ex i st and rely upon them .

Hence we h ave to assume th at the power to communicate

,

bet ween the invi sible part of ourselves and anoth er invisible
thi ng like it exis ts withi n u s and th en tru st it to manife st to u s
, ,
.

Thi s is th e method by wh ich most people h ave acquired any

thin g that they h ave They have acquired a habit of tru sting
. ,

a habit of unqualified reli ance upon certain powers which they

84 THE HEALING HAND

as sume to ex i st but cannot know exist until some exp erien ce

,

take s pl ace that proves th eir exi stence

.

Man often prays and th en feel s di sappointed th at he did

not h ear an answer to his prayers at once He wo uld be j u st as
.

reasonable in requirin g an an swer to all his prayers at once in

the vi sible as you would be to plant your corn and expect it to

mature and ripen within the next two hours M an has to lea rn
.

th e le sson of patience He h as to learn that th e part of the wor k

.

h e does that part of h is prayer is th e time it tak es for th e nu

,

swe r to occu r becau se th e ans wer to prayer means the gratifica

,

tion of th e desire for the accompli shment of something wh i ch

the mind knows in some way that it desire s .
86 THE HEALING HAND

it at home while she was away on a visit Her moth er had hap .

pened to notice it had ru n down and had wound it leavin g it fi ve ,

minutes slow When telepath y night cam e the young lady was
.

at home . She said she was lookin g forward to the moment wh en

sh e sh ould sit and m ake h erself receptive to th e mess ag e She .

was very much disappointed becau se she felt s ure sh e would get
the me ssage th at night but for about five minutes be fore nine
,

and all through the entire fifteen minute s th at sh e tried to be

receptive sh e could not get anyt h in g into her mind ex cept t h at
“ ”
tune we often sing here Go d is Lo ve ,It came into her mind
.

and ru n thro u gh it ove r and over and no matter what sh e did

,

sh e could not get rid of it It came in before sh e was ready and

.

stayed all through the experience .

Th at was the message sent out that night We were all in .

th e psy ch ic research room We sent out the message ex actly at

.

nine o clock Her watch was five minutes slow so wh en th e tim e

’
.
,

came th e five minutes h ad gone an d she had rece ived the mes
sage and was totally uncon sciou s of the fact that sh e h ad re

ceiv ed it On account of the fact th at her watch was wrong and

.

becau se sh e was not aware of such a message as that we knew ,

sh e got the me ssage Sh e was in a state of expectancy probably

.

twenty minutes before but she h ad not yet become wholly

receptive .

We try to get these telepath y messages very much lik e yo u

would try to s end your eye out in sp ace to look at a tr ee a quar
ter of a mile away While the only way you can get a clear
.

vision of th at tree is to Open your eye an d let the pictu re come in .

If we knew how to let the me ssage come into u s we can let

some view come into u s from th e outside how to be still we , ,

would succeed in catching th es e th ought s that come to u s in ,

consciou sne ss M an will never learn how to speak to spirit as

.

spi rit until h e can make h is outer mind hi s outer obj ectiv e , ,

s en se s and body he still He has to l earn how to be still ; learn

, .

how not to do anythin g .

We can always get thou ght better when we do not know

what is coming I learned that in intuitional diagnosis If I
. .

am goin g to tell b y my intuition wh at is wron g with th e patient ,

if I want to investigate through my intuition I want to know

nothing whatever obj ectively about the patient I want the first .
 T HE HEALING HAND 87

effor t I mak e to get me what he has to give me I want to get .

it from his inn er self .

0

I find I am disposed to specu l ate I am di spo sed to be infl u ,

enced by his faci al ex pression by the tone of hi s voice ; every ,

thing connected with him has an irnpression upon me if I try to

do what I want to do ; th at is if I make an outer effort to do it, .

A ll of my experience of being consciou s of receiving m es

sages from any particul ar person and e spe cial ly where I h ave ,

been able to identify th e person sending me th e m essag e has ,

come absolutely unexpected and h as come in a mann er in whi ch

I would not have ex pected it at all .

I suppose we h ave five hundr ed letters from those who have

received telep athic messages describing me as having appeared,

in person to the pers on who received th e me ssage .

There was a lady visited u s from a little town in Tennessee ,

a town of whi ch I h ad never h eard in all my life After inve sti .

g ating I found Ou t th at th ere was su ch a town and th e l ady who

h ad this experience about which I am going to tell you lived at
, ,

B but got h er mail at a little ru ral d elivery place under

another name Hence I was not aware of th e fact th at sh e
. ,

li ved at E did not know that she was on th e telepath y

li st at all .

But one day she came in and said I am here according to

”
agreement and gave me h er name
, I had never h eard of h er .

before I had heard of people of h er nam e but it was not fix ed

.

“
in my mind as belonging to Tennessee I said Did I write to .

” “
you 7 Oh no You took dinner at my h ous e day before yester
, .

day . D inner was supper she was talking about It was th e .

“
telepathy night a telepath y experi ence
, You t ook dinner at my .

hous e stayed until after the nine o clock hour and told me you
,
’

wanted me to come h ere and be h ere by noon tod ay and I am ,

hm
")

I knew positively that I had never dreamed of being in Tenn .

n or ever dreamed th at th ere was su ch a pl ace in th e wo rld and ,

it was a mysterious th ing Sh e said not onl y was I th ere but I

.

wore the same identical suit of clothe s that I had on at th e time

sh e m et me and by rememberin g b ack I remembered th at I wore
,

t hat sam e su it of cloth es that I was dressed j u st as she saw me

, ,

with probably not the same necktie but outside of that I was ,
88 THE HEALIN G HAND

dressed th e same Wh atever difference th ere was in the cloth

.

ing sh e noti ced that too .

It took me several hours at different times not all at any ,

one time but probably I talked to h er as many as six or eight

,

times trying to convin ce h er th at I had never been in B

that I was not acquainted with th e town th at I had not taken ,

dinner at h er hou se that I had not spent th e evening th ere and

,

that I had not made any agreement with h er of wh ich I was con
sciou s to come and t ak e treatment o r instru ction and be h ere at

no on on a certain day That was th e only cas e in wh ich the per

.

son brought th at experiment out d u ring th e telepath y work .

About fifte en years ago a young m an came into th e Office

one day and made th e statement th at I h ad vi sited him in a
d ream and h ad made an arrang em ent by which h e could enter
the clas s told him h ow much mo ney to brin g how long a time
, ,

it would t ake h im to complete the course and that it would begin

at a certain d ate .

Th at was before I h ad undertaken to inves tigate telepathy

enough to find out much about it but rememberin g th e incident
,

and rem em berin g th e inves ti gation I did make I can still say it ,

was a telepathy me ssage .

Th is incident came about in th is way Th is m an had a sister

.

living in Kansas T he young m an lived in Wilke sbarre Pa She

.
, .

wrote abou t h er broth er who h ad taken a great interest in this

work and sh e thought I mi gh t be able to interest him to the ex
tent of pe rsu ading h im to enter the cl as s She th ought if I .

were to write di re ctly to him it mi ght not impress h im but if I

h ad an y info rm ation I co uld give h er sh e would write him and
try to indu ce h im to come to Nevad a .

I remember writin g h er th e letter which h e said I h ad given

h im as a message I had written th e si ster th at if h e would come
.

on a cert ain d ate h e could begin with th e clas s when it started

into wo rk He got my me ssage and it reached him at the same
.

time I was writing to his sister His si ster being two days away
.
, ,

did not get the written message until two d ays after he had got
ten th e telepath y message .

By careful investigation I found Ou t I had not written him

a line
. In fact he had to tell me the name Of his sister wh o
,
 THE HEALING HAN D 89

lived in Kansas before I could in any way connect him with any
thing I had in my mi nd .

I was totally unconsciou s of sending him any such informa

tion as that totally uncon sciou s so far as I knew of h aving any
, ,

knowledge of him ex cept j u st wh at was conveyed to me in th e

s i ster s letter regardi n g him
’
.

But h e came with a definite statement that I had h eld a con

versation with him ; expl aining th e course to him ; that I had told
him h ow mu ch it wo ul d cost for th e tuition h ow mu ch it wou ld
,

co st for room and board and t hat h e mu st be h ere at a certain

d ate and h e was here

, .

In all my experiment s and investigations I have been very

.

careful to be honest with my self an d ho n est with my receiver ,

never being deceived in any sen se nor allowing my self to de

ceiv e th e oth er one becau se I o nly want to know about it
, And .

I want oth ers who investi gate thi s thing to know I h ave had .

enough of th e se experiences to con vince me that telepath y is not

only a fact but a practical working propo sition and belongs to
th e work of psychology .

In th e Home Treatm ent we have many ins tance s that prove

that there is a telepathic interchange and that th ere was some
thing connected with th e th ought that was instantaneou s and
was clearly received clearly compreh ended and clearly ex peri
,

enced by th e patient under treatment .

Many times I have experienced th at same feeling come up

into my mind along with th e name of a patient with wh om I was
only sli ghtly acquainted and probably only knew th em from their
h avin g written one letter Of application for home treatment and ,

was conscious of the fact that that person needed me to the ex

tent that I woul d write a letter to h im and in all of th ose in
,

stan ce s wh ere I h ave written letters to people who h av e im

pres sed me although only sli ghtly acquainted th ey h ave known
, ,

nothing wh atever Of th e appeal being made on th eir part .

I remember one case of a young girl about fou rteen years

of age who told me h er life story th rough a tel epath ic message
and it was one th at relieved h er entirely and gave me an oppor
,

tu nity to relieve h er from th e mo st di st ressing condition that

could po ssibly enter into a youn g life She told me in this con
.
90 THE HEALING HAND

versation that she woul d tell me the nex t day all about its in oh
j ective life She al so told me that she woul d tell her moth er all
.

about it whi ch she did

, .

I thought th at this communication between h er spirit self

or h er telepath ic self and mys elf was so clear to me that sh e su re
ly knew she gave me that information so in asking her wh y she
,

told me the nex t morning and why she told h er moth erwhat sh e
, ,

did she said that sh e felt confident that I al ready knew all about
,

her and if she did not tell h er moth er I would but sh e had no
,

consciousness wh atever of communi catin g it to me through h er

subj ective mind .

I am giving you these instances because sOm e of you have

had ex periences like them and I am ex tremely anxiou s th at some
one shall di scover the law by which telepathi c communi cation
is carried out .

The world stand s in need of this kind Of communication .

T h e world no t only stand s in need of this means of comm uni es

tion but it has to com municate thi s way in a very few years or
el se we are entering upon an era wh en th e greates t di ffi culties
that h ave ever presented them selves to th e h u man mind wi ll
h ave to be solved by oth er method s j ust as much unkn own to u s
today as is this method of telepathy .

Where there is one problem solved today there are a hun

dred propo sition s presented for solution .

Where th ere is one need provided for and wh ere there is

one demand met there are a h undred demand s to be met and
,

unprovid ed for and means by which th ey can be provided for are

,

utterly unknown .

We h ave to have a light more luminou s and more far reach

ing in its ability to ill umin e th an we have ever had before .
 CHAPTER IX
A SEAR C H FOR BETT ER METHO DS
I can as s ure that person who th inks he has a method of
findi ng ou t how you s end telepath y messages who thinks he ,

knows somethin g th at nobody el se has learned that he is th e ,

farthest away from the solution of th e problem Of anybody and ,

if th at is th e meth od that you have in m ind you can n ot h elp u s

nor any one el se but if you really want to kno w if you have h ad
, ,

s ome experience of thi s kin d if you can by an y means sh ow how

,

I can become receptive or how anoth er person can become recep

,

tive th at information would be gladl y received becau se I know

, ,

this it is not coming to any m an becau se of his qualification ; it

,

does not come becau se of any striving h e doe s ; it does not come
because Of any effort he exercis e s but it comes from that atti
,

tude into which he drops wh en he is open though often u ncon ,

sciou sly to th e voice th at is inaudible to the ordinary ear to

, ,

s igh t s that th e ordin ary eye can not s ee .

Wh en he can h ear th e voice of the silence and kno w it then ,

he is in a state of preparedness for the reception of these

messages .

Th at man who discovers this law and gives it to th e world

will bring a ligh t into it that will light it for all time It is the .

l ast problem for th e human mind to solve .

It is th e high es t the most perfect the only complete meth od

, ,

Of comm uni cation th at the mind can con ceive and it is bein g ,

learned .

It is drawing not ou t of some oth er place on earth but ris

, ,

ing and buddin g out Of th e v ery m ind of man itself It is coming .

u p from with in It is evolving from the sou l with in man

. .

One Of the thin gs that puzzled me at th e beginni ng of thi s

ex periment was th at many persons woul d see my form app ar ,

ently my phy si cal self dres sed as I would for bu siness wal k
, ,

right into th e room and tell th i s me ss age at fifty sixty or one , ,

hu ndred different places at the same moment .

I was not consci ou s of appearing to any one at all under

tho se conditions Ju st as the lady from B
. Tennessee ,

came and I th ink wh en sh e left here sh e believed I was lying to

,

her ; I b eli eve she thought I was there in my astral body not in ,
92 THE HEALING HAND

my physical body . She

onvinced herself of that but she
c

th ough t I was th ere in my astral body and that I knew I was

th ere and wh en I told her I did n ot know it sh e thought I was
,

lying to h er about it .

I would have given anything in the world to have known

about it if it was t rue But there I fou nd myself in the category
.

Of Georg e Wash i ng ton I could n ot lie to h er about it

, I tried to .

believe it tried to comprehend it tried to find some solution to

, ,

the problem but I could not .

But in one of t he telepath y experience s I h ad afterward ,

wh ich came from some one I do not know who it was but from
, ,

some person some member of th e telepath y cl as s wh o told me

,

distinctly and pl ainly that some day I would have that problem .

solved for me and would u nde rstand h ow I appeared to people .

Th i s voice told me that I would know some day it wo uld come to ,

me .

T h e followin g illu strate s what is said in th e foregoing chap

ter Probably some of yo u h ave h ad experiences like thi s T h e
. .

telepath y mes sage is sent ou t at nine o clock every Th ursday ’

night There is n o elaborate preparation made for sending it

.

ou t T h e me ssage is p repared some ten or twelve or m ay be

.
,

twenty of th em by a committee or some person Th ey are pre

, .

pared an d sealed in envelopes and remain sealed until th e send

ing hour come s at wh ich time I open the envelope and wh atever
there is on the little card enclos ed I think it I try to sh ut every .

th ing el se out of my mind for a period of thirty second s or per ,

haps three or four min ute s and t hen I forget if I can and do not
,

th ink any more about it I find th at is the best way to send it

. .

It does not take any more time to send a message around the
world th an it does to think the word s into form .

One ni ght I was talking with a ph ysician who came here on

a very urgent vi sit con n ected with a member of h is com muni t y
—
who is now in ou r comm unity but wh en th e time came for th e
message I stepped to my desk took out th e envelope read the , ,

me ssage sent it out and it was all done in a moment and the
, ,

doctor knew noth ing about wh at it was SO mu ch for the method .

of sending out th ese me ssage s .

One evening I was very tired It was telepathy ni ght and .

I decided I would not go to th e In stitute th at eveni ng but would

94 T HE HEA LI NG H AND

message was Then I turned to two or three others and they

.

did not hear it at all ; did not pay any attention to it .

Then I looked to another one and another one of myself and ,

th at one was delivering a message and getting no response at all .

Then I thou ght what is the u se of sending it out I will call .

them all back And they all came back But one stood out and
. .

spoke sayin g
, DO not call u s back Send u s on n o matter .
,

whether th ey h ear what we have to say or not Send u s on .

,

we cannot go in vain We cannot return to you void We will

. .

”
carry you r message s Send u s on let u s go
. Th en I told th em
, .

to go and they left again A peculiar thing about it was that

,

any one of them I s poke to would tal k to me ; although one

s eemed to be across th e world if I spoke to it it seemed to be
,

here too near to me th ough it was far away in space no tim e no

, , , ,

traveling necessary ; the only travel in g that seemed to come into

any part of thi s conception was what little traveling was neces

sary to get it far enough away to see it I could see it as .

plainly when in Au stralia India London j us t as plainly as if

, , ,

right with me and I could spe ak to it no matter where it was

, .

Then I called one and asked who it was I said I told you once
“
.

before th at I would tell you how you could appear to so many

people at once and thi s is the ex planation .

Your thought go e s out in space and to many people and as ,

many times that thought divides into form and each of those
form s is yourself Wherever that thought goes it goes in th e
.
,

form of yoursel f .

Those whose minds are open whose min ds are receptive , ,

who se p sych ic powers are awake can s ee h ear and feel you , ,

when you go to them ; tho se who are not cannot feel you bu t , ,

you will reach a certain part of each person no matter whether ,

they know it or not but th at is not your bu siness to ask where

,

we go when you send u s out It is not a part of you r work

. .

Just know that you s end u s and tru st u s to go Some day

'

we will come back with your message and tell you we h ave de
livered it tell you we have effected some result from it j ust as I
, ,

have been able to tell you now that th i s is the means by which
”
you can appear to so many people at once And then he asked .

me if I could not comprehend th at when I spoke to a great h ou se

full of people my voice divided into as many part s as there were
 THE HEA LIN G HAND 95

people to hear it and each one gives his respons e to it On the

, .

sam e principle that part of the mind th at can co mm u ni cate by

tel epath y can comprehend and understand and that part that
cannot kn ows noth i n g about it
, .

There were several instances wh ere I followed thos e differ

ent ones and I pre sume th at each one of th em went to some one
who h ad been in th e telepath y cl ass I did not seem to lose sight .

of the fact th at I was li stening to the mu sic in th e show tent su r

rounded by people and at th e same time I s eemed to be wh ere
,

every one of th ese th oughts were On ce I tried to see what I .

was do ing and then I saw it was not my physical self not my real ,

thinking self that was there but th e th ou gh t I had sent out had

Among tho se visited during th is experience as a little boy w

s leeping in a co rner of a very poo rly fu rnish ed room on a pile of

straw .It seemed when I went in and touch ed hi m he looked up

“ ”
as tho exp ecting some one and h e said : Have you come " I
,
“ ” “ ” “
said Yes What is the messag e he asked
. I feel th e glow , .

” “
Of new h ealth I replied He ru bbed his eyes and said I do
, .
,

feel it and now I can sleep warm altho my blank et is not h eavy
, ,
”
enough to cover me .

I could see that boy growing coul d see years ahead of him , ,

and I saw him add res sing audience s .

I went to anoth er a m an sitting in a ch air asleep ; th at is

,

his body was asleep but th ere sto od a perfect man by the side of
,

th at ch ai r I gave him th e me ssage and h e seemed to compre

.

h end it and to be utterly surpri s ed that his body was in the

condition th at it was I learn ed that th e thou gh t I sent out and
.

could see in sp ace as my self h ad no mes sage to give not one , ,

single word more nor le ss th an ju st th e m essage entru sted to it ,

and it said to thi s m an

“
I feel th e gl ow of newh ealth
,
”
He .

“
looked at his bod y He seemed surpri sed but said I will make
. ,
”
thi s body like myself .

I have Often wi sh ed I could know whether those people re

ceiv ed th at m es sage .

When I am telling you of seeing myself out in space like

th at in the h undreds and th ou sands of case s it is j ust as real
, ,

to me as you are and a good deal more so becau se I knew what

eac h of my thou ght f o rm s were doin g c ould see whe re ea ch one ,
96 THE HEALING HAND

went ,ould see the kind of people I vi sited and I was allowed to
c

s ee the spirit self of not less than a thou s and different people I .

learned thi s th at the spirit self can onl y h ear the message in th e
,

averag e cas e wh en the Obj ectiv e mind is sleeping .

It took about four minutes to th ink al l of thi s At th e end .

of four minutes I asked tho se though ts to come back to me and ,

“
they stopped and said Th i s we cannot do now becau se every ,

kind thought and every helpful word that m an has ever uttered
is an etern al entity and will never again return to the one who
,

pronounced it until it accomplishes its mi ssion

, .

We are you r children We are ju st as mu ch eternal entities

.

as you are . We h ave j u st as po sitive an existence as you h ave .

We want to live we want to work we want to keep on and on

, , , ,

and on and t hat is the reason we want you to send u s out be

, ,

ca u se th e mes sage s you h ave asked u s to deliver tonight are only

one o f the millions we will deliver th rough the ages yet to come .

A peculiar thing about a telepathy exerci se is that when you ,

g e t t h rou gh wit h one of th em you do not c ar e for it an y mo re .

You do not care to review it for the sake of seeing wh at it was ,

becau se the moment you undertake to do th at you seem to be

di sturbing a th ing that you have already s tarted into action and ,

it is so much easier to send anoth er lot of though ts than it is to

try to revi ew th e l ot th at is already out in th e field .

While these thoughts said they never returned to stay they ,

would return in one way ; not again to nestle within the precin cts
of my mind not ever again to be a formative th ing in which my
,

mind was the matrix from wh ich th ey started ; but they would
come around in th e cycles Of th eir jou rney time and again and

tell me wh at th ey h ad accompli sh ed .

Th en I could see how beautiful true and real was Isaiah s

’

,
“
vis ion wh en h e said SO shall my word be th at goeth forth ou t
,

of my mouth ; it shall not return unt o me void but sh all aecom ,

i
p h
l s th at w h i ch I pleas e a n d it sh all p ro spe r in th e thin g wh er e
”
to I s ent it .

I learned a wonderful le o I le ned ss n . th t ar th at a t

lit le
thought th at went out wh en it first started ou t all of the
, , parts
were in perfect agreement , and I asked one O f h
t em why t yh e

agreed so tho rou ghly

“
We h ad su ch a good t t
.
s a r
” “
Wh ta w a s .
 THE HEALI NG HAND 97

the start " It was the music That mu sic h elped u s out
.
,
”
h elped u s away and h elped you to see u s swing out into space .

Then I asked if it was because the mu sician s were interested

“
in the thought going out No th ey did not kn ow anyt h ing
.
,

about th at . They were interested in sending out tones from

th eir instruments that h armonized Th ey were intere sted in .

h armony and th e thought simply took its way ”

.

Often we find thi s to be the cas e I remember once I had a .

l ady patient who was very nervou s and every thing in the world
th at made a noise di sturbed her .

She wanted to be wh ere it was ab solutely quiet and wh en

she got wh e re everythin g was ab solutely quiet th en sh e th ou ght

everythi ng was dead and sh e wanted s ometh ing to move so that

,

sh e could feel th at she was ali ve Sh e was nervo us and I selected

.

a time for h er treatment wh en th ere was no general commotion

about th e house and th en some on e start ed pl aying a piece on th e

piano She said I wish th at piano was in th e sea

.
“ “
I said I .

” “
thou ght you were a mu sician 7 Y es I us ed to be but not now, , .

“
That lady is pl aying Medit ation
‘
That is on e of th e master
.
’

pieces Of mu si c Ever y little wave that goe s out from th at song

.

carri e s with it h armony and every one Of th em carrie s a message

of h armony to people who want h armony Listen and see if it .

”
will not bring a message of re st and sleep to you .

Sh e li stened It was a new idea to her S ome of her mu sical

. .

s en se and pe rs onality h ad been suddenly awakened and arou sed

as sh e listened and in a little wh ile I cou ld see th at sh e was

keeping time with h er fingers A sh ort time after I saw the
.

dro oping of the eyelid s and very soon sh e was asleep .

If you could get th e vi sion that cam e with that telepathy

message you no doubt could see th e soul of the compo ser of that
mu sic win ging its way to th at wom an carrying th e though t that ,

wh en th e whole world is set aside and m an begin s to look out b e

yond th e noises and di scord s h e can catch th e harm oni cs of
h eaven it self and write th em into mu si c .

And anoth er th ing you mi ght h ave seen is the place th e

th ough t of each m an fill s and occupie s in h is work .

“ ”
Some one ask s DO all the thought s you send out go "
,

Y es but th ey do not all go where th ey are intended to reach

,
.

One thing th at convinced me of th e inadequacy of imperfect

98 THE HEALING HAN D

thought thoughts of revenge of evil thought was what I could

, , ,

see when I was sending that th ou ght that ni gh t .

I saw thoughts of revenge start out from minds that wou l d

do another harm I saw they had noth in g to guide th em an d
.

saw th em d ash th ems elve s to pieces Not one of th em wou ld go

.

out very far until he would say he had nothing to guide him and
try to get back to the one who sent him And m ost of th em ge t .

While the others ely come back bu t when th ey do th ey

rar

come laden with some Of h eaven s choices t bles sings The

’
.

thought that helps goe s on forever becau se it follows th e p ath

,

of every other perfect th ou ght and that every perfect intent has

I w anoth er thing Many of the th oughts we send ou t

sa .

in ou r telepath y messages are not properly d irect ed to the right

person th at is to the right part of the person
, , .

One of the things that attracted my attention was this

That in each person there are three di vi sions that can be easil y
seen .

There was the sense consciousnes s the intellectual con ,

sciou sness and th e spiritual con sciou sne ss .

The sen se consciou sness is that one which can kno w either
pleasure or pain T h e soul is the part of the mental invi sibl e
.
,

m an that becomes diseased and many soul s I saw were diseased

, .

The soul that would do anoth er h arm th at would bring ,

malice envy or revenge into anoth er life is as full Of poi son as a

, ,

person s body which is full of arsenic

’
.

I found that there was a spiritu al part of each one of those

individual s that felt neither pleas ure nor pain Wh ile it cou ld .

feel neither pleasure nor pain it could make anyth in g th at it

,

Among th e things wh ich I saw tak e pl ace was th e change

which spirit brought about in so many people All of this seem ed .

to be very real to me In four minute s it was all over and wh en

.

the show went on I did not think of it again until the following

Why " F or this very reason that no hum an being can ex ist
,

and continue for hours and h ours at a stretch to th ink thos e

 T HE HE ALING HAND 99

th ou ghts until we know more about h ow to correl ate th is higher

,

consciousnes s with th e oth er part s of consciou sne ss .

I asked thi s que stion and th e answer came very clearly and
very quickly Wh y is it some will not get thi s mess age wh ich I
,
“
-

s en d now until som e time l ater

, And the ans wer was Th ey “
,

do get it right now but they do not know th at th ey h ave it be

”
cau se th ey are con sciou sly th inking of someth ing els e But I .

“ “
said , DO they get it Y es th e mind h as to get it It cannot
. .

be otherwi se Spirit never fail s to get a resp onse when it ad

‘

dr esses itself to spirit Spirit respond s to spirit no matter h ow

.
,

little or h ow great is the effort to reach it Th en be sure th at .

wh en you send your message it is yo ur spirit that send s it .

Then I asked if I should exerci se greater effort No ex er .

,

ci se no effo rt at all . Ju st think th e thought th at you want to

s end out in sp ace and let it go let it be ; give it expre ss ion ju st
,

as you give th e word s you utter on th e pl atform expre ssion and

”
let th em come ou t of you ju st as th ey are received .

Anoth er th ing that interests me I did not see how I could

,

think of tho se things in so short a tim e The thou ght it self was .

a very circum scribed th ou gh t I feel th e glow of new heal t

There is very little in that th ought A nd whil e I was th inking
.

about th at one of my th ou ght s tu rned and looked at me and s aid

“
Little . It is as big as you are It is all Of you and more The
. .

g low of new h e alt h stand s out a s Ol d as time as old as ete r nity

,
.

It is th e expression of th e Infinite as it expresses its elf in the

g r ow t h a nd development of al l life It .is a me anin g th a t not h
in g ex cept th e hi gh er intelle ct or spi rit can conceive ; th e glow
of new h ealth
”
I asked W as this intended as a spiritual m es
.
“
,

sag e w h en it w a s f ra m ed He s aid “
No it,w as not ,
b u t m a n ,

being spirit at the foundation of himself is con stantly when try , ,

in g to uplift th e race th inki ng in th e term s of spi ri t and some

,

tim es fram in g words to express tho se terms even though he is ,

”
utterly uncon sciou s of th e fact th at spiri t exi st s .

The most pecul iar thing was th e wi sdom of those an swers

and th e immedi acy of th e an swers
and all th i s s eemed to come at once and with po
Not a th in
.

F or th at four minutes and wh at it gave me I would bewilling

as withh eld ;

m ‘

to work forty years because I know it to be true I woul d like

,
.
"
1 00 THE HEA LING HAND

to h ave everyone in the world realize the value of it Every one .

is doing more go od than evil .

I learned d u ring that experience that every time you feel

kindly to ward any one you are helping God to make the worl d
like He wants it You are manifesting a part of your inh erita nce
.

by th at very act even thou gh you do not intend it so

, .

Wh ile a million Of my thoughts appear ed to go out probably ,

a million mo re were form ed as t hey we nt along becau s e a n ew one

came whenever a new soul came to li sten and we mul tiplied ,

them .

Buddha in h is illumination looks upon a m an not onl y as an

individual but as a m u ltiforrn being He divides himsel f into .

j u st as many personalities as are needed to reach the variou s in

div idu als to whom h e addre sse s himself Th ere would not be .

any life wit hout th i s great divi sion of thou ght becaus e eve r y ,

thing is h elping everyth ing el se to exi st .

F or a moment th o se form s of thou gh t wh ich seemed to b e a

divi sion of th e original th ou gh t seemed to be as real and as
,

l arge as a person And then afte rward s th ey seemed to simply

.

merge into an atom of soul and if th at atom if that thoug ht ,

should come into th e listenin g spirit th at occupie s a h um an fo rm

and is recogn i zed by it it would take o n the fo rm of th e o ne wh o

,

sent it and it would exp re ss it s elf in th e l an gu age h e u sed

, .

Th en again it wo u ld take its place as one of the separate

little part s Of a sunbeam and a million of them could be in a
vestige of li ght so small it might find its way thro ugh a crevi ce
, .

r n —
Anot e thi g thi s thou ght seemed to be searching I t e
h .

member on e of th ose thoughts approached a g reat building and

in th at building th ere was quite a number of people to whom th i s
messag e was addre ssed It was built of stone and it was ev i
.

dently somewhere in India as we have quite a num ber of re

,
“ ”
ceiv ers in India I th ou gh t
. How will you get in there " "uicke r
,

than lightning before I could think that th ought was in ther e

, , ,

and th en th ere was j u st as many of it in th ere as there wer e

people and tho se people h eard th e message in stantly

,
.

Th ey talked to thi s person received th e m es sage was

, ,

th ank ed by them and in an in stant it was gone

,
.

I seemed to be each of th ese sep arate entities Whil e I was .

one I was a million and while I was a million I was one Th ere
,
.
1 02 THE HEALING HAND

am ju st a little boy or I am just a little girl but I beli ev e

, , ,

th ere is someth ing out in the world can send me thoughts M y .

mother taught me to pray and she told me God wou l d answer

my prayers I wan t to j oin your telepathy class and I want to
.

see if I can get a mes sage from ou t th ere some way .

I could keep telling you the se th ings until I had describe d a

th ousand people as plainly and distinctly as th ese When y ou .

allow your mind to go ou t into space and h elp anoth er remem b er ,

“
if you could call th em back and ask th em Shall I sen d you ",

Will it be of any u se You could hear them you could hear ,

with that ear that is sou ndless you cOu ld h ear them say Send
, ,

u s : send u s We never go out in vain ”

If you ask th em wh y
—
. .

“
they want to gO they will say Because I want to live I want ,
”
to work I want to grow I want to be my own free self
, , .

Thi s is th e lesson you learn wh en you send out a thought o f

helpfulness We cannot think cons tru ctive thoughts in vai n W e
. .

cannot st rive in vain becau s e out in the great space where yo u r

though ts go you will be permitted after a while to go with them .

You will be perm itted to see wh ere they go permitted to see ,

th em enter every place and know how th ey deliver their m es

sage and you will be able to see the soul th at awakens and
,

re spond s in more or les s dis tin ct degree to th at m essage you

have given .

No thought th at has in it the idea of helpfulness is lost

nor will it stop nor will it hesitate until it h as accompl ished th e
,

purpo se for wh ich it was sent T hi s is encouragi ng and it is

.

wonderful to live in th e age in which we are learning thes e

In reviewin g a history of eighteen hundred years and th e

people who have lived and work ed and written we find that ,
“ ”
Morri s Bucke the author of Cosmic Cons ciou sne ss speaks of
, ,

only fifty people who h ave dev eloped to any great degre e th e

power to receive or give telepathy messages and some of these ,

did not do it in th at sense but today we are approaching a time

,

when all have an opportunity to enter this k ind of consciou sn ess .

It belongs to thi s higher self It go es out on the wings of

.

h ope looks into those f uture years and sees wh at they h ave to
,

bring It goes down into the very depths of human life to seek
.

its v irtu es .
 THE HEALING HAND 1 08

One writer in comparing Buddh a to Jesu s said th at Jcsus

looked in to human soul s and saw th e good there He saw th e
.

good that would overcome all ev il . He saw the light that would
finally dispel darkne ss from the mind of men He saw love that
.

wou l d destroy and dissolve all the h ate and malice of humanity .

He saw love th at would one day reign suprem e .

He saw a community of perfect bliss among th e ch il dren of

men in the years to come He saw nothi ng but the good
. .

Buddha saw the ev il and saw how needful it was that some
m an knowing the perversity of the human h eart sh ould go out
and point out to man their frail ities and l ead th em if po ssible, ,

to a place where th ey could wash th emselves of th e staim of sin,

but had he looked for the good he would have seen it .

But probably five hundred years before the time of Jesu s

th er e was not a poss ible chance of th e prophet mak ing that ap
peal to the human soul becau se two thousand years passed by
,

before the great gro und swell of h uman thought caught the
cadence Of a h igh er h armony and made th e perm anent work Of

man th e search ing of h uman hearts for good Jesus saw the
.

g ood in m an and tod ay othe r men ar e seein g it .

When I think a th ought that is h elpful I do an eternal s et .

I perform a deed that cannot be lost .

I give form to a creature th at will never die .

I send out into the world a power th at cannot fail And if .

a man should live and suffer all kind s of trouble and pain in order
to acquire ev en one glimpse of that knowledge th at this is true ,

it is worth the struggle.

One vi sion th at might be of intere st to you was j u st a

moment of a thou sand years to come : When I was perm itted to
look upon th at period of human life for j u st a second that sec ,

ond was equal to a th ou sand years of ordinary time I could .

eas ily see wh ere Edward Bell amy was wh en wri ting h is Look
in g B ackwar It was eas y to see the field from wh ich Jule s
Verne got th e material s for his sp eculative novel s It was easy
.

to see where Frank Stockton got h is m ateri al for his great W ar

Syndi cate or Rudyard Kipling pointed out so clearly those things
,

th at can happen and paints th em as thou gh th ey had .

In response to my request that I might look into the future

I was permitted to see men with nothing more than their own
1 04 THE HEALING HAND

th ought building hou ses more beautiful than any architectu re

has ever devised without one single materi al except what the
,

mind created .

I saw more beautiful temples built with out th e soun d of

hammer or saw than Solomon ever dreamed of making I saw .

the hu man race actually doing things without th e u se of m a

chine ry that they today st rive to th ei r utmo st to do with th e

most perfect inven tions I saw that for a second and it was onl y
.
,

for a second and yet the work I saw pe rformed woul d have re
,

quired a hundred years to complete it .

“
I asked Why did you show me j u st thi s particul ar thin g
,

and then came back someth in g that reminded me of my s elf

agai n my con sciou s self and that is you h ave tried so oft en to
, , ,

compreh end and to m ake others compreh end that quotation from
“
Jesus All things are possible to him th at believ et
, and thi s,

is the result of such belief real ized .

Another th ing I thought Of was the harmonizing of human

interests I as ked Will these interests ever be h armonized and
.
, ,

if so how
, And then I was allowed to see people more people ,

th an there are tod ay livin g in pe rfect secu rity and peace I

“

.
,

asked th e que stion

“
Wh o own s these homes 2 Th ey said T h e
7
,
” “
,
“ “”
people Doe s each have a separate h ome 2
. Everybody h as a
” “ ” “
h ome .I said Wh at do you mean " , I mean that the eart h
h as now been con sidered th e inh eritance o f m an and every m an is
”
entitled to j u st as much of the earth as h e u ses and no more .

“
I said Now I am gettin g into socialism s ingle tax or som e
, ,
” “
th ing Of the kind No you are not you are comi n g into h u
.
,

m an affairs when h u man ity understand s its elf

” “
How l ong wil l .

“
it be coming This is several hundred years ah ead of you r
”
time .

T h e time is not far di stant when many people will be able to

tell you such stories as I have told you Some of you wi ll be able .

to do it Some of you are ready to do it now if you were ready

.

to t ru st yourself to tell what you yourself th ink Th at is all it .

tak es .

I asked th is que stion Will I know at any time in con scious , ,

ness about tho se who receive th is message " Will they know in
,

con sci ou sne ss th at they receive it T h e an swer was this

“
They will sometime Sometime th ey wil l kn ow and sometime
.
1 06 THE HEALING HAND

asks something out of a sph ere of which he has no knowledge

whatever .

Now I feel that I have not des cribed to you one hundre dth -

part of the beauty or the power of what I h ave tried to tell you ,

simply becaus e th e regi on whe re th at knowled ge exis t s the ,

sphere where that cons ciousne ss is has no l ang u ag e ex cept the

,

languag e of the unconscious mind .

Had it a language equal to its comprehension it wou l d be

wonderful But it probably wou ld still be incomprehensible It
. .

is not any wonder th at a man like Shake speare or Bacon or wh o , ,

—
ever wrote th o se sonn ets and play s of Shakespeare it is not an y
wonder that he could write one hu ndred twenty of those sonnets ,

d ash them Off in a very little time How long did it take me to
.

get the materi al I have given you Enough material to make

a hundred volumes as l arg e as all Of S hakespeare s work s in
’
,

those few second s if I had time and oppo rtunity to express it

, .

Wh at I have told you belongs to thought and it belongs ,

to th e th ough t that is clo sely on the surface close to th e self ,

consciou s mind I mean by th e self conscious mind th e state

.
-
,

of one who is conscious of him self as separate from oth er selve s .

Co smic consciou sne ss or spiritu al consciousne ss is con sciou sness

,

of him self as merged into th e great Infinite Self a part of al l ,

there is.

T h e border line is so cl ose that we step over it occasionally ,

but the language necessary to exp ress it and th e kind of con ,

sciou sness wh en you get acro ss the line is so di stinctly different

to th at which is ju st below that no wonder John in his revela

,

tion said that he h eard word s not lawful for him to utter .

But wh en we see beyond pl eas ure and beyond pain we see ,

th e world as it stand s with tho se two th ings that have dragged

m an down thro u gh th e sense realm and kept h im out of hi s
sp iritual inh eritance Wh en we see tho se things we wonder wh y
.

it is that we could not ris e above it all But when we see we h ave .

th ese senses thi s pain and pleasure we mu st ri se above it and

, , ,

when we ris e above it th ere being neither pain or pleasure there

, ,

being no feelin g we see no sin see no evil see no darknes s and

, , , ,

when Paul saw that h e said There is therefore now no co ndem

“

”
nation to th em that are in Christ Jcsu s and to be in Christ as ,

Paul saw it was to have Ch ri st Consciou sness ; was to know the

 T HE HEALING HAND 1 67

relations hip to God as union with Divinity as freedom from pain, ,

freedom from pleas ure ; no cond emnation no sin no evil no dark , , ,

ness no di scord
, .

Ou r th ough ts that make for the betterment of humani ty ,

th at elevate are privileged to roam through that entire space

,

where no inh armony exists where no pain can enter wh ere noth , ,

ing ex cept th e purest and best can be .

When I looked at my watch when the orchestra quit playing

the whole scene moved away and after goin g th ro u gh experiences ,

th at woul d h ave required what appeared h ours and hours just

four minutes had el ap sed And yet if I were to tell you all that.

I saw all that I was consciou s Of all of th e p laces of which I was

, ,

con sci ou s of travel ing over all Of th e world I saw and the people
,

I seemed to meet it would have taken day s months and years to

, ,

have had th e ex per ience .

And th en I cou ld compreh end how a thou sand years is as a

day I could compreh end h ow time sp ace h ere there and now
. , , ,

merge into one All of that happened to me in four m inutes of

.

time and thi s is not all I could tell you of incidents like that
.

over and over .

Many times since I have for a moment been able to glimpse

,

that crowd again I have been able to see m y thought go out

.
-

and divide un til now I am convinced that thi s is th e man n er in

whi ch one person sees another H e sees the personality Of the .

sender simply becau se the pe rson s th ought take s his form My ’

.

thought could take no oth er form if a sou l could see it ex cept ,

m y form .

And for this reason th ey see me in the form that I appeared

to the woman in the Tennessee vill age and also to th e man in .

the pi cture show The nex t morning this man was th e first
.

one to greet me and told me on sight I saw you as plainly

“
,

as I ever saw you in my life an d h eard you tell me the message

over in the picture show That was the only time I have ever
.

had any cons ciousness of being with the person and the person
at th e same time con sciou s of my being th ere and yet I h ave ,

had hundred s and h undred s of exp eriences of being there myself ,

of communicatin g with other persons I have never been con .

sci ou s of comm u nicating with or seein g the mind of a person ,

who is not in hi s body I mean a dead person as an apparition

.
, .
1 03 T HE 11134m . HAND

I have had frequent experi ences Of being able to know what my

mother who has been in the oth er world since 1 900 thinks abo ut
, ,

things ; hu ndreds of times I have known what moth er th inks

about thing s j u st as wel l in my th ou ght interch ange as I would

have if I could go to her and hear her talk to me in words telli ng ,

me but not conscious of h er presence nor conscious of anything

, ,

but h er thought But I know th at it is my mother s though t

.
’
.

I h ave been able to get the thought of others and kn ow the

sender but I have learned thi s mu ch about telepathy and that is

th at only thoughts Of th e character to whi ch you make yours elf

“
receptive come to you out of the silen ce Some will say I wo u ld .
,
”
be afraid to be able to get thought .

A re you afraid of your own thoughts " No thoughts will

ever take form coming from an other person to you u ntil you
have been able to see your own thought in your own form .

It has to be your thought before you know anyt hing about

it in consciousness .

It has to have your form and be your own tho ught before
you can have it in a cosmic sense .

T h e fi rst self you can see in the telepathic world before you
can compreh end the perfect self of an y one el s e will be your ,

own perfect self Th en you can see the perfect sel f of oth ers
. .

“
You say Th en if you can see your perfect self you are perfect
, .

are you No you see what you can be some day what you wil l
, ,

be some day You cannot escape it and you will never have any
.

doubt about it afterward s .

Wh en you see yourself able to compreh end the whole of

space at one gl an ce to compreh end the exi stence Of ete rnity as
,

on e moment Of time then you will never again be frighten ed

,

wh en th e word death is pronounced to you .

Wh en sickness disaster discouragement di sease any of

, , , ,

those things m ay be mentioned to you if you have h eard the ,

perfect voice from the perfect silence the thought of so called -

,

death no longer exert s a di sturbing influence for then you rea

, ,

lize th at life is eternal .

In the foregoing pages I have shown you how thou ghts of

de struction are fragmentary and h ave noth ing to support them
in space Th ey eith er dash themselves to pieces or retu rn to
.

the sender When such thou ghts do return and come into con
.
,
1 10 THE HEALING HA ND

thoughts of disease and ignorance vani shes when kno wledg e is

,

admitted . Fal seho od goes when truth comes in Truth and .

falsehood are oppo site end s Of th e same path and each move in
ex actl y Opposite directions .

Two very brilliant sisters were h ere once for the same pu r
,

pose They wanted me to help th em to resist the effect or in

.

fl u ence of malicious animal magnetism whi ch th ey th ough t had

,

been cas t over them by a certain person .

“ ”
The alleged spell came to one of them in the form of a
trembling to the other one in the form of a shadow One had
, , .

to sleep with a light in the room to keep the sh adow away and ,

the other one could not sleep in a d raft .

They did not like to h ear me say that they cou ld not receive
su ch thou gh ts without making them selves receptive to that chm

acte r of thou ght And they as sured me that if the person who
.

was casting this spell over them should h ear me say this they
, ,

would send thoughts to me that wo uld make me unable to do

anything .

I not only assured them that I had learned how to keep such
thought s out of m y atmo sph ere but I convin ced them that th ey
,

were deluded whi ch was the

, step in workin g out of
difficulty .
 CHAP TER X

CLOS IN G THO U GHT S

I know telepath y is the communication of spirit with spiri t .

It is the language of spiritual con sciousness I ts vocabulary is .

not word s but absolute unqualified infinite MEANING Th ere

, , , .

is no im perfection in its l an gu age Not a single color in it can

.

lo se its shade .

Not a single tone in it can be made inharrnoniou s .

The name of its one language is harmony .

T hough I h ave had hundred s Of experiences like the one I

h ave told you about I am j u st a practi cal m an who is telling
,

you wh at h as co me into his life as actual exp erience .

I regard the chemi stry of sci ence as h ighly as I regard th e

chemi stry of thou ght .

I place as much value upon a carpenter s squ are as any car ’

penter .

I know as much about and regard math ematics as highly as

any one .

I do not believe that any m an can understand anyth ing I

cannot compreh end or th at any h um an soul can h ave an exp eri
,

ence that any one else cannot have if h e wants to h ave it and
believes he can .

Therefore I can tell you after h avin g h ad all these ex peri

, ,

en ces th at every thou gh t we th ink into space wh en ob served

, ,

by eyes th at can see thou ght form s sees ou r form s , .

We are known by those who se eyes are keen enough to see u s .

Ou r voices althou gh whispered in the deepest silence are

, ,

audible to tho se wh o can hear with th eir spiritual ears .

When we reali ze th ese things we know that real thoughts

,

not onl y h ave form but live forever, .

They are actu al entitie s and a kind word cannot die because
it goes out in th e personality and th e form of the th inker and
the sp eak er and lives on and on through all th e ag es an eternal ,

thing.

Probably the an gel s Of heaven th at h ave the everlasting

work of enlightenment to perform are made up Of the forms of
those who have done good deed s toward m an .
1 12 THE HEALING HAND

This is the one subj ect I want to impress upon you Wh en I .

tell you th at your thoughts are yourself I am telling you ou t of

an expe rience that has been repeated over and over again I .

want to impress you with th is becau se I think it would pleas e

you to know that every one of your constructive thou ghts is j u st
as well d re s sed j u st as pe rfect out in space as you and makes
,

j u st as good an appearance in th e world of spirit as it makes

where you are .

I do not want to tell you that th o se di sto rted fear though ts

of yours those thou gh ts of your own h elpless ness weaknes s
, ,

and pri ggi sh ne ss or wh atever el se you want to cal l it I do not ,

want to tell you j ust to make you feel bad that every crippled
thought you send out in space goes crippling and hobbling al ong ,

d ragging and crippling throu gh space I do not want to tell you

.

thi s becau se it give s you distress .

Wh en I tell you that you can think no thou ght but your own ,

can re co gni ze no thoug ht but you r own I am telling you th e

,

truth as I know it But as I make th is statement free from an y

.

care of wh at you or th e wo rld m ay th i nk free from any pos sible

,

influence th at might ch ang e my thou ght or ch ange my decision s ,

I tell you that you each of you stand a th ou sand fold high er
, ,

and a th o u sand years neare r th e g oal than you have any idea .

You are closer to th e spirit world than yo u thi nk You ar e .

clo ser to the solution of the probl em s of life than you h ave eve r

dreamed T h e step is shorter than you have ever d reamed it wa s

.

possible to make it .

If you could see yourself as I see you now you would know
that what I am telling you is tru e and you w ou ld be willing an d
glad to th row your thou gh ts into th at con stru ctive fo rm so tha t
tho se which come back to you shall be th ose bearing a h arves t
of good deeds a record of good pe rform ed Of h ope arou sed o f
, , ,

memories awakened of the th ings of th e past of futu re oppor ,

tu nity of good thin gs to m an ; of man y of th e fears and man y of

,

th e mi sdeed s of past lives can celed forever from m emory Th es e .

are th e things you would see .

Telepath y is the l angu age of the spirit It is the vocabul ary

.

of the cosmically con sciou s m an We are rising into that con

.

sciou sness more rapidly th an we think .

 C HAPTER XI
STUDY OF THE REAL M AN
In th e foregoing pages we h ave discu ss ed specifically a num
ber of su ggestion s and their practical applicati on Let u s now .

for a brief period consider th e real m an in his various phase s ,

his beliefs his method of thi nkin g togeth er with his reasons for
, ,

think in g In fact we wish to cal l your attention to m an as we

.
,

today understand him .

M an cannot be compreh ensively considered without an in

telligent idea of the Source of his being ; his own inh erent phy
sical organic moral and intellectu al constitu tion and th e rel a
, ,

tions h e sustains toward external creation being but variant ,

manifestations of Supreme Power .

F or every effect there is a pre ex i stent appropriate cau se-

.

The idea of son pre suppo se s fath er ; of creature creator ; of man

-
, ,

In accordance with the unch angeable law whi ch we call na

tural but wh ich is really divine the ch ild exhibits in some d egree
, ,

th e trait s of th e parent .

In order to properly understand th e R eal M an we mu st have

s ome conception of th at Powe r which made him ; in Whose like

ness he was created .

That God ex i sts is proven by irrefutable evidence both ma ,

terial an d spiritual Th at He created all th ing s rules them ao

.
,

cordin g to fixed and independe nt l aws and inte nd s th em for some

,

definite end is al so establi sh ed in th e same manner .

F rom its contempl ation th e mind arrive s by a proces s of ,

ri gid rea soning at th e con cept of a Fi rst C au se po sse ssin g th e se

, ,

attribute s in fin al pe rfection .

These independent proofs of His existen ce functions at , ,

tributes and intentions are equally entitled to con sideration .

Each is relevant competent testim ony and they are reciprocal ly

,

corroborative .

There is no contradiction po ssible between two logical ideas

of the Divine Will one based upon pure philosophy a proper
,
—
unde t nding of the natural evidences shown in creation the
rs a —
’
other in spired by man s realization of his oneness with Deity .
 T HE HEALING HAND 1 15

They har monize perfectly and each corrects and el ucidates

ou r concept of th e oth er .

The intelligent wise powerful and benevolent arran gement

, ,

of the universe is nat u ral evidence of th e ex i sten ce of Go d .

But as a rul e thi s great truth has led rather to barren ador
ation th an to benefici al practical res ult s Thi s is becau se so .

many bas e their belief in a God solely upon revelation and refu se
to admit the po ssibility of His existence being predicated upon
any oth er eviden ce .

They forget th at as speech is older than grammar as men

, ,

reason ed before Ari stotle as principle mu st alway s precede prac

,

ti ce so God was prior to creation and th e fact of His existence

, ,

His attributes and measurably Hi s wil l are clearly demonstrable

, ,

by natural evidences and do not depend upon the Book true and ,

in sp ir ed thou gh it m ay be .

Indeed should all sacred literature be suddenly wiped out of

ex istence th ere would still be left the vast volume of God s works ’
,
“ ”
done under His own h and and seal .

Every l ayer of the Earth s cru st is a page and in the pages

’

are profu s e illu strations of the fo ssil remain s of th e diffe rent

forms of life th at have marked th e trans itional stages in the u p

ward progress of unfolding life .

From varied view points since th e infancy of the race all

-
, ,

men everywh ere have been taught the ex i stence of a Supreme

Being .

Their ideas of His powers and function s have differed with

their varying degree s of mental culture and moral development .

Belief in an over ruling Power is as old as h umanity

-
,
.

The perfect memory and the universal knowledge th at lie

back in the labyrinthine ch am bers of th e un consciou s mind have ,

whispered to all sorts and condition s of Men in all ages and in ,

every clime the story of their Divine ori gin .

Hence the universally prevalent belief in some sort of a

,
“
Superior Being who by some m iracul ou s means Created Heaven
”
and Earth and all t h at in th em is .

The troglodyt e of the Stone A ge who se my stic monolith s ,

are at once the deli ght and th e despair of the arch aeolo gi st
E gyptian worsh ipers of O siri s and of I si s who se shrines still ,

stand upon the banks of ancient Nile ; swart Hindu devotees along
1 16 T HE HEALIN G HAN D

th e ed Ganges ; men and nations of every tribe and kin dr ed

sacr ,

of every time and tongue h ave recogniz ed th i s Power

, .

A s the Hellenic " eu s His temple crowned th e Acropolis at

,

Athens and overl ooked the blue Aegean Sea ; as th e Roman Jupi
ter His altar topped the C apitoline Hill beneath which rag ed th e
,

tawny Tiber .

Various as the name s by which He was known were th e

powers and functions attributed to Him .

God was considered not from a standpoint of un changing

,

l aw but as a Deity embodying th e h uman qualities of love j eal

, ,

ou sy hate and mercy and exi sting for the expres s pu r po se of

,

satis fyi ng the person al wants and mini ste ring to th e selfi sh t e

q u irem e n ts of individu al men an d n ation s .

Jehovah God of I srael was an ever pres ent h elp in time o f

“

—
, ,

need for assi st ance upon all po ssible occasion s ; temporal no t ,

spiritu al salv ation ; was th e Israelite s ultimate d esire

’
.

He was a j ealous God of many moods Who exacted an eye .

for an eye and a tooth for a tooth unle ss His wrath was appease d ,

by acceptable burnt offerings He was not a cheerful Deity but .

,

in His grand gloomy and peculiar way remorsele ssly roll ed on

,

th e wh eel of de stiny whi ch cru sh ed all before it ex cept wh en in

,

du ced to turn aside by pre scribed genu fl ection s and appropriate

sacrifi ce .

Aristotle s Go d was the unmoved mover of all th ings a su b

’
,

lime egoist wh o t hou ght forever upon himself as all else were ,

unworth y his contemplation and foreclosed al l possibility of pro

,

v idence or p rayer .

C el su s the Greek Platonist believed in a Supreme Good

, , , ,

higher th an all exi stence who with original uncreated matte r

, , ,

made up the con stant su m of th e universe He recognized noth .

ing supe rnatural nor redemption from sin His thought tend ed
, .

to obliterate any special divine aim or interest in m an and con

sequently to nullify C hri stianity .

Thi s emascul ated Deity was about at par with the one ev olv
ed by Ph ilo; a Hellenized Jew but shortly antedating Chris t ,

Wh ose God was absolute incorporeal perfect ; only to be known

, ,

by right reason ; dealing with m an only through the Logos His ,

creative and inspirational in stru ment His ration al power ,

.
1 18 THE HEALIN G HAND

Natural laws are the underlying principles whi ch are invari

ably conformed with in the production of like effects acting from

lik e cause u nder s im ilar conditions

, .

Natural law is self exi stent without beginni ng or end and

-
,

is the cau se of th e uniformity observed in all phenomena in Na

ture Natural law is and in expression works always from
.
,

cause never from end

, .

T h e government of the entire universe is dependent upon

the ex istence of Natu ral Law .

All scientific knowledge of both organic and inorganic m at

ter and th e fo rces and ph enomen a observed in th ei r varyin g t e
,

lations is bas ed upon the exi stence of the se unvarying laws Al so

, .

in the realm of p sychology we observe l aws governing the finer

intellectu al and moral forces .

Hence we m ay say that all of the ob served phenomena in

'

nature are produced in conformity with natural laws General ly .

cons idered we m ay speak of th ese processes as the universal law

o f being .

In oth er words law is the observed order of things

, .

Hence we m ay say that there is j ust one law by which all ,

created th ings are governed j ust one order of action whi ch mu st

, ,

be observed by every creature conformably with its own inher

ent con stitution but as everything h as a certain defini te const i
,

tu tion and bears a fixed relation to every oth er thing it follows ,

th at there must be as many manifestations of the law as there

are relation s between sub stance s .

Ou r understandin g of th ese variou s manife stations of na

tural law is con stantly being changed and amflified Science .

once discovering the principle s u nderlying a certain set of phe

nom ena is able to cl as sify sim il ar ph enomena wherever in na
, ,

ture they m ay be ob served .

Thu s we h ave many standpoints from which to study var

iou s substances F or instance a n erve tru nk or other structure
.
,

m ay be considered from either a physical chem i cal physiologi

”

, ,

cal or p sychologi cal viewpoint .

Ph ysically we can study it in its mech ani cal relations hips ,

in its reaction to electricity and by any or all the laws controll ing
the physical properties of matter .
 THE HEALING HAN D ‘

1 19

Chemi cal ly we can resolve it into the elements of which it

is composed , such as ox ygen nitrogen carbon sulph ur pho s
, , , ,

ph oru s etc al so note the chemical nature of its compounds su ch

, .
, ,

as proteid albumen etc

, , .

Physiologically we consider its office or function i e the , . .

,

carrying of impul ses or impre ssions from the brain and spinal

cord .

Psychologicall y we consider the nerve tru nk or ax is as an ,

outgrowth of the brain or nerve cell , and as such participating ,

with the cell in th e transmi ssion of thought and intelligence .

While it is manifestly unnecessary at present to elucidate

all o f these rel ations we m ay inve sti gate the mo st fam il i ar of
th em thos e which concern th e substance s and creatur es by wh ich
,

we are surrounded and which for convenience may be il lu strat

, , ,

ed by the following classification : Inorgani c ( physical and

chemi cal ) organi c ( intelli gent ) moral ( spiritu al )
, , .

Physical laws govern all matter and control the gro ss or

molecu l ar relations with matter of th e same or different com , ,

Hence, matter in the solid form is h el d together by the law

of cohesion its molecu l es being placed in close proximity
,
.

In the fluid form, matt er flows or falls by the lawof gravity,

its molecu les being more widely eparated s .

In the gaseou s state, matter tends to expand its molecu l es ,

are mo re W i de l y d i ve rg ent ; the la w of co he si on h as be e n ove r

co me ; the mole c ule s r e pe l e a ch ot h er a n d tend to fill a l l sp ac e .

Chemical laws deal with the compo sition of the molecules

both elem entary and compound in both the organic and inorgani c
,

world s Viz —pu re carbon when bu rned in the presence of oxy

. ,

g en , o r in the o r di n a ry atmo sp he re for m s a g ,

as eou s c ompound .

The molecules of the elem ent s carbon an oxygen b e k up d r a an d

r eunite into a c ompound mole c ule c ont a in i n g one a tom of ca rbon
and two atoms of oxygen C arbon D ioxide ,
— CO .

More complicated and differing from me e ine t

,
r r in o r ga m c

matter we have intelligent organized or org

,
an i c a tt
m e of whi h
r c

all liv in ub t a n es both pla nt a n d a nim a l a r e c ompo s ed Or

g s s c .
, ,

g a n ic m a tter is su bj e ct to p h y si ca l an d chemi c a l l aw s a s well a s

the laws governing organic matter .

1 20 T HE HEALIN G HAND

The morphologic unit of structure in organic matter is th e

cell characteriz ed by intelligence and in the cas e of the ferti le
, ,

ovum and the fecu nd seed we find it harbors in its mi nute con
fines all of the intellig ence that marks the parent structu re from
wh ich it springs .

It is quite po ssible that the h uman ovum and perhaps other ,

forms of cell s are po ssessed of th e knowledg e of all tru th ; en

graved upon the tablets of perfect memory .

It is certain that the uncons cious mind of man is posse ss ed

of an intuitive knowledge of all truth illustrations of wh ich are ,

to be found in h ypnotism and the case of certain prodi gies in

math ematics in h armony etc
, , .

Hence we m ay say that all of th e knowled ge that mankin d

,

now consciou sly po ssesse s cam e originally from this perfect min d
possess ed unconsciously by m an and as m an has pass ed th rough
,

th e variou s stages in his evolution up to the zoological scale to

h is present po sition thi s perfect m ind mu st have been given to
,

th e primitive fo rm of life from wh ich he develo ped and h ence is ,

th e common h eritage of all form s of life .

Cell s th e basi s of organized matter are further distin

, ,

g u ish ed by motility i
, rritability co n ductivity nutrition repro
, , ,

duction or propagation of species .

In pluricellular organism s however the cells become speci

, ,

alized and are given certain work to do i e the l iver cell s secrete
, . .
,

bile the mu scle cell s contract nerve cell s transmits etc In thi s
, , , .

way we see the functions po ssessed by a single cell taken up and ,

speci alized by a spe cial con glomeration of the cell s T h e muscl e .

cell s being concerned with contractility the nerve cell s with ,

transm i ssion the diges tion and assimilation of food is performed

,

by th e organs of aliment ation .

While th e whole mech ani sm with its elaborate functions is

under th e control of the nervou s sy stem and brain; the brain i s
in turn u sed by the mind for at least a portion of its processes .

However the problem of the mind s relation to th e brain is the

,
’

mo st elusive and difficult to solve of any that has ever con

fronted th e scienti st .

The cons ci ous mind is the general office in wh ich th e every

day routine affairs of life are tran sacted and which is developed ,

in accordan ce with the increasin g need s of the animal .

1 22 THE HEALING HAND

Hence th e creature of the air has been supplied with wings

with whi ch to sail rapidly through the atmo sphere the fis h hav e ,

been given fins and gill s with which to navigate the seas .

The creatures of desert pl aces h ave been endowed with great

endu rance and are able to forego water for long periods wh ile ,

m an po sse ssing a potentially perfect body has now beg u n to

, ,

develop the spiritual side of hims elf the real man nor do es it su r
, ,

pri se the thinking m an wh en told that he has not accompli sh ed

one millionth part of what h e is capable of accompl ishing nor ,

learned a millionth part of wh at h e is capable of learning .

Each of these great laws of nature acts independently ; a

ship floats becau se the submerged po rtion of its h u ll di splaces a

volume of water equal to its total weight and will continue to ,

do so as lon g as this condition is complied with al th ough its oc ,

cu pants sh oul d i nfring e ever y law of h ealth or mo ral s .

A man wh o swallows a deadly poison will die from this in

fraction of organic law although he m ay have been one of the
,

Lord s anointed and taken th e d ru g by mi stake

’
.

Another m an m ay steal lie cheat or in oth er ways violate

, ,

any or all of the provisions of the Mo ral Law but by s edu l ously ,

observin g the laws of heal th become robust and rubicund ; and

.
,

another neglecting the l aws of h ealth m ay wh ile devoting h is

, , ,

life to th e most philanthropic end s be racked with pain , .

Every law bears its own reward for compl iance and punish
ment for infraction .

Mariners observant of phy sical laws will sail in safety ; those

who are not will lose th eir sh ip .

Intens e enj oyment springs from active compliance with

moral law its observers become obj ects of esteem and affection
,

to oth er intelligent beings who delight to honor them ; disobedi

ence aside from creating insatiable desires puni sh es the trans
, ,

gress or by th e pe rpetu al long in g of his s urvivin g mo ral sens e for

the hi gh er enj oyment and incurs for him the malevolence of

, ,

his fellows .

Ob ser ers of organi c laws obtain h ealth vigor and mental

v
,

buoyancy T ransgressors are pu ni shed by lassitude pai n and

. ,

dissolution .
 T HE HEALING HAND 1 28

Natu ral laws are universal immutable irrevocable No

, , .

m an in any country can respect himself or enj oy the esteem of

others if he suffers his brute propensities to predominate .

In no age or longitude has any man born with a perfect in

,

herent and inherited constitution and observant thr oughout life

o f organic laws been visited with dis ease or pain other than that
,

consequent upon accidental inj ury or senile decay .

Whil e all natural laws harmonize with man s constitution ’

,

the moral and intellectual laws hold the s upremacy .

Should drunkard s and debauch ees establi sh their health and

en hance their h appine ss it would be contrary to all logi cal con

We find th at in every case these laws with their attendant ,

reward for cons equent in demnity act in stri ct consonance with

,

right and j u stice and in perfect h armony with each other and th e
perfect plan of creation .

The law is perfect in plan absolute in action irrevocable in

, ,

effect By and in accordance with it all thi ngs were created

.

and are continu ed in ex istence Through it man lives and work s

.

and has hi s being .

By compliance with its terms his entire life will be serene

,

and free from sin or if he has lo st or forf eited perfect mastery

,

of his being he may regenerate his body and redeem his soul .

God created m an in His own image after His own likenes s, ,

but wh ether in strict accordance with th e Biblical narrative it

matters little Neith er is it essential to know wheth er the cre
.

ationists or th e evolutioni sts are correct in thei r theorie s of th e

origin of humanity .

The Adamic legend and wh ether it be hi story or allegory is

,

immaterial is closely anal agou s to th e traditions of most ancient

,

nations and their myth s concerning m an s origin contain striking

,
’

pa rallel s to the Paradi sai cal state of th e protoplas t s and thei r

ultimate expul sion from Eden .

Adam and Eve represent h umanity whose self ind u l gence ,

-

brings sin and misery into th e world .

They are prototypes of every m an and woman who in their ,

arrogance on findin g thems elve s to be free moral agents and ,

ignorant of the law of their being they cease to tru st the God
,
1 24 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

within them break the silver thread connecting th em with

and
D eity for the gratification of their conscious desires .

Their transgre ssion and fall are typical of every mortal pair
who eating the forbidden fruit of the tree of knowledge find the
, ,

pple s of Eden but Dead Sea fru it wh i ch tu rns to ashes in th e

a
mouth and feel with in themselves the beginnin gs of apostas y
,

from God But hu manity has its restoration to h appiness well

.

in hand for it has learned th at redemption is possible throu gh

,

—
the ascendency of intellect over carnal instinct o f the wings of
faith over the th ings of sen se .

Many curiou s myth s arisin g from speculation upon th e ,

origin of the race and combining both creationist and evolution

,

ist th eo ries are found in th e folklore of most savage tribes an d

,

amon g th e legend s of tuto red and untutored nation s of ancient

times .

Many of them represent men as fashioned from clay by a

supe rnatural being Of the antipodean abo rigines the Austr al
.

ian savage believed that th e god F und Jil made men of clay
“
th e Maori legend prevalent in New "ealand is that Tiki took
, ,

red clay and kneaded it with his own blood the Mel anes ian idea
is th at m an was mad e of cl ay red from the marshy side of
“
,
”
Vannia Leva and the woman of willow twigs ; the M angaian
theory was that the woman of the abyss made a ch ild of fles h
“ ”

from h er own s ide and th e ancient Hellenes held men to be de

,

scended from clay fi gures bak ed in the heavenly fire fil ch ed by

Prometheu s .

Of the Evolutioni sts the American Indians claim descent ,

from coyotes beaver bear etc and there is an old Creek myth
, , ,

of the Arcadian Myrmidons as descend ants from swan s and cows .

Many Greeks boas ted of being autochthonous and thi s id ea

of descent from rock s tree s and other obj ects finds its p arall el
, ,

in the " ulu bed of reed s th e Au stralian Wattle gu m the great

, ,

tree of th e Ov ah ererros th e rock of Central Africa the cave of

, ,

the Bu shmen and the North Ameri can and Peruvian myth s of
,

tree or stone as original progenitors of th e race .

These ideas are presented simply as subj ects for interesting

specul ation and to s how t
,
h e s imil arity e x i sting between diffe r

ent theories of the gene si s of man .

126 THE HEALING HAND

l f most ill u striou s sons The organ for the

’
ga ax y o the world s .

expression and u se of the perfect mind varies in the different

speci es of ani mal s as wel l as in different men .

The small and most incomplete portion of the perfect min d

with which we are most familiar we call consciousnes s T h e , .

variation in the degree of intellig ence manif ested in differe n t

creature s is only a variation in th e amount of consciou s kn ow

l ed ge th ey poss ess .

Just as the arm of th e blacksmi th answers to the demand

of his daily toil and develops enormous str ength and proportion ,

so will th e brain the organ of expres sion for the perfect mi nd

, ,

answe r to the demand s made upon it and develop Para Pas s n

with the amount of legitimate usage .

Know th en that laying back in the rece ss es of what we call

,

th e unconsciou s or subj ective mind is omnis cience seeking ex ,

pression omnipre sence awaiting to annih ilate space and omni

, , .

potence each man s birt hright onl y awaiting for him to beli eve
,
’
,

and di scover how to cultivate and u se it .

The brain we know to be perfectly plasti c to be moulded

according to the need s of th e mind Whil e the mind is perfect
.
,

it mus t need s educate its principal organ the brain to fulfill the , ,

need s of life .

M an is essentially a speaking animal and it is nece ssary for ,

him to form and fashion by specialization and practice one spot ,

or center in one or the other hem i sph ere s of the brain for spe ak ,

ing purposes .

In this center is stored a vocabul ary of symbol s or word s b y

which the mind communicates its thoughts in a systematic and
intelligent form to oth ers .

The human family h ad its stone age wh en its units were ,

merely beasts of prey warrin g with apparently inadequate mean s

,

again st gi gantic carnivora .

It is v ain to speculate through what unnumbered centuries

’

man continued in thi s condition analo gou s to that of the modern

,

E squimaux and incompatible with a num erous or stable pcpu

After the extermination of the prehi storic carnivora by na

tu ral or hu m an means, th ere succeeded the pastoral state with ,
 T HE HEALING HA ND 1 27

it s flocks herds of domesticated animal s and ideas of indi

and
v idual ownership .

The changing seasons of th e semi tropical zones encouraged -

,

th e sheph erd s wandering lif e precluded all idea of property in

’
,

the soil and obstructed development of the arts particularly ,

With greater leisure cam e reflection and intel lectual pro

g r ess ; astronomy for example hav ing its putative origin among
,

the tents of S hem It was the contempl ative pas toral life of Lot
.

and Abraham dupli cated tod ay under th e bl ack canopy of many

,

an Arab sh eik .

Next came the agricultural stage with its gradual develop ,

ment of social life th e idea of a personal homestead and individ

,

u al ownership of l and .

Tacitus describes the ancient Germans as tran sitio nal agri ,

cultural nomad s — as were the Vi si goth s and O strogoths of later

centurie s.

But aeon s prior to this as proven by the anci ent Sanscrit

,

language the great Aryan family tilled the ground and became
—
,

lords of th e soil a settled agricultural people .

From plowing the earth and building cities it was but a step
to buil din g sh ips and plowin g th e wave .

They were skilled in sewi ng weaving pottery and masonry, , ,

and even befo re settlin g down u sed numbers as h i gh as 1 00 .

They domesticated the cow th e horse the dog th e sheep

, , ,

th eir pass u or herds con stituted th eir peens or wealth long

, , , ,

—
before pecunia assumed the form of currency they had passed
throu gh the bronze and iron age and were acquainted with most
of the us efu l metals and valuable grains .

Every evi dence of hi story locates the earliest seat s of civ

ilization in tropical clime s along th e rivers Nile Euphrates
, , ,

Tigris Indus Ganges and other great water courses ; the great
, ,

convenience of these means of inter communi cation greatly fa -

cil itated trade social and political intercou rs e and consequent

,

rapid ad vances in civilization .

Eventually the shores of th e Mediterran ean su cceeded to

their inheritance and along the coast of that tideless sea flour
ished the glory th at was Greece and the grand eu r that was
“
1 28 THE HEALING HAND

Ro me —long enduring empire s whos e intellectual bequests w er e

-

the life of later civilization .

Trans Alpine civilization is of comparatively modern growth

-

and th e civili zation of the frozen North is still in infan cy Prim .

eval m an amidst th e tropical abundance of a geni al and fertil e

climate had mu ch to stimul ate h is ae sth etic faculti es but li ttl e ,

to encourage civilization of the arts for producing food the in ,

tellectu al development consonant with h is po sition as a mo ral

and rational be in g .

A s the race increased it spread over th e earth ; drained

swamps and cu t down fo re st s tran sforming pl ains and v alleys
,

into field s and p as tu re s ; made rivers and seas its h igh ways
built cities and under th e stimulu s of settled leisure accu m u ,

lated wealth acquired tastes and lux ur iou s de sires

, .

Letters lie at the co rnerstone of all real and lasting civiliza

tion and we can trace them from ou r arbitrary sym bol s of
,

sound s combined as arti cul ate s eech b ack th rou gh Roman

p , ,

Greek Phoenici an and Ptolemaic modification s of the comb in ed

,

phon etic and pictorial writin g of th e Ro setta Ston e ; to th eir b e

ginnin gs as E gyptian hiero glyph s or th e rude carven ivory of
the troglodyte .

T h e path of ev ery art is simil arly bl azed and th e guess of ,

yesterday is the science of today F or astrology read as tron .

om y ; fo r al ch emy ch emi stry T h e beginnin gs of geometry are

, .

equ ally in reach and even the meas urement of the solar year
,

can be traced to th e 860 d ay s of more th an one an cient nation .

Al though m an is one of the most modern of livin g creatures

his progre ss bein g clearly di sce rnible from the preh i storic cave
d weller to the fini sh ed product of western civil ization ; wh eth er
regarded as evolved from a lower form of life or as a being called ,

into exi stence as lord of creation and endowed with reason nu ,

n u mbered ages must have elap sed since his first appearance
upon earth .

The acceptance or rej ection of any specified term of pas t

duratio n of th e race involves no e ssenti al point of moral s and
, ,

th e idea of unity is e ssenti al to and con sistent with the phy si cal ,

mental and moral ch aracteristics common to savage or civiliz ed

,

m an wh eth er studied in th e vari ant types of living humanity

, ,

or th rough p aleolithi c ph ylogeny and art .

1 80 T HE HEALING HAND

It is quite true th at the offspring will reflect the ch aracter

istics of its pro genitors If th ey are perfect specimens of phy
.

sical health and intellect ual vi gor th e chil d will likewis e reflect

these qualiti es If the reverse be true th ere will be th e conse

.

quent po ss ibility of the child being sim ilarly affected .

From th is fact was deducted the th eory o f her editary trans

mission of di sease so popu l ar a few years ago This theory for
, .

“
a time s eem ed to j ustify the Biblical inj unct ion Vi sitin g th e ,

iniqu ities of the fathers upon th e children unto th e third and

”
fou rth generation . Nu m 1 4 18 Howev er its rigor has b een
.
-
.
,

modified by better substantiated scientific views .

Ex ceptionall y if indeed at all is di seas e transmitted to th e

, ,

ch il d by the parents and at th e worst o nl y a predispo sition to

, ,

contract di sease can be transmitted We know th at th e th ink er

.

is the man Th at th e body both in action and in actuality is

.
, ,

but the expre ssion of mind hence can be made to reflect any at
,

titu de of mind as s umed by th e m an F or one to thi nk th at h e

.

h as a pre dis position to a certain di sease posse ss ed by his pro

g enito r,s c oupled with the a ttend ant fear which this unch eerful
suggestion create s paral yzes th e ti ssues and makes him an eas y
,

prey to thi s heredi tary taint .

On the oth er hand the knowledge of the pred estined ev il

th at th reatens him should be a forewarning sufficient and sh ou ld
cau se h im to fo rearm h im self and put for th po s itive effo rt ag ains t
the threatened affliction It should be th e means of his buildin g
.

up bulwark s against thi s disease at least on a par with th e per

fectl y normal individual .

A s the influence of th e mother s m ind impresses th e unborn

’

chil d through a
, n idea or an attitude of frigh t or fear so as to ,

cau se an app reciable departure from the normal so sh ould th e ,

Ego with even greater ease con sciou sly impre ss the domain of
fle sh and blood over which he is lord of all .

Let the parent be mentally h ealth y and the ch ild m ay be

born to the lowe st and mo st unpropitious of phy sical env iron
ment even as Abraham Lincoln and still ri se to the hi gh est po
, ,

sition within th e reach of m an .

Man can mo st advantageously conform to physical and or

g an i c l a w s an d sec ure thei r hi ghe st benefi ci a l actio n when he
learns their application as demonstrated by physics chemistr y , ,
 T HE HEALING HAND 1 81

mathematics , uggestive therapeutics and kindred sciences u n

s ,

derstands his own anatomical psychological and physiologi cal

,

constitution and can trace th eir adaption each to th e oth er

, , .

Take the single instance of gravitation Thr ough it heavy

.

bodi es tend toward the center of th e earth ; stru ctures sufficient

ly firm and erect stand uprigh t ; water seeking its level turns
, ,

ponderous wheels and develops almost incalcul able force ; shi ps

maj esticall y ride th eir keels with sail s up to catch the in con
,

stant breez e .

M an is brough t in to h armony with gravitation by the exact

ni cety with wh ich his mutually inter d ependent bones mu scles
-
,

and nerve s are adj u sted for the main tenance of equilibrium .

While the benefits of compliance with th is law are obvious ,

there are po ssible attend ant evil s ; and m an m ay be maimed or

kil led by falling from a h ei ght ; a leak m ay sink a ship ; a
r eservoir m ay break its dam and devas tate the home s of m an ;

but we should always inquire wh eth er by a proper exerci se of

,

th e reasoning faculties and action u pon the lo gical d edu ction s

obtained th erefrom the se penalties for viol ation of the law of
,

g ra vitation mi g h t not h ave been ave rted .

It is onl y by exp erience obs ervation reason and reflection

, ,

that we can arrive at a definite understanding of physi cal law s ,

and ou r relation s therewith.

 C HAPTER XIII

MAN AND HI S RELATION TO NATUR E

design and system the law and order wh i ch per v ade

T he ,

everything the power that renders all life adaptable to its n e eds
,

and env ironment th at h as supplied w

, i th a prodigal hand th e in ,

stinctiv e power of s elf p re se rvation and perpetuation of s ec i es

p
has been attributed to a benevolent Creator from whom sp e cial
dispensation might be attained throu gh appropriate attitu d e of
th e suppliant .

God is not the capri ciou s despot from who se thron e b oons ,

are granted to the elect and cal amity l aun ch ed at tho se ou t s id e

h
t e p ale of H i s s elf a ppointed vi-
c reg ent s on earth
e - Eve r y m an .

—
is his own savior and redeemer a steward into wh ose h an ds God
has entru sted His treasure to u se with profit and retur n with
,

u sury .

T he trend of the world is benevolent universally not indi , ,

vidually and in every detail is arranged along lines tending to

,

ward gradual and progressive improvement .

Every created thing tend s toward harmony with the cos mic
pl an and the happines s of animate obj ects depend s upon th eir
,

confo rmity with outside condition s .

T he earth has undergone many revolutions and is cons tan tly

advan cing Geology shows the earth s adaptation for s u cce s sive
’
.

and even h i gh e r o rde rs of anim al life in its gradu al imp rovem ent
an d preparation for m an .

Before man was life death and reproduction prevailed

, ,
.

Upon his appearan ce the order of creation was not ch ang ed

he was adapted thereto by receivin g throu gh natural evo lution
an organized stru ctu re and anim al in stin ct s as well as reaso n

ing powers .

On the approach of the first winter of its life the y oung

robin actu ated by i n stinct seek s s unnier skie s unknowin g the
, , ,

cau s e or end of its fli ght .

M an is different God gave him facultie s to observe phe

. t

nom ena, trace ca u se and effect and rectify h is erro rs ; and the

arran gement of the world is such as to give ful l scope to th ese

powers .
184 T HE HEALING HA ND

The scales are falling from the eyes of humanity T h e .

shrin e of truth is now the mecca to which all earnest and en ,

thu sias tic men are making their pil grimag es Desire constant .
, ,

continu al and em anatin g from a believ ing h eart is taking th e

place of the formal h arangue called prayer , .

Stru ctural] y as an organiz ed being in a ph ysical worl d

,

amid st an env irom nent of phy sical o rganis ms m an is animal , .

He resembles the lower anim al s in natu ral feelings and de

sires and th e exercise of the alimentary and reproductive as well

as all other phys iologi cal fun ction s .

M an too often follows the promptings of his animal p ro

p e n sities a nd in li stle s s m ate ri ali sm lim i t s his life to the n arro w
confine s of sen sation without even cont emplating the el evatin g

and unlimited powers of the mind .

The mind is a perfect th ing and h as been since the birth of

life It is th e storehou se of universal knowledge absolute tru th
.
, ,

and perfect memory .It h as guided the bu ilding and adornment

—
of the arch itecturally perfect body addin g to it as the centuries
pass ed until m an appeared as the most perfect monument am ong
,

the wonders of nature .

Thi s perfect m ind erect s rears and control s ou r bodies and

,

furni shes u s an organ ad apted to utiliz e j ust so much of the per ,

feet mind as may be needed in the struggle with circu mstances

,

and environm ent .

It is a demonstrable truth th at all forms of life hav e been

g i ven eve rythin g needed an d eve r yt h ing sought for, in the cou rse
of their development And it is reasonable to suppo se that the
.

perfect mind th e divine part of m an was given him to utiliz e

, ,

and can be ut ilized in the ratio to which he mak e s a constant ,

earnest effort to u se it .

In man we find the mo st perfect organ in creation for th e ,

expression of mind ; the brai n may be likened to a stringed in

stru ment cap able of an infinite ran ge of h armoniou s thou gh t

touched by the fingers of the mind in moments of inspiration it ,

has given u s all th at is immo rtal all th at is ideal in the hi story

,

and literatu re of the race .

Ex ternal nature exhibits a vast concert of titanic power ,

beyond man s absolute control but within prescribed lim its su b

’
,

j ect to his will He doe s not come as the homeless h elpless

.
,
 THE HEALING HAND 1 85

t
s rang er he wou ld appear to the untaught mind but as the righ t ,

ful heir of creation entering upon his heritage .

The ground he tread s bears in its fecund womb inexhau st ,

ible possibilities of production whi ch need but intelligent ex cita

tion to bring forth abundantly and to blossom as th e rose .

Delv ing deeper he secures metals for u se in all crafts and

arts and gem s wh ich may prove the pri ce of a woman s vir tue
,
’

or a king s ransom
'
.

Impetuous torrents dash over profound precipices on their

irresistible seaward way but man s intell igence enables him to
,
’

divert their course and utilize th eir energy .

Over two th irds of the terrestial ball the pathle ss ocean

—
-

spreads a liquid plain T he winds may das h its waters to the

.

sky but man lau nches his bark sp read s th e bellying canvas to
, ,

the gale and mak es the trackl ess deep the comm on hi ghway of
the world .

Even the most elus ive unch ained elements are harnessed
,

in his service and meas urably subservient to h is will .

Wh ere physical energies are too great to be controlled man ,

observes their course and govern s himself in accordance .

He canno t subvert the law and arrest the proce ssion of the
equ inox avert the storm and make perpetu al spri ng to bud or
,

summ er bloom but he can fore see th e approach of gray skie s and
,

winter win ds and hou se him safely from th e elemental strife ,

.

Knowledg e is power and it is to the highe st in terest of

h uman beings th at they learn th e con stitution and relation s of
,

things and discover their po ssibilities of mini stering to th eir ,

daily need s F or man s sway extend s proportionately with his

.
’

cu ltivation of his consciou s facultie s so as to eith er control ex

ternal obj ects and force s or to accommodate his own conduct of

their observed order .

M an is progressive Time and experience were nece ssary

.

to harmonize his facu ltie s and teach him the proper relation to
the outside world Hi story record s his gradual development
. .

Ignorant and uncivilized man is a ferociou s sensu al super

, , ,

stitiou s savage To him ex ternal creation is only a dread dis

.

—
play of powers too stupendous to control with evil and good in
e
s para bly commin gled— a mi gh ty c h ao s of even ts who se ch ain
of causation s is too intricate to unravel .
136 T HE H EALING HAN D

Partial unfoldment of the higher powers makes hi m a bar

Civilization is impo ssible until his own facu lties are studied
and u nderstood Then comes a reali zation of the u niversal
.

scheme wi th its opportunities for th e legitimate exercises of all

,

his powers animal moral and intellectual

, , .

He recognizes his position as the creature of an intelligent

force part of a perfect plan and j oyfu fly seeks to know the Law
, ,

of Being and how to render willing and steady compl iance .

He does not undervalue animal pleasu res but views them in

,

their proper ligh t Having tas ted th e delights inherent in his

.

moral and intellectual nature he ins ist s upon education in order

that he m ay to the fu ll enjoy his mental powers .

He real izes that his nature and enviro nm ent imply that th e
ultimate aim of his existence as a rational occupant of th e ma
terial world should be absolute and intelligent compliance with
,

the natural law in performing h is sh are of the world s work

,
’
.
188 THE HEALING HAND

that it mu st be given absolute authority and not simply allowed

to govern or gu ide occasionally .

T he idea of unity is ess ential Thi s controlling princi ple is

.

the Ego The physical man is but th e facile instru ment thro u g h
.

which mind mani fests itself .

I ts chief organ, the brain , wi th its intricate network of

nerves, is the most perfect mech anism in ex i stence ; so perfect
in fact that the statement has frequen tly been made th at th e
brain in action constitutes all there is of mind A ll that thi s .

machi nery of brain can do is to aid the mind and keep it in per
fect accord with its su rroundings by th e continuou s str eam o f
s ensation comi n g from th e special sens es In this respect the y .

are but the cell battery and the connecting wi res throu gh which

th e head quarters of the comm ander in chief, th e Real M an, keeps

- -

in touch wi th the vast regiments under his command .

The special sen ses are but th e windows of the mind, gate
ways for ideas , wax for impression s agents for the collection of
,

intelligence , which is conveyed to th e mind alon g the network of

nerves .

Th is is shown in insanity A ll of the sens es m ay be u nim

.

paired but th ey can minister only to the animal natu re and in

,

no wi se tou ch the Real M an .

T he Real M an th e mind is never impai red or destroyed

, ,

the people we call insane have sim ply lo st the power of orderl y ,

ph ysical expression of a mind non e th e less perfect but lackin g

, ,

th e facil itie s for coherent expre ssion .

Like the mu sician who se expression of di vine harmony is

limited to his violin the slipping of the key s do not lessen h is
,

skill and th e moment th e strin gs are attuned he is again able to

, ,

g ive p h y s i cal exp re s s ion to the m elodie s whi ch hi s instru m ent

,

formerly gave forth .

Thi s invi sible principle which con stitutes m an is but a mani

festation of the Supreme Power wh ich made and sustains him ,

and in who se ex act image h e is created .

—
I s Deity omniscient pos se ssi ng all wisdom T his same at
t ribute is po ssessed in great measure by m an .

I s the Supreme Bein g omnipotent all powerful ,

-
So in com ,

p lian c e wit h the la w ,i s m an

, an d C h ri st him s elf tau ght th at
nothing is impossible when he said that wh atsoever two m en
 THE HEALING HAN D 189

h uld agree togeth er upon would be done for th em of my Fath

s o
”
er which is in h eaven I s God omnipres ent " M an too can fill
. .

all space .

Hung like a diam ond at the highes t point in the cel estial
dome is the blue star Vega It is supposed th at the rest of the
.

known u niverse is ru sh ing toward it with incal cu l able speed yet ,

its estimated di stance is so great that countless cycles of time

s r —
mu t elapse befo e it can be reached so great th at what seems
to be a direct course toward it m ay be an angle now im percep
,

tible leave it mil lion s of miles out of ou r way ; so great is the dis
,
’
tance that its light m ay have been ex tin guished before man s
creation and yet will be vi sible for uncounted aeons but wh en , ,

through any of the instruments of sen se man perceives that star ,

and comprehend s it h e fil l s th at unfathomable immensity with

,

his mentality which is the Real M an

, .

Contemplation of Deity and its attributes is a study of ou r

selves and th e man who knows him self kn ow s God
, .

A s all thing s are possible with God ex cept that He would in ,

any instance contr avene the law whi ch He Him self has estab
,

lish ed for the governance of the world and as man is God in po

,

tentiality so nothin g within the pale of th e law is impo ssible to

,

Firm belief true faith which is single hearted endeavor to

, ,

accomplis h th e aim and end of h is being an d th at abs olute know ,

ledge which is only gained by experience will enable him to per ,

form wh at are commonly called miracles but wh ich we now know ,

to be but natural mani festation s of that Supreme Law which ,

spring s into act ion wh enever complied with regardle ss of wh eth ,

er such compliance is intelligent or whether the m an acted upon

,

kn ow s how to secure such action or is even co gnizant of the laws ’

These laws by which everything is governed are the prop

erty of all alike Just as by complying with the l aw we tu rn th e
.

button and flood ou r homes with electri city .

Just so with all other l aws wh en complied with they pl ace

—
,

in ou r po ssession all the power there is Go d s power to utilize ’

in ou r onward march .

Within the law th e only bounds set upon man s achievem ents ’

are those created by hi s own unbelief .

1 40 THE HEALIN G HAN D

God has pl aced with in human attainment, impartially and

without stint, the means for answering every prayer th at

can utter.

He who seeks dispensation or providential inter

ference is on the same plane with th e South Sea islander who en
treats his graven image and hou sehold God for rain in time of
,

famine and victory in tim e of war.

142 THE HEALING HAN D

portion wherein lies the throbbing emotions and passions and is

likened u nto the pul sing flesh ; while the spiri t is th e life giv ing -

portion of the tri ad corresponding to the blood

, .

The real ma n i s i
the sp ritual in dweller of his habitat o f
-

clay— — —
the Ego th e I am the me to whi ch all things stan d in
,

the relation of being m ine or not mine By the Ego we mean all .

that man knows of himself consciously , or all that he may nu

fold into consciou sness .

Of su ch a man was
it written , God created man in his own
”
im age . To overthrow th is assertion science has tilted in vain .

Materialism with scales and scalpel has busied its el f with taking
apart and weighing th e perfect mech anism of the physical body ,
in an endeavor to find the secret sprin g that wou ld satisfact orily
explain its workings, on the assumption that man is an automa
ton— an animated doll — a vastly s upe rior doll , it is true , but still
a doll who se every thou ght , feeling , emotion and act is the resu lt

of some special stimulus ; a creature of environment, at the

mercy of stimuli That man in spite of his decl aration and eff ort
.

in pulpit and laboratory to prove himself otherwise , I S OF

DIVIN E LINEAGE ; OF HEAVENLY ORIGI N, with potential
power to approach perfection in all things .

True it is a tedi ous and difficult process to call into consciou s

manifestation this heavenl y ( spiritual ) part of him Every form .

of life upon th is planet has done its sh are in th e effort to bring

the spiritual the perfect the God part into consciou sness This
, ,
-
, .

is the genes i s of the Real Man wh ose ch ief duty is still to mater
,

ialize and utilize the real part the spiritual part the kin gdom of
, ,

heaven within him .

Uncon scious but ever rising into consciou sness thi s trans
, ,

cendent and indest ru ctible portion of being whi ch cl aim s imm or

tal uni ty with Divinity is the tireless sleeple ss portion of man

, ,

to which he owes everyth ing even very life itself It was this
, , .

portion that was able to exist in perfection in the min ute ovu m .

It is the architect which buil ded in al l its perfection the domicil e

of bone s fle sh and bl ood in which the ego exis ts
, .

It fu rni shes this ego wi th h and s with which to work with ,

organs of special sen se with which to cope with environm ent and
a brain in which to re gi ster s ymbols of speec h — words with
which to cl othe id eas .
 THE HEALIN G HA ND 1 48

I t has in fact, furni shed the ideas of which man s reper

all
’

toire of conscious knowledg e cons i sts F or every idea wh ich man .

consciou sly po sses ses came o riginally as an intuitional whi sper

ing from the perfect knowled ge of the u n con sciou s mind It is .

the well from which the consciou s mind draws truth pure and ,

u ndefiled .

The consciou s ego acts as th e watchman the spokesman and ,

th e pilot which conducts th e embodied sp iritual m an th rough

,

th e vi ci ssitude s of environm ent and steers him over th e seas of

adversity into the h arbor of immortality .

The port from which it set out is blurred in the misty pas t ,

th e h arbor to whi ch it journeys is veiled in the dimness of futur

ity and between th e two m an has ever sough t to mark his course
, ,
“ ”
correctly and read the purpo rt of the sealed orders un der which
he sail s .

A s God through and in accordance with imm utable law

, ,

g ov ern s th e boundle s s univers e with all its te eming mill ion s so ,

the real man dominates his corporeal habitation is master of his ,

fate and captain of his soul .

What then is man s statu s in thi s sch eme of th ings entire

’

Mankind at present is l es s perfect as an animal th an many of , ,

the lower animal species He onl y differs from the animal in

.

the possession of conscio u s knowledge and of the con scious u se

he make s of the qualities of feeling aspiring and knowing which , ,

acquaint an ce with thi s perfect sel f gives him .

But the hu man anim al him self has been unfolded from the
lowest form of life Hen ce we draw the conclusion th at God en
.
,

dowed the simplest form of life the uni cell ul ar organi sm the ,

moneron with th e potenti al power to develop and transmi t to

,

progeny this power of produ cing a creature con scious of his

, ,

spiritu al sim ilitude to God the Father , .

Ju st as we can forecast the future of the seed which in tim e

fructifie s and brings forth perfumed blossoms and lu sciou s fruit ,

after its kind ; j u st as the child born of woman will in t h e fulness ,

of time reflect the ch aracteri stics of the parents ; so God planted

the seed of life the embryo which has gone throu gh millions of
, ,

years and cou ntless evolutionary ch an ges in the proces s of u n

folding a spiritu al bein g lik e unto the Creator .
1 44 THE HE A LING HAND

Le t m an
e lize that he is pos sessed of a div ine and perfect
r a

mind from which he may draw for h is need s Th is is equiva l ent

, .

to the saying of Jesus : And all things what soever ye sh all ask
”
in prayer believing ye shall receive
, , Matt 2 1 22 . .
-
.

We have traced man s progre ss from th e earliest asc erta in

’

able stag e of h is exi sten ce to th e pres ent time ; con sider ed his

ph ysical and organi c con st itution in its relation to external cr ea

tion ; demon strated the kinship of the imm ortal life principl e or
Real M an to th e Author of h is Being ; and indicated his powe rs
an d limitatio n s .

From this su rvey we are irresi stibly drawn to the following

c onclu sion s

M an is lord of creation and has dominion over all th e wor ld .

His will brook s no interfe rence from materi al th in gs Crea t ed .

and governed by immut able law h e finds h imself powerles s sa ve

, ,

in his ability to know that law and act in compliance th erewi th .

He can learn to know onl y by experien ce His sole meth od .

of acquiring knowledge is by doing th in gs .

We h ave discu ssed th e nature of law and ascribed to it c m

nipotence — all po we r
-
M an cannot u surp any of th is power T h e
. .

law doin g all th in gs precludes the po ssibility of m an doin g an y

th ing in and of him self He is in reality but an executor of th e
.

law .

tin g in compliance with the law is a living m anifes

M an ac

tation of his own divinity .

M an living in conflict with th e law is a liv ing demons tration

of h is ignorance of his own divinity .

M an livin g in intelligent compliance with the law is a liv

ing manife st ation of his con sciou sn es s of h is own divinity .

Man s con sciou sness of h is own divinity acquired th rou gh

’
,

his own activity con stitutes h is power

,
.

Effort is the unvarying pri ce of su ccess and every m an ,

knowing him self to be a reality po sse sse s the ability to act eq ual
,

l y with every other m an .

Con sciou s knowled ge of ability to do is the only avail able ,

capital of th e real m an and it is obtainable onl y th rou gh ex peri

,

ence .

The only thing man can really know is truth as fal sehood is ,

the essence of unreality .

 THE WELTMER METHOD
T he Wel tm er Method is a term applied by a magazine writer
in May, 1 899 , to distin guish my method of healing from th os e o f
other ex ponent s of mental and metaphysical h ealing and late r ,
“
defined by Dorland s dictionary as a sy stem of s ugge stive treat
’

”
ment aiming to bring the body and mind into harmony .

T he cardinal principl es of my teaching are the se : I bel iev e

that every person is born with equal rights ; that th e spiritual
part of each person is born in th e image and l ikeness of th e
Creator and th e same power wh ich produces m an produces every
,

thin g and th at all th ings animate and in animate have th eir con
,

tinu al being in accordance with the l aws of th is Creato r .

I believe the power th at created man is omnipotent po ssesses ,

all the power there is ; hence the power is all in th e C reator

, .

This Creator in action is Law and this Creator is known by

,

the names Law Law of N atu re Law of Bein g God and desig
, , , ,
“ ”
nated by Je su s Chri st as My Father whi ch is in Heaven .

Man s power does not consi st in any inh erent inborn latent
’
, ,

ability th at he may possess ; h is power con si sts solel y in his abil

ity to grasp the meaning of th e Law that governs him an d to
comply with it . His knowled ge of this Law and how to comply
with it constitutes his power .

I recognize in the l anguage contained in Matt 1 8 19 a state.

-
,

ment bibli cal in its origin and both theological and scientific in
its meanin g ; and tak e th e position that a thorough understand
ing of the l angu age cou ched in th at verse of scripture forms the
bas i s of compromise and unity between science and reli gion I .

believe the religion Jes u s taught and the works He did were
based upon scientific truth s and when applied according to His
,

in stru ction are capable of demon stration .

I believe Jesus entire teachings are as true today as they

’

were the day He gave them utterance I do not believ e He would

.

teach u s to do a work we cannot do .

A strictly undeviating course based upon the prin ciple in

,

volved in His aforesaid statement constitutes the fundamental

,

doctrin e of the Wel tmer Method Based upon thi s principle, I

.
 T HE HEALING HAND 147

claim that any person in the world can do what I do if he knows

what I know .

The purpose of my life is to teach others what I know I .

“
have no creed ex cept the following : I do not cl aim for myself
any power or virtue th at I do not freely concede to all oth er men ;

I do cl aim for myself all power and virtue con ced ed to any other
man .

At the age of s eventeen years I became interest ed in a little

book entitled How to Become a Mesmerist
,
“ ”
Thi s little book
. ,

in connection with other articles from variou s work s on the su b

j cet of what was then known as Animal Magneti sm ex cited a ,

bu rning desire to know the phenomena connected with th ese

s ubj ects
. From this I began to inve stigate I studied all th e .

work s I could obtain on this subj ect in connection with the

,

works of variou s authors on Mental Science and al so the teach ,

ing s of Jesus from a practi cal standpoint .

I investigated the effects of sugge stion and every other su b

j e ct conn ected the rewith d ir ectly or indir ectly At l ast in th.e ,

spring of 1 895 wh en my ob servation and study had reach ed a

,

well matured s tage I began to grasp th e situation and to believe

-
,

there was an untold store of knowled ge for th e see ker of truth

alon g th is line of thought .

I began to apply the knowled ge I had gained in almost a

qu arter of a century s study and was su ccessful in producing
’

hypnotic condition s but was perplexed as to why th es e th in gs

,

could be done .

I n ex perimen ting with the variou s ph enomena of hypnotic

conditions I was led to th e con clu sion th at the power th at held
,

the hypnotic subj ect in the different conditions indu ced by su g

g es tion w as not the direct power of th e human will ; that the old
theory th at strong wills control weak one s was a fall acy as th e ,

best subj ects ou t of over two hundred during my experiments

w ere th os e to wh om we would natu rally ascribe stron g wills .

Continuing along thi s line until th e summer of 1 89 6 I began ,

to study some phenomenal feats th at were performed while the

subj ect was in the catal eptic state wherein the hum an body was
,

su spended and weigh t s pl aced upon it that would h ave cru shed

every bone in the body had the wei ghts been pl aced directly upon
it whil e in the normal condition This demonstrated to me the
.
148 THE HEALING HAND

control of the ph ysical through the mental It proved to m e .

beyond a question that thought can and does control the bod y .

It also demon strated th at the effect of su gg estion is a physical

one brought about by the proper action of the m ind and th u s ,

enable s the body to manifes t powers th at wou ld oth erw ise b e

utterly impossible ; and furth er th at by proper mental actio n
,

there is a power brought in to action wh ich is completely ou tsid e

of either s ubj ect or operator .

Believing that through the effect of sugges tion that ph y

sical condition co u l d be ch ang ed I was led to try its effect as a
,

cu rative agent .

I took up the proposition that if one physical condition cou ld

be controlled by sugge stion ALL phy sical conditions could b e
,

more or le ss affected by it Hence I resolved to try its effect

.
,

upon diseased conditions of the human body ; to try every man

ner of dis eas e pre sented ; and to give every di seas e a h und re d
tri al s before I would abandon it .

My success from the beginning was phenomenal Among .

the first cases tried were cancer locomotor ataxia tuberculosis

, , ,

morphine h abit malignant diseases of all descriptions periodi cal

, ,

and inte mittent feve s

r r My experiments were succes sful be
.
~

yond my expectations .

In contempl ating these results I was sati sfied there was a

,

prin ciple involved in this treatment th at had never been fully

understood or exp lained by any of the writers u pon this subj ect .

I searched the archives of literatu re studied the mental se ,

tivities of my patients and al so of hypnotic subj ects for some

clew to t hi s principle and at last received the first inkling of it
,

from a child l ess th an thirteen years old Wh ile vaguely dis .

cu ssin g the que stion th at some fo rce omnipotent in its natu re , ,

mu st exi st ju st as electricity in diffusion ex i sts this child su g ,

g e sted th at the powe r involved mu st be wh at m en call God .

At th is time I was still carefully studying the New Testa

ment Scriptures and my thou ght was directed by th i s mere child
,

to the language of Je su s Chri st in Matth ew th at If two

“

of you sh all agree on earth as touching anything th at they shall

”
ask it sh all be done for them of my Father whi ch is in Heav en
,
.

I was convinced that all th e power there is in the world is

“ ”
one power th at the Father which is in Heaven is th e only
,
1 50 T HE HEA LING HA ND

healing in the Weltm er Meth od depends upon a clear conception

of th e Law and how to comply with it
.
.

Another principle is th at the power to heal and to control

human lives for good can only be learned by doing th ese thing s .

T o know and to do go hand in h and in the Weltmer Method

- -
.

One of the greatest and gravest questions that m an has ev er

“ ”
asked is C an a man by s earch ing find out God 7
, In the days of
the patriarch of U z this question agitated the mind s of m en and ,

it agitates men s mi nds tod ay with as inten se an interest as it

’

did in th e days of old .

M an has always beh aved in a Being in whose power he fee ls

him self to be ; yet what that power is has baffled his keenes t re
sea ch F or th ou sand s of years m an has bent over th e crad le to
r .

learn the mystery of his ori gin but no word of ex planation ever
,

came up from the li ttle semi con sciou s one th at nes tled th ere F or
- .

thousand s of years man h as strained his gaz e into the gloo m of

th e grave to u nravel the mystery of h is destiny but no reply
,

has ever come back from t h e voicele ss dwelling of the worm th e ,

clod and the coffin .

All is mystery ; yet man has always believed th at a Being

other than h ims elf brought him into exi stence ; m an has alway s
believed that he will go whence he came at th e beh e st of th e
same Bein g th at brought him into ex is tence Wh o wh at then
.
, , ,

is thi s Being " Who by searching can fin d out God "
“ ”

Althou gh we m ay not know the I nfinite to perfection sti ll ,

every forward step th at knowledge takes brings her wher e sh e

can indul ge in a clearer vi sion ; and in th at clearer vi sion of what
is known form clearer con cep tions of what is concealed
,
.

It is a fact that ou r conception of any one th ing is fashioned

in some degree by ou r conceptions of other thing s This is so
.

becau se all truth is one ; there cannot be varying kind s of tru th .

So it appears th at every addition made to ou r acquired

stock o f knowledge makes more valuable th at whi ch we already

po ssess .

The greates t and the grandest conception th at man can form

is h is con ception of the Infinit e —the G reat Fir st C au se—G od .

All men acknowledge th e existence of God but h ow varying are

,

their con ceptions of Him " Let u s try to formul ate the concep
tion of God th at is en tertained by a large class of advanced
 THE HEALING H AND 1 51

thinkers of the pre sent time T o do this it will be neces sary to

.

consider th e prevailing conception, both hi storically and scien

tifically.

F ro m the earli est times there h ave been two th eori es con
cerning the ori gin of thing s Th ere have been other theories,
.

but these two have been the greatest ones One theory is known .

as Du alism . This theory postulates the ex istence of two eternal

the existingorder of things from the inter elations of these two -r

entiti es. It is needless to say that this th eory has involved u s in

a lot of contradictions upon whi ch m
, an has wasted hi s greatest

powers of thought in the vain endeavor to reconcile th em Such

, .

contradi ctions as Foreordination and F ree Will Go od and Evil , ,

Deity and Devil Subj ective and Obj ective, etc etc have their
, , ,

origin in the theory of D ualis m .

T he th eory of Monism postu lates the exi stence of only one

Substance and th at Matter and Mi nd are onl y different manifes
,
“ ”
tations of th at Substance The term substance as th us us ed ,
.
,

m eans onl y that wh ich lies behi nd or under all qualiti es or at

tribu tes.

I hold in my hand somcthing that l call an appl e Le t us .

inqu ire what we know of this something I gaz e upon it with the .

eye and obtain color and form ; but color and form are qualities .

I bring it to the nose and I obtain smell or odor ; but smell or

odor is a quality I bring it to the tongu e and I obtain tas te ; but
.

taste is a qu ality I bring it to the tactile nerve or nerves of

.

ing go ne the round of the senses, I fin d that all I have obtain ed
from them are qualities Of the su bstance of wh ich they are
.

qu aliti es the sen ses tell me not hin g I onl y k now that it is . .

When we me to mind we find that we h ave thou ght ; but

co ,

thou ght is a product of mind We have emotions and passion ;

.

but th es e are attribute s of mind We have volition ; but volition

.

is an attribu te of m ind .

Having gone the round of what I know of mind I find my ,

knowled ge of mind to consist of a knowledge of mind s at tri butes

’

or qu ali ti es only Of
. th e subst ance of whi ch they are attributes
or qu alities I know nothing save that it is .
1 52 THE HEALIN G HAND

Since we do not know what the subs tance is that lies behi n d
the qu alities of which the senses tell u s and since we do n ot
,

kn ow what the substance is th at lies behind the qualities or at

tributes of that which we call mind m ay they not be one an d th e
,

same subs tance 7 Th at is a true philosophy which find s o n e

caus e where formerly there were suppo sed to be two

This Universal Substance is also I ntellig ence—Infini te I n

.

telligence It is al so Power—Infinite Power It is al so Princi p le

—Infinite Principle It is the Great First Cause—God
. .

. .

The only term that h ere need s special mention is Prin cip le .

By Principle is meant th e source or origin of anyt hing ; that

from which anything proce The principle of the oak tree is -

in the acorn ; th e principle of the eagle is in the egg Infini te .

Principle is the source or origin of all things th at fro m whi ch ,

all things p roceed.

INT ELLIG ENCE POW ER P R INCI P LE

This Universal Substance vi ewed as Intelligence and Power

, ,

we call Law; viewed as Power and Principle we call Life ; viewed,

as Intell igence and Principle we call Love ( Go od ) Thus we have

— —
.
,

Intellig ence and Power Law; Power and Principle Lif e ; In

—
telligence and Principle Love This Universal Substance viewed
—
.
,

as Law Life and Love we call Being

, , i —
Infin te Being G od .

Here we see that behind all phenomena is Being Wherever .

intellig ence displ ays itself wherever Power manifests itself

, ,

wherever Principle evolves there is B eing

, .

Do we gaze with d elight on the summer cloud as it lazily

hangs shirred as it were upon strings of intertwined amber and
,

g old lik e cu rtain s for the bowe r of the Kin g of Day 7 It was

B eing that festooned it B eing gives to the l ily its s ymmetry

.

and to the ro se its blended beauty Being is the vernal bloom

.
,

in th e painted flower in the lighted star

, .
 C HAPT ER XVII

VIEWED AS A PERSONALI TY
“
The question is often asked Do you bel ieve in a personal
,
” “
God 7 Without stopping to inquire many declare Y ou do not , ,

believe in a personal God .

When Christianity came into the world it found two con

ceptions of the Infinite prevail ing on the soil s where it took roo t .

One was the Greek conception and the oth er the Latin concep
,

tion of God .

The conception held by the Greek was tinged by his concep

tions of other things, and th e same is tru e of the Latin con

Greek vilization differed from Latin civilization T h e

ci .

Gr eek was a part of his commonwealth No statute could be en .

acted to control the conduct of men without his voice T he nu .

thority of the state dwelt in the person of every Greek .

The Greek was not separate from th e auth ori ty of the state ,

nor separate from h s fellow Greek ; he was one with the state
i -

and one with his fellow Greeks

- .

T he highest human authority which the Greek could con

ceiv e was the state ; and of this he was a part T he highest au
— —
.

thority which he could conceive t e Infinite was tinged by

h
his conception of the high est h u man authority Hence Deity .
,

dwelt in His creatures God was th e immanent the abiding

.
, ,

the indwelling God .

A s the Greek looked out upon the world of nature ev ery ,

th ing that he saw was but a manifestation of this indwelling

Deity Forest and field sea and sky mou ntain and plain lake
. , , ,

and stream wav irm field and barren moor — these were but the
—
,

fringes of His garments this were but the veilings that con
cealed Him from mortal k en .

True the Greek had gods many but this was the Being be
hind all thi ngs—the unknown God
,

Wh en th e apo stle to the Gentiles stood on Mars Hill and

’

addre ssed the cultu red Atheni an s he told them they w ere too
,

worshipful ; for as he ascended from th e city he saw an altar ,

c asted to the u nknown God .

 T HE HEALING
'

HAND 1 55

He then told them that he had come to declare this u nkno wn

In Him we live and move and h ave ou r being .

Here th e greatest propagandi st of C hristianity shows that

h is conception of God was th e Greek conception of God abiding , ,

—
indwelling th e im manent conception of Deity .

R oman civilization differed from Greek civilization in th at

th e Latin was not a part of the state in the sens e in which the
Greek was a part of the state .

The Latin was not a sovereign he was a subj ect T he high

, .

est hu man aut ority was the Impe ator

h r — the Caesar .

The authority was di stinct and separate from that over

which it ex ercised auth ority .

Thi s authority sat a loft on athroneof dignity and might be

approached by only a favored few .

When the subj ect would supplicatethe sovereign his pray er ,

must go up through a course of cou rtiers or mediators ; the

throne he was unworthy to approach .

T he Latin s conception of th e highest human authority

’

tinged his conception of Supreme Authority .

God was no longer t he indwelling th e a bidin g D eity but the

, ,

transcendental God separate from the u niverse

, Seated on a .

th rone on some far off portion of th e universe He, like the

-
,

Caesar could be approached o nl y by the favored few

, l
.

This necessitated a lin e of intermediaries mediators priests , ,

to bea r up the petitions of the subj ect to the th ro ne wh ere Deity

sat.

No lon ger is m an a ch ild ; he is the servant No longer is he .

one with the Fath er The Father and the child have been separ
.

ated .No longer m ay m an seek audience with hope of success,

state ceremoni al s God and the individual were separate
. .

The Kin g of kings gives audience only where His ambassa

dors may appear and the subj ects must treat those ambassadors
,

as th ey woul d treat Him .

His worship th erefore took the form of court functions and

wherever he may be .
1 56 T HE HEALIN G HA ND

It is needless to say th at the very terms of the th eolog y that

is founded upon this transcendental co nception of Go d are term s
of the Latin forum and the Latin court .

A s Latin civilization overcame Greek civilization so did ,

Latin theology founded upon the transcendental conception of

God overcome the Greek th eol ogy fou nded upon the imman ent
concepti on of God .

Tru e the immanent conception did not entirel y disapp ear

,

it still remained though overshadowed stru ggling for a place in

, ,

the thought of men .

It is now beginning to reassert itself and the day is not far

distant th at will see it occupying its proper and ancient place in
the thought of men .

It is the modern idea yet th e O ld id ea, It is th e .

thought of Jesu s of Nazareth of Saul of Tarsu s of the Gree k

, ,

ante Nicene fath ers of the Gospel of St John

-
, . .

These two varying conceptions of the Infinite necessitates

two varying conceptions of the u niverse .

The Greek conception of the u niverse was that of an organ

ism having the el em ents, powers and potencies of all that exis ts
,

within itself .

T he Latin conception of the u niverse was that of a great

machine the powers and potencies of which lay outside of itself
, .

In the Greek conception Being was within th e u niverse on e ,

with it ; in the Latin conception Being was outside of the u ni

verse separate from it .

The question remain s Is this B eing a person I That wi ll

‘

,
“
depend upon what is understood by the term person .

If by person is meant a being like the writer or th e reader ,

“ ”
only on a larger scale one of a class then the term person can
,

not be applied to this Being .

If by person we mean limitation in any sense either ex , ,

plicit y or im pli city then thi s, Bein g is no t a perso n .

In wh at does the essence of person consi st I Does it consist

‘

in corporeity or form " Certainly not Am I a person wh en part .

of my corporeity is gone and my form radically changed 7 Most

assu redl y W h a
. t then c ons ti tu tes a pers on 7
1 58 T HE HEALIN G HAND

God is manifest in the souls of men ( not yet in fu llness )

God the Holy Spirit .

God is manifest in all things , but according to the nat u re

with which he has endowed th at thing .

’ ’
God is in Lebanon
’
edar in Sh aron s ro se in the v alle y s
s c , ,

l ily but accordin g to the nature with wh ich h e has endowed th e

,

cedar th e rose and the lily

,
.

God is in th e beast of the forest in th e fowl of th e air in

, ,

the fi sh of the sea ; but according to the nature with which H e

has en dowe d the bea st , th e fowl and the fis h .

“ ”
God is all in all .
 MIND
We h ave seen that the universal substance that lies behind
all phenom ena is al so Uni versal Intelli gence Th is Intelligence
.

manifest s itself only through what is known in consciou sness as

matter Thi s Intelligence th us m anifesting itself i s called Mi nd
. .

Mind then is or m ay be called embodied spirit and the statement ,

can be made th at th ere is noth in g in this wo rld th at can either

create or de stroy but mind onl y
,

In thi s meaning of the term mind we must di stinguish it

from force Mind is not force but it exerts force
.
, .

It is strange th at tho se thing s th at lie nearest to ou r very

being are the most difficult to define .

The astronomer may place his eye to the telescope and look
upon the stars and planets in the far-off field s of space and by , ,

th e law of mathematics determi ne almost to the pound the forces

,

they exert and how they are acted upon

, .

He can determine the cau se of the sli ghtest dis turbance yet ,

as it appro ache s more clo sely to his own being he cannot eith e r
locate or determin e the slightest cau se for the di stu rbances th at
occur in his ph ysical or mental organi sm .

So it is with mind It lies so near to ou r very being is in

.
,

fact ou r very being th at it is impo ssible to define it It is known

, .

to every ration al intellig en ce .

I n mind there are variou s and varying facultie s Mind per .

ceiv es imagines conceive s form s jud gments reasons but the se

, , , , ,

are not all of mind .

Th ese are the facul tie s that mind exerci se s upon what m ay
be known as the plane of the cons ciou s mind but the mind has ,

other facu lties th at it exercis es upon oth er pl anes .

S ince the mind is th e great builder the architect th e con

, ,

atractor it exerci s es the se function s uncon sciou sly but as a part

, ,

of th at universal inte lligence that has not yet become consciou s .

Mind is at work in the tree of th e fores t building it up in ,

s trength and in beauty .

Mind is in the flower of th e field giving it symmetry of form

,

and pen cil ing its petal s with th e beauti ful colors th at ench ant u s .
1 60 THE HEALING HAND

Mind has built the bird from the little life principle in the

Mind forms the beas t of the field th e fowl of the air th e , ,

fishes of th e sea yet mind as builder acted uncons ciously

, .

It is mind that still governs guides directs and controls

, , ,

all things that it has buil ded wheth er it be th e universal mi n d

,

that made all things or an individual part of that universal mi n d

,

that has built up an individual organism and mani fested its el f

therein .

This life principle or universal intelligence is not all co n

scious in the ve getable kingdom but become s cons ciou s in var y
,

ing degrees in th e anim al kingdom .

In man co n sciou sness cu lm inates in con science whi ch is a ,

kn owledg e of this universal intelligence and a realization of it s

oneness with it .

M an is a creature of two world s He is endowed with a .

nature wh ich in one phase of it he holds in common with th e

brute .

Another ph ase h e hold s in common with th e vegetable T h e .

highe st phas e he h old s in com mon with a h i gh er order of being s .

It is that phas e of his nature with wh ich h e h as been en

dowed that he hold s in common with all anim ate nature which
we are to con sider in healin g di seas es .

Th ere is in everything that has life a universal principle ,

acting unde r universal power and guided by universal intel li

,

Thi s if left free and untrammelled will keep every organism

, ,

in which it manifest s itself in h armoniou s relation sh ip in all its

parts ; and if inh armony from any cau se should result it is the ,

onl y power that can e stablish condition s whereby harmoniou s re

su lts m ay be re es tabli shed
-
.

Thi s power exerci ses its function s un consciously .

Mind th en pres ent s itself to u s through two phas e s or with

, , ,

two sets of facultie s .

One set of faculties it exerci ses on th e cons ciou s pl ane and ,

these for co nvenience of di scu ssion we call th e con scious mind .

An other set of facultie s it exerci se s unconsciou sly and this ,

set of facultie s for convenience we call th e un cons ciou s mind .

102 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

I see Venu s in her beauty and Neptu ne in hi s far off

grandeu r .

What made telescope " Mind F or what purpose " F or

the .

the pu rpos e of interpreting vibrations on thi s ph ysical plane .

What formed thi s deli cate telescope the h u man eye " T h e ,

min d F or what purpose

. F or the pu rpose of interpreting som e
of the vibration s on thi s physical plane .

So o f all the organ s of sen se ; and mind m ade thi s ex qu is ite

piece of mechanism called the body nouri shes and maintains it
,

for the ex press purpos e of interpreting vibrations of the ph ysical

plane and coming to a knowled ge of the manifold forms in wh ich
,

Being has pleased to mani fest him se lf .

Another faculty of the unconscious mind is known as th e

facu lty of phy sical control .

S it down and thi nk of something delicious to taste delect ,

Stir up the perfect memory of the thought of a lusciou s

peach or the red ripe strawberry or of any other fru it which
,

the taste delights .

Soon you will see the salivary gl ands begin to loosen som e
of their products ; you say that your mouth begin s to water .

What cau sed thi s 7 Thought and thought onl y ; showin g

conclu sively th at mind controls th e phy sical organis m so far as

the salivary glands are concerned .

It is a fact known by ever y ph y sici an th at a mother with a

nursing babe can become so rou sed by anger that the milk in
h er bosom will become ch anged so th at th e nutriment of h er
,

babe acting upon that babe s organism may poi son it give nu
’
,

easiness, diseas e pain , .

What made that ch ange in th e milk in the moth er s breas t " ’

Thou ght and thought only ; again showing so far as the milk in ,

th at mother s breast was concerned that it was under the control

’
,

of mind .

It is a fact well known by ch emi st s that a m an may become

so arou sed by ang er th at the persp iration that oozes from th e
po res of his skin will be ch anged in chemical composition .
 T HE HEALING HAND 168

What made this change in th is secretion " T hou ght and

thought only ; showing again that so far as th e capillary system
,

i s concerned it is under the control of mind

, .

Man m t to
ay re u r n h is home from his d aily toil h u n ge r ,

g nawing at h is Vital s Let him be met at the th resh old of his

.

home with th e sad news th at wife or child is nigh unto death or

dead and a mouth ful of food would choke h im
, .

What made th at change in th e craving of his stomach for

food " Thought and thought only .

And so we m ight go th e round s sh owing th at there is not

,

an organ of th e h uman body not a gland in th e body not a s ecre

, ,

tion th at is not under the dominion and control of mi nd .

It controls th e circul ation of the blood ; wh atever ch ange

takes place in thi s ph y sical organi sm secretion or excretion dis
, ,

integration or regeneration is done by though t and by th ought

,

only.

Another faculty of th e uncons ciou s mind is that it is con

trolled by suggestion .

Wh en the con sciou s mind of a person is in abeyance as in ,

hypnosi s and th e u nconscious mind in comm unication with eu

,

other mind the unconscious mi nd believe s whatever it is told

, ,

does whatev er it is commanded to do .

This is one of the most important faculties of th e u ncon

scious mind and is one of the greate st factors in the sci ence of
,

Another faculty of th e uncon scious mind is th at it has th e

power of communicating with other uncon sciou s mind s by a law
known only to itself .

We express that faculty by th e term telepathy .

The unconscious mind is ever active never slumbers never

, ,

sl eep s . It cares for the body while in sleep .

T he uncon sciou s mind considers as real ities the creation s

of the consci ou s mind .

It po ssesses all the dyn ami c force th at mi nd possesse s .

It is the seat of th e affectional emotions .

1 64 THE HEALING H AND

It is its high and holy prerogative to perpetuate and to pre

s erve th e race .

I t is the so-called g uardi an an gel that protects in g rav e

,
—
emergencies and th at give s ao called premon itions .

It is in fact the engineer and mach inis t that keeps th e ph y

sical organism in repai r .

Th ere are other facu lties inherent in the unconsciou s m ind ,

but they are of minor importan ce in th e science of h ealing .

Th ey belong rath er to the domain of ph ilosoph y th an t o th e

scien ce of h ealing .
1 66 THE HEALI NG HAND

Ins ert one cu p in the hydrogen gas and the other in th e

ox ygen gas and you wil l di scover upon exam ination that disre
, ,

g ar d in g th e law of gravitation the h ydrogen gas h as des ce nded

,

to th e lower cu p and di sregarding the l aw of gravitation th e

, , ,

oxygen gas has ascended to the upper cu p sh owing that one gas , ,

is a vacuum to another gas .

Thus matter in a rarefi ed state penetrates m atter in a den ser

state .

How many may be the degrees of density in whi ch matter

ex i sts man may never kn o w .

They m ay be almost infinite in number the rarer pen etrat ,

ing and interpenetrating th e d ens er until at last we must come ,

to an ul timate substance h ighl y rarefied the su b sistence of wh ich ,

all oth er things are ex i stence s .

In certain strata of thi s hi ghly rarefied sub stance thou ght

plays its part as in th e ether one rarefied form electri city pla ys
, , ,

its part .

In ex perim ents made in wireless telegraph y it has bee n dis ,

covered the electri cal vibration s pro ceed onl y ia ri ght lines b u t ,

in the hi gher rarefied form of matter thought proceeds in all di

rection s and on all lines .

I h ave said th at the brain is the mind s l aboratory and th e ’

,

product of that l aboratory is thought .

Every thought produces a vibration in certain brain cel ls ,

and there is a decompo sition of the matter composing th ese cel ls ,

and a new sub stance is given off wh i ch se ts in vibration th e rare

,

fied form of matter in which thought exercises its activities .

“
Many years ago Alex ander Bain in his treatis e on Mind ,

showed th at every thou gh t that was formed in th e

”
and Body ,

brain produced a chemical ch ange .

Now scientifi c investi gation shows that the decompositi on

,

of matter in th e cell s of th e brain produces a new su bstanck

s a c —
thou g t sub t n e j u st as in the cell s of the electri cal battery
h
th e decompo sition th at tak es pl ace among the el ements com pos
ing the battery give s off a new sub stance ; and th at substance in
motion we cal l electricity .

It is strange that the thoughts which in the New Tes tam en t

are ch aracterized as things of the flesh produ ce coarse vibration s
which are di sintegratin g to th e physical organism .
 THE HEALING HAND 1 67

T he thou ghts whi ch the New Tes tament characterizes as

things of th e spirit produce those finer vibrations th at are re
genera ting, rej uvenatin g and he alth -p odu in
r c g .

It is a law of ph ysical science th at action and reaction are

equ al and in stantaneou s and in oppo site directions .

A ball thrown upon the floor acts upon th e floor with a cer
tain force The floor reacts upon the ball with an equal force
.

and sends it back with a force equal to th at with whi ch it de

So thought in the brain is sent out as a vibration

a .

Action and reaction ar e h ere equal instantaneou s

, and in

T hought produ ces the sam e vibrations in th e brain cell s that

it produ ces in th e rarefied form of matter in which it exercises
its act ivities, and is reflected upon the nervous system , wh ich
is but the brain in extension , producing the same vibrations upon
the ph ysical organism that are produced upon th e rarefied form
of matter in whi ch it exercises its activity .

Showing th at on th e boundary line where ph ysics and meta

physics meet action and reacti on are equal instantaneous and in
, ,

Showing al so th at thou ght, in ste ad of being an airy nothing ,

ex ercises force upo n th e phys ical organi sm .

Again this thought is proj ected , or may be proj ected under

, ,

the direction of th e will .

T h ought m ay be formed for a definite purpose and sent out

to ex ecute that pu rpose .

In wir el ess telegraph y it has been demonstrated th at a man

‘

with physical materi al can construct instruments so delicate that

they can throw a rarefied form of matter known as eth er into
, ,

such vibration s that another instrument al so deli cately con

,

stru cted can receive th e same vibrations and re spond to them

,
.

How much more deli cate that wonderful battery the cell s of ,

the brain ; and so mind can send forth a thought th at shall be pro
j ectcd ou twardly and another mind al so delicately con structed
, , ,

can receive th es e vibrations and the force th ereof j u st as effec ,

tively as the instru m ent s made by human skill out of the ma

teri al elem ent .
1 68 THE HEALING HAND

T ake person suffering with diseas e whi ch di sease has h ad

a ,

its origin in wrong thought activity .

T he pain is th ere th e disease is there registered perm a

, ,

n ently upon the ph ysical organis m T he physical organism re.

act s upon th e mind The mind cannot dismis s the though t th at

.

th e pain is there .

T h e patient is in bondage to h is thought ; he cannot liberat e

him self from it ; but another pers on with a sound m ind an d a
sound body is not under the same bond age of though t .

He can think a thought of eas e and send the v ibration of

that thought outward It can act upon the brain cells of the dis
.

eased pers on and engender in tho se brain cells th e same vibra

,

tion s th at are generated in the mind of the h ealthy person .

These vibrations acting often uncon sciou sly to the di s eas e d

,

person register the thought vibration that it is im po ssible for his

,

thoughts to initiate and unconsciously to himself harmonious

, , ,

regenerating vibrations take th e pl ace of th e inh armoniou s di s

inte grative v ibrations and eas e takes the place of diseas e and
, ,

pain is banished from his ph ysical organi sm .

This may sound stran ge but it is not more strang e than

,

wireless tel egraphy and operates upon the sam e principle

, .

Before anyone can deny the principles propounded here he ,

mu st deny th e principles that underlie th is new and wonderful

discovery in th e domain of physics .

T h e efficacy of the healtt thought sent out will dep en d

upon th e steadiness and rh ythm with which it is s ent by th e
operator and will depend in some degree upon the di seased per
,

son s mind
’
.

When the operator sh all have so trained his mind as to send

the thought steadily and without interruption and th e diseased ,

person sh all as sume a passive condition of mind in receivin g the

vibrations of such th ought into his brain cell s th e two minds wil l ,

syn chronize and blend th ere will be an agreement of mind s

, .

Th ey wil l sound as one or as Jesu s says in Matthew 1 8th

,

ch apter an d 1 9 th vers e
“
Again I say unto you Th at if t wo of
, ,

you shall agree on earth as touchi ng anything th at they sh all

ask it sh all be done for th em of my Fath er which is in h eav en
"
, .

No matter how person s may d iffer concerning th eir con

ceptions of the p erson of Jesu s Ch ri st or His rel ationship to th e
 C HA PT ER XX

CONSCIO USNESS
In everything worthy of the name of science there are cer
tain terms that mu st be clearly compreh ended and correct ly u n
derstood before th ere can be any safe progress in an u nders tand
ing of the science .

It is perhaps unfortunate that the terms we are forced to

u s e in formulating a new sci ence h ave attach ed to them m ean
ings or shades of meaning th at a broader knowledge and a fin e r
analysis discover to be mi sleading .

Such is th e case with the meani ng or the shades of mea ning

“ ” “
g iven to te rm s consciou snes s and cons cience .

According to the accepted meaning given th ese two term s ,

they are entirely different whil e th e fact is that th ey are so far

, ,

as man is concerned one and th e sam e thi ng inseparable th e

, , ,

same thin g loo kin g at different th in gs .

Consciou sness has been defined to be The mind s kno w ,

’

”
ledge of its own acts and state s .

Cons cience has been defined to be T he faculty of the mind

,

which impel s u s to do th e rig ht and to avoid doing the wrong .

It would th us appear t hat they are different thi ngs In th e .

theo ry of Moni sm th is leads to some confusion of thought .

In their etymology con sciou sness and cons cience are derived
from th e same source and therefore etyrnologically mean the
,

same thi ng. Both mean j oint knowledge or knowledge in rela

tion to something else .

The safe way is to consider both consciousness and con

science as immediate knowled ge without definin g either as a
facu lty of mind Each is myself
. .

In consciou sness I know the forms of Being ; in consci ence I

Consciousness m ay or may not ch ange my knowledge of th e

forms of Being .

Conscience never ch anges A s I know myself in conscience

. ,

so am I . We can and we do in some deg ree attribute conscious

, ,

ness to Nature ; but we never attribute conscience to her The .

bru te has consciousness but not conscience

,
.
 THE HEALING HAND 17 1

Co nsci ence is the candle of th e Lord Addison wrote .

better perh aps than he knew wh en he said A good conscience

, , , ,
”
is to the soul wh at h ealth is to the body .

It is ou r standing in con science not in consciou sness th at , ,

determines ou r h ealth If we stand perfect in cons cience we

.
,

stand pe rfect in health .

In consciou sness I know the form s of being and realize my

s eparatene ss from t hem .

In conscience I know Being and realize my oneness with it .

Con science has been limi ted in popu lar conception to an

apprehension of th e moral law and ou r relation to it .

From this limitation it would follow that if th ere were no

other beings than myself in th e universe con science would dis ,

appear becau se th e moral code would h ave di sappeared

, .

In this broader conception of conscience it would still con

tinu s for although alone in th e universe my relation to Being
, ,

woul d stil l continue .

Conscience h as been limited too much to wrongs of com

mi ssion and too little to wrongs of omi ssion ; too much to acts
, ,

and too little to states of soul .

A m an may meas u re up to every social obligation be th e ,

bes t of h u sband s fathers neigh bors friend s and citizens and

, , , ,

yet have conscience but partly developed .

Indeed h e might be all thes e and be a devout religionist in

,

the common acceptation of that term and still one thing be lack ,

ing That one thing be ing hi s reco gnizing and realiz ing his one
.

ness with Being .

Thus it will be seen that th e metaph ysi cs of Modern think

ing g ives to conscience a bro ader and deeper meaning than it has
had before .

Wh en therefore we u se the term consciou sness we desire

to be understood as includin g in th e meanin g of that term what
has here been explained as conscience .

When we have grasped th is thought clearly we will see

things from a different view point -
.

Then instead of looking upon th e uni verse as a something

,

separate and di stinct from self it will appear that in the deep e st ,

sense we are one with i t becau se of ou r oneness with Being

,
.
17 2 T HE HEALING HAN D

Wh en we out and look u pon this world of earth and sky

go
and air there wil l come a th rill of satis fact ion in the recogn ition
,

of the fact that we are a part of thi s vast and abounding store of
life that we know lies all around u s .

When we walk the str eets and stro ll afield we feel that we
are a part of all that entrances u s .

We feel all we have to do is to draw from the vast supply of

life which everywhere su rround s u s all of it th at we need or de

Wh en this tho ught fix ed in the soul we soar with the

is ,

eagle as with tireless pinions he cleaves the air ; we sport with

the fish es in the pool ; we breath wi th the rose we sway wi th
the lily ; we sing ou r matin song with the lark ; and ou r v esp er
sorm with the nightingale ; wherever B eing mani fests itself there

are we part thereof .

If Being the Intelligence th e Power and the Principle of all

, ,

that is have in u s free course and play this harp of a thousand

—
, ,

strings o u r phy sical body— upon which the soul plays will be ,

kept in perfect tune ; this tenement of clay in which it dwells

will be kept in perfect repair .

I have said th at in cons ciou sness I know the forms of B eing

and recognize my separate ness from them .

In conscience I kn ow Being and recognize my oneness wi th it .

Wh en I stand in conscious ness alone I stand in selfish ness

—and oh how weak and pitifu l I am " When however I stand
,

—
, , ,

in conscience I stand in selfh ood and oh how strong " Wh en

, ,

cons cience in u s be developed as consciou sn ess now is, we will

stand in the fulln ess of humanity .

Wh en conscience shall be perfected in u s we shall then ,

stand in the fu llness of Divinity .

I n this process of perfecting there appears to be an u nfoldi ng

of Being .

In vegetable life there is neither consciou sness nor con

In animal life there is consciou sness bu t not conscience . .

In man as considered as separate from oth er anim al life

, ,

there is both consciousness and conscience .

Thi s appears to be the way of all Life to reprodu ce itself .

 CHAPTER XXI

THE KINGDOM
Whenever life mani fests itself , there we see principle nu
foldi ng intelli gence directing power forcing
, , .

We see everythin g that has life un folding under the di re c

tion of law; from th e lowest forms of life to the hig hest we se e ,

principle unfolding ; and that principle un fold s as I have said , ,

by power and intelligence wh ich power and intelligence are t o

,

gether known as law .

The intelli gence and power that evolves in particu lar m ani
festations of p rinciple is the law of being of that particu lar thi ng .

In th e tree or th e shrub th ere is the principle of the tree or

th e shrub and th at principle is evolved by the law of being o f
,

the tree or th e shru b .

In all form of animal life we see principle evolving under th e

direction of intelli gence and power .

Each form in which life manifests itself evolves its prin

ciple according to its own law of be ing .

From the worm that crawl s at ou r fee t to the eag le that

so ars o er ou r head s each one comes into exis tence and goes ou t
’
,

of ex istence according to th e law of its being .

Being is in the rose but only according to the natu r e with

,

wh ich th e ro se has been endowed Being is in the tree of th e

.

forest but only according to the nature with wh ich the tree h as
,

been endowed .

Being is in the beast of the field but only according to th e ,

nature with which it has been endowed .

Being is in m an but according to the nature with whi ch m an

,

has been endow ed that is th e image and lik enes s of God

, , .

Now this law of being that is manifested in everyth ing that

,

has life is the sam e power th at created all thin gs and that k eeps
all thing s ; created them according to th e n ature with wh ich th e y

were endowed and keep s th em according to the law of their

,

being .

It is with man th at we are mo st concerned There is in ev ery .

organi sm in whi ch li fe manife st s itself a law of being and th at ,

law of bein g is sufficient to keep that organism in harmoniou s

 THE HEALING HAN D 17 5

r elationship in al l its parts and it is only when that law of being

,

is transgres sed that it ceases to perform its proper fu nction s .

This power that keeps every organi sm in harmoniou s re

lationship in all its parts v iewed from th e standpoint of the
,

scientist is called the law of Nature ; v iewed from th e standpoint

,

of the religi oni st it is called God

, .

Jesus very lovingly and reverently called th is same power

”
my Fath er which is in h eaven Speaki ng of Hims elf He said
.
,

I of myself can do noth in g ; the Father that dwelleth in me He ,

”
doeth the work .

Thi s power viewed simply as power is called the kingdom ;

, ,

th e kingdom of the Hi gh ; the king dom of heaven ; th e kingdom

“
of God ; and Jesu s again says : The king dom of God is within
”
you .

T h at is the law of bein g whi ch keeps every part of th e

,

physical organism in h armoniou s relationsh ip is inside of th e

physical organism .

This law operates under the direction of mind ; and if m an

will only trust th e law of his being his Father in h eaven h e wi ll , ,

be kept in perfect rel ations h ip as to ph ysical organi sm .

“
Thou wilt keep him in perfect peace who se mind is staid
”
on Thee becau se h e tru steth in Thee
, .

It is becau se m an has not tru sted thi s law th at h e has tran s

g r e as ed it and h
, avin g p ass ed out side of it it no lon ger wo rk s in ,

hi s ph ys ical organi sm to perfection ; and wh en we come to t e

member the relationship th at exi sts between th e con scious m ind ,

in whi ch he forms his beliefs and the unconsciou s mind through

, ,

which the law of bein g acts and which takes th e thoughts of th e

,

cons ciou s mind as real we can then see how th i s law of being is
,

set aside is thwarted in th e accompli shment of its pu rpo se

,
.

If m an had never in dul ged in the thought of sickness or dis

eas e he woul d never had sickness or dis ease
, .

True h e might h ave received inj ury or h urt through exter

,

nal mean s but had h e onl y tru sted th e law of h is being h ealing
, ,

would h ave res ulted according to th e law of his being ; but the
moment h e doubts or denie s th e exi stence of thi s law that doubt ,

or denial brin gs about the non e xi stence of thi s law; for as we

-
,

have seen, the uncon scious mind is controlled by the law of su g

17 6 THE HEALING HAND

The th oughts of the consciou s mind are to it real it i es ; and

if the thought is presented to the unconscious mind that th e law
of being does not exist it perforce ceases to exist and m a n is
,

dead in trespass es and sins which trespass es and sins are th e

,

res ult of unbelief .

When John the Baptist stood on the bank of the Jord an as ,

“
Jesus came to him to be baptized Jo hn said : Behold th e Lam b
,

of God that taketh away the sin of the world .

Notice th at it is th e sin of th e world not the sins of th e ,

world ; and when Jesu s began preaching His go spel He t old u s

that th e sin of the world was unbelief ; but unbelief in wh at
I f you will go to th e round s of the th ings that h av e b e en
stated to be unbelief you w ill see that each inv olves an absu rdit y
, .

Unbel ief was in the world before He came ; consequ en tly it

could not h ave been unbelief in Him .

It could not h ave been unbelief in His death or suffering ,

becau s e He had not died or suffered .

It could not have been unbelief in His resu rrect ion becau se ,

He h ad not been resurrected .

It was unbelief in man s own spiri tual being th at he was

’
,

and is part and p arcel of th e Divine a part of th e Et ernal Life

, ,
“
and Jesu s Him self says I came th at ye mi ght h ave life and ,

have it more abundantly .

He came to preach the go sp el of th e kingdom and that king ,

dom is the reign or ru le of God as well in th e ph ysical man as in

the spiritual m an .

He sent His di sciple s out to p reach the go spel of the king

dom and we find that this kingdom always meant the re ign or
,

rule of th e Heavenl y Father in th e live s of men as well in the ,

body as in the soul .

When therefore m an will tu rn away from the thi ngs upon

, ,

which he has been leanin g and lean upon th at sure staff the
, ,

kin gdom of heaven wh ich he h as with in him the law of his

, ,

bei ng the Infinite the heavenly Father manife st in his ph ysi

, , ,

cal organi sm .

He will then h ave laid hold on the only true power the onl y ,

If he can grasp th e thought that he has within him a spiri t

u al principal separate from th e Fath er but on e with it th en he, ,
 AGREEMENT
It is strange that in enunci ating the doctri ne of agre em ent
“
as contai ned in M att . Jesus should u se the world s y m
” “ ”
ph o neo f
,rom whi c h is deriv ed th e Eng li sh wo rd sym phon y ,

and whi ch literally me n s to sound as one

a .

Stranger still is the fact that after more than ei ghtee n cen
tu ries when phy sical science has reach ed h er proud pos iti o n in
,

th e realm of accurate knowled ge th at th e very word Jesu s u s ed

,

in stating the doctrine is the word th at best expres ses the doc

Take a ro w of tuning forks mad e to sound differen t n otes .

Take another fork strike it and thus set it in vibration ;

,

you will hear it giving forth its note Soon you wil l h ear so m e
.

one of the forks in th e row respond to th e same v ibrations and

give forth the same note .

The fork in yo ur hand has found its mate ; the two are

So two minds can be so s ynchronized that they will agree ,

or sound as one .

When two minds agree or sound as one in thou ght the de ,

sire or thou ght upon which th ey th u s agree sh all be done for

th em by the Father which is in H eaven .

You see therefore that agreement betwee n two min ds is

, ,

entire harmony of mental action j u st as two sound s in music

,

blend togeth er as one ; there are two sounds yet only one soun d
, .

Perfect agreement between two or more mind s mean s con

centration of all concerned upon ONE pu rpo se .

Where two or more persons combine upon a single purpos e ,

the will s of all blending as one the result is agreement

, .

Agreem ent 1s complian ce with law it 13 the first principle of

,

m an s attitude toward th e law conside red aside from anything

’

el se or from any other purpose than that upon which they ag ree .

Agreement still more abstractly con sidered is the Law It .

is utterly impo ssible to comply with any kn own or u nkn own law
 T HE HEALIN G HAND 17 9

T he man who dissolve s one chem i cal by placing it in contact

with another, if hi s ex perim ent is succes sful , has compli ed with
the chemical law; in th at case, agreem ent is the law .

When the electrician produces a mach ine wh ich vibrates

with th e same rate of motion in which electricity exi sts in dif
.

fu s ion , he brin gs out of space an electri cal force for his u se, or
t into action an electrical law; in that case agreement is
star s ,

compliance with l aw .

Aft er the el ectrical current has been transmitt ed through

the wire for the purpo se of conducting it through the streets of
the city and fastened to th e arc or incandescent light in the re si
den ce it represents in a material way the existence of Law in a
,

spiritual sen se .

The light that can be produced at th e end of this wir e can

onl y be brou ght into exi stence or view by complying with the
, ,

kn own exi sting law; turning the button th at turn s on the light
complies with th e law .

It makes no difference wh o turn s thi s button whether it be ,

one totally ignorant of the exi sting law or whether it be th e

electrical inventor who constru cted the machine .

T he ligh t will spring into exi stence only when the terms by
which it becomes a light h ave been complied with regardless of ,

man s knowledge of th e ex i stence of th is law or his knowled ge of

’

how it operates or wh at the res ult of th e operation will be .

I do not want the reader to lose sigh t for one moment of

the importance of this term AGREEMENT ,
.

T he Law of Bein g the ,C re a tive Fo rc e of the u nive rs e t h

, e
F ath er in heaven God is Law and th ere is no way known to
, , ,

man by whi ch thi s L aw will ac t fo r m an ex cept th rou g h a g ree

ment .

Th erefore the knowledge of thi s Law and how to comply

wi th it constitute s the knowledge of how to secure an agreement .

e
T he r su lt of agr eein g with th e l aw of ele ct ri city by tu r nin g
the button is li ght ; and th e result of agreement between two
hu man wills does not depend upon su ch action for one thing
al one but
, for a nyt i
h g
n th at m an m a y a s k fo r out of th e, s to r e
hou se of blessings which is the ri gh tful inh eritance of all men .

T he result of agreement between two h u m n mind depend a s s

sol el y u pon what pu rpo se there is in fo min g ther a g e

r e m en t .
1 80 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

I n the of the electrical wire there is bu t one p oss ib le

case
resu lt ; in th e cas e of following the id ea of agreement b etween
two minds there is any result th e hu man mi nd can ask for in th e
way of healing .

A statement of this pu r pose of agreement is what we m ean

by SUGGESTIO N .

Briefly stated, a suggestion is a statem ent of the thing up on

which we agree .

The resul t of a perfect agreement between two human m ind s

is the accompli shment of any pu rpose upon which th ese m inds
are agreed or the pu rpo se for wh i ch they agree
, .

All of the blessings of life are the result of agreem ent eith er ,

by will ing obedience to the law acting as one person or b y , ,

willing complian ce with law several persons acting as one

, .

All the evil s and ill s and shortcomings of life are th e resu l t
of dis agreement .

An y failure on the par t of man to comply wi th th e law ,

either singly or collect ively is di sagreement , .

A ll discord or inharmony is evidence of the absence of har

mony or agreement and is the direct result of disagreement
, .

Jesu s is the recognized author of the doctrine of AGR EE

Those who agreed with His teachings were the ones who
received the blessin gs ; thos e w h o failed to agree did not receiv e
“
the ble ssings . In Matt we find the statem ent And He
.
,

did not many mighty works there because of their u nbeli ef , .

They did not agree with His teaching s hence they did n ot ,

receive the blessin gs .

T h e affli cted whom He healed in every instance formed an

agreement acted on His suggestion and were cured
, , .

The idea of agreem ent is the one central doctrine of Jes u s

Christ around whi ch all oth er doctrines clu ster in subordination ;
it is the foundation stone upon which the whole science of heal
ing is bu il t ; it is the beginning and the end of the whol e system .

Without an understanding of agreement we wou ld u tterl y ,

fail to comprehend how or even to attempt to compl y with th e

, ,

In all of His teaching and h ealin g He clearly , emph asi zed

the propo sition of agreem ent .

1 82 THE HEALIN G HAND

Th ere is the home of my boyhood th ere I

T o illu strate : ,

di sported myself as carel ess as the butterfl y there I pla yed with
,

my brothers and sisters Arou nd it clus ter the hall owe d associ
.

ations and th e holy memories of father and moth er .

T h e rooftree stands the h earth stone remains but th e fam

, ,

ily is scattered T he old homes tead falls to me and stern n eces

.

sity m ay compel me to part with it I ts commercial value m ay

.

be two thou sand dollars I obtain an offer for it I sell it and it

.
, ,

passes into the hands of a stranger Th is is a contract

. .

The conscious mind has consented to part with it ; th e h eart ,

the inn er man still refuses to let it go ; th ere is no agreem en t

, .

In th e perfect agreement two minds sou nd as one alo ng the

,

whole gamut of being ; both the outer and the inner m an t e

spond one with the other .

T he first condition preparatory to agreement is th e doct rin e

“
of forgiven ess . A new commandment give I unto you th at ye ,

love one anoth er .

The di scussion of this doctrine will be reserved for anoth er

 C HAPT ER XXI II
FORGI VE NESS
T he fi rst condition necessary to form a perfect agreement as
ta u ght by Jesus in Matt is found in the doctrine of for
.

i
g v ess
en In Matt
.
-24 we find th ese words as a basis of
.

th e doctri ne of forgivenes s .

“
T herefore if thou bring thy gift to the altar, and th ere re
m em berest th at thy broth er has aught agains t thee ; leave there
th y gift before the altar, and go th y way ; first be reco nciled to
thy brother, and th en come and offer thy gif .

Let u s first inquire what is this gift that we bring to th e

altar ; a grave and seriou s mi stak e has been made m determining

I s it the catt le on a thousand h ill s " No , for th ey are His

already .

I s it the gold and silver of the mines No ; for H e placed

the go ld and the silver there long before man appeared .

I s it the gem s and the corals of th e ocean " No ; for thes e

are the w orks of His ow n h ands .

I s it the garland s of flowers No ; for it was His own hand

that gave th e rose its blended beauty and the lily its loveliness

What th enis thi s gift Let u s first determine of wh at the

essence of a gift consists .

At the C hri stm as tide, in Chri stian land s, friends remem

ber one another by gifts .

A t C hristmas time a friend come s to you who has at h er

command a bank accou nt and l ays in your h and a diamond ring

costing hundreds of dollars It has, in real ity , co st her noth in g

. .

B ut here is a poor girl who loves you with the h eart s true
’

devotion , and, snatching a few hou rs from her dail y toil after
nightfall and by the midnight lamp , sh e works a piece of needl e
w k
or Ch i m tide with humble mien and perhaps sor
and at r st as-
,

row ing that her gift is not more precious brings it and places it
,

in your hand .

Which of thes e two is the true gift " The piece of needle
work Wh y Because it is a part of the giver
. .

T he val ue of the gift therefore consists in th at it is a part

, ,
1 84 T HE HEALING HAND

This is the secret of the widows mite ; she cast in all h er '

living Emerson says the es sence o f a gift consi sts in th at it is

.

a part of the giver .

T h erefore let the farmer bring hi s co rn ; th e miner hi s g em s ;

the painter his painting ; th e sculptor hi s statu e ; th e sail o r his
coral and sh ell s of ocean .

T his will enable u s to see what the gift is that we br in g to

the altar .

Since it can be no outward th ing as all of these o u t ward ,

thi ngs are the Father s already it can onl y be some in ward
’
,

th ing He tell s u s what th at inward thin g is wh en H e s ay s

.
,
“ ”
Son daughter give me th ine heart
, , .

It is ou r h eart that is the gift to be laid upon the altar and ,

th at gift in order to be l aid upon th e altar must be att u ned to

, ,

th e Heavenly Father s thou ght is to become one with H im

’
.
,

He asks u s to go and bring ou r though ts into h armony wi th

His thou gh ts and let th e Fath er s will whi ch is wi ser and th e
’
, , ,

Father s ways wh ich are better h ave undivided sway in ou r

’
, ,

mind s and th ey will operate upon the physical organis m and

, ,

h ealth to body and h appines s to m ind mu st ens ue .

B u t th i s gift cann ot be l aid upon the al tar wh ile m an ia

du lges a thou gh t of envy malice h atred reveng e or any selfish , , ,

th ought concerning his broth er .

“
Th erefore if thou bring thy gift to the altar and th ere re ,

m emberest th at th y broth er h ath aught again st th ee ; leave there

thy gift before th e altar and go thy way ; first be recon cil ed to
,

th y brother and th en come and offer thy gift

, .

Notice in this connection th at Jesu s does not say you mu st

reconcile you r broth er to you ; He says you mu st reconcil e yo u r
“
self to you r bro ther You say This is impossible ; my bro ther
.
,

m ay be far away so that I may not be able to recon cile mys elf
,
”
to h im or h imself to me .

The only inj unction l aid upon you is th at you reconcil e your
self to you r broth er .

The respons ibility of his own reconciliation re sts upon him .

T h e Fath er does not h old you responsible for the act of another ,

but He does h old you responsible for your own reconciliation .

1 86 T HE H EALI NG HA ND

There was no change in the outer world , the chang e was in

“ ”
the inner world ; you say you had the blues .

Why then this change Simply becaus e unknown to you r

s elf u nconsciou sly to yo u rself you h ad opened yo ur mind to th e
, ,

reception of th o se thought vibrations t hat flo at all aro u n d u s

that come from myriads of min ds .

You cannot Open your m ind to let out wrong thou ghts unl ess
th ere is a way open for all the wrong thought activity that flo ats
in thi s world around about u s to enter into your own mind
, .

The mind cannot be opened to let ou t thoughts of worry ,

care anxiety perplexi ty without openi ng up th e door of t h e

, ,

m ind through wh ich all such thoughts floating in the world ab ou t

u s may find entran ce .

If we would protect ourselves from all such thou gh ts we ,

must be sure to keep the mind closed agains t them by letting no

s uch tho u ght go out .

When the mind shall thus be kept closed and only regen erat
ing thoughts sent out such as kindness brotherly love ch arity
, , , ,

meekness etc all the th oughts of kin dn ess brotherly lov e

, .
, ,

charity and gentleness th at are fl oatin g in the universe aro u n d

u s m ay find an entering pl ace and come in and be registere d

-

“
upon ou r ph ysical organism Behold I stand at the door and
.
, ,

knock ; if any man h ear my vo i ce and open th e door I will com e ,

”
in to him and will su p with him and h e with me
, , .

This can only be done by conscious activity of the m in d

through the exerci se of the will ; and thi s habit of mi nd can onl y
be formed by exerci se and cu ltivation by withdrawing from the ,

thing s of sense and meditating upon the thi ngs of the spirit .

Isaac went out at eventide to meditate at the door of his

tent ; Mo ses went into the wilderness for forty years ; Elij ah the
Tishbite retired into solitude ; John the Bapti st came from the
wilderness of Judah where he had retired th at he might remain
,

undisturbed by the things of the sens es and think God s thou gh ts ’

’
and meditate upon God s ways .

Thi s process of developing the thi ngs of the spirit and re ,

du cing to a minimum the th ings of th e sen ses is known as con ,

centration and its di scu ss ion will be reserved for anoth er

,
 CONCENT RAT ION
By thi s time the reader wil l have discovered th at the great
central and cardinal doctrine in thi s teachin g is the doctri ne of
agreement as taught by Jesus in M att
, .

Y ou have also seen that the necessary condition of agree

ment was found in the doctrine of forgiveness which was the ,

s ubj ect matter of ou r las t ch apter .

You saw th at forgiveness in its essence con sisted in dis

mi ssing from th e mind any harsh or evil thought and entertain
ing for all the world th e same thoughts and blessings the same ,

freedom and happin es s that you entertain for yoursel f .

This you see, can only be done by di smissing from th e mind

,

and forbiddin g entrance thereto of though t s pertaining to the

self the lower self, th e self consisting of mind in cons ciousn e ss

, ,

and not the self of con science Th is cannot be done instantly

. .

A s h abits are slow in forming so are they slow in dis solving

, ,

and mo st people who have arrived at the years of mat u rity have
either con sciously or unconsciou sly to themselves devel oped the
,

Selfishn ess is found in consciou sness, whi ch kn ows the forms

of Being only and realizes its sep arateness from th em ; it is the
,

Selfhood or th e higher self has its roots in conscience

, , ,

which knows Being and realizes its oneness with B eing .

So multifarious are the forms in which Being presents itsel f

th at the mind is continu ally distracted by th inking upon th es e
vari ou s forms .

I n the ex ternal world mountain and pl ain hill and dale lake
, , ,

and stream flower and fore st tree th e vast array of animal life
, , ,

are lik e a panorama con stantly p as sing before th e soul and con
stantly remi ndin g man of his separatenes s from them .

Thoughts of self cannot help but dominate while the mind

its elf is thu s dominated .

On the other h and if the thoughts th at come to u s through

,

consciou sness be di sm i ss ed from the mind and the m ind is direct

ed to think upon conscience or its oneness with Being, th ere can
be no distraction h ere for one thought occu pies the mind ; sel f
,
1 88 T HE HEALING HA ND

is dismissed ( the lower sel f) and the higher self sits regnan t
upon its hereditary th rone .

Becau se of mental h abit thi s change o f mental att itu de

,

cannot occur all at once .

T he mind must be trained by a process of wi thdrawing from

sensation and living in the realm of intu i tion .

Thi s process in that it directs the mind to the considerati on

,

of one thou ght onl y is called concentration

, .

C oncentration th en is that power of the mind by whi ch it

, ,

is enabled to direct the th ou gh t of the mi nd to any one thing to

the ex clusion of every oth er thing and is a mental proces s whi ch
,

appears to be necessary to forgiveness .

M an fully forgive the world whil e the though t of his

cann ot

s eparatenes s from it dominates his soul ; but wh en the th ou gh t

of his oneness with it whi ch follows his realization of his onen ess
with the Creator of it comes into hi s soul he can th en forg ive
,

the world becau se in forgiving the world he is forgiv ing hi ms el f

, .

He is then bound to the world by the bands of lov e for ,

”
Like myself like my self is th e language of love
, .

There is perhaps no word more frequently u pon the lips of

those who are interested in the study of the occult than thi s
word concentration ; yet how few grasp its fu ll meanin g
“ ”
.

It is the idea of some th at concentration alone consists in

fix ing the mind upon some material thing upon some of th e ,

forms in which Being manifests itself ; bu t th is is withdrawin g

from sensation only in part ; it is still standing in consciou sness
or th e lower self .

Concentration means not onl y the con sideration of one su b

j cet but it go es to th e nature of th at subj ect as well
, .

The onl y thou ght the mind must entertain in concentration

—
,

is the thought of th e soul s onene ss with Being God and the

’
,

striving to realize th at in th e process of h is m editation .

Wh en this has been realized then the inh erent powers of

,

the mind are brou gh t into pl ay ; then it is th at the m an discovers

the source of his power and th at thi s power lies latent in h im
,

sel f and may be developed in himself in any degree he m ay de

,

sire and diligentl y stri ve for .

190 T HE HEALIN G HAN D

F he that cometh to God mu st beli eve th at He is and

or ,

th at He is a rewarder of them th at diligently seek Him .

I have said that truth is rath er of the heart th an of the

h ead ; as mu ch of the em otions as of reason ; th erefore is it that
in concentration you must forbear to u se the reas oning powers
and let the mind alon e to meditate upon that whi ch it des ires .

Wh en we shall have for a time trained ourselves to with

draw from the forms in which bein g manife sts itself an d h ave
allowed the inner man to h ave its o wn way to meditate u pon
,

its elf and its onenes s with Being we will see th at ou r desir e to
,

rea lize ou r onene ss with Being w il l grow strong er and strong er .

It is eas y to meditate upon that wh ich we des ire .

In developing the conscious m ind h ow easy it is to center

,

ou r tho u gh t s upon a person one that we love "

,

C los e th e eyes and call up the mental image of th e one you

love best on earth ; h ow easy it is to think upon a loved one "
How few dis tracted th oughts enter th e mind how steadil y
,

th e attention can be centered upon the obj ect o f your lo ve "

So wh en we begin the process of concentration for the pu r
,

po se of realizing in our selves ou r oneness wi th B eing th e desire

,

for such realization will grow upon u s from day to day .

Soon that idea will take the place of the loved one ar ou nd
which all ou r thoughts center ; and as ou r attention is riveted
upon that one thing all oth er th in gs will dis appear
, .

T he cons ciou s mind with its reas onin g powers will for th e
time being be in abeyance and the inn ate powers will be de
,

v eloped until m an will be su rpri sed at the power s he now knows

lie latent wi th in h im .

We mu st not make th e mi stake of thi nking th at this is the

process by wh ich the Buddhist seeks and obtains th e state of
Nirvan a .

Buddhism is the extin gu i sh ing of all desire.

The difference between th e teach ings of Buddh a and th e

teaching s of Jesus nowh ere stand out in more marked contras t
one with the other th an in their re spective teachi ng s concerni ng

desire .

The B uddhist by concentration would ex tin gu is h all des ire ;

Jesu s on th e oth er hand would enthrone the highest and noblest
, ,
 THE HEALIN G HAND 191

desire a desire to realize in s elf a onenes s with the Father

, .

“ ”
Jesus said I and my Father are one
, .

He was in th at condition of consciou sne ss where there was

no separateness between Him and th e Fath er He was the Son .

of God with power ; so when He comes to th em th at believe on

Hi m ( i e his teach ings) He gives to them power to become
, . .
, ,

sons of God .

Every sou l will become a son of God wh en having enthroned ,

th e hi ghest des ire it meditate s and concentrate s upon th at de

,

si re u ntil it realiz es in it self it s onene ss wi th the Divine Father .

The proces s by which th is realization is arrived at is called

in metaphysics concentration .

Concentration th en has chief rel ation ship to the soul that

, ,

practices th e process but th ere is another rel ationsh ip the rel a

, ,

tionship of the soul to the obj ect with which it would reali ze its

Look ed at from th is r elation ship th at desire is known

, as

Concentration then is more nearly allied to ab straction

, , ,

withdrawin g from the things of sense and the sinking of all con
"

sciou s ness of th e self ; thi s is Buddhism .

The difference as I h ave said between Buddh a s cardinal

, ,
’

thou ght and th e cardinal thou ght of Jesu s was th at one h eld out
the ex tinction of all desire wh ile the other enthroned th e highest
,

and nobl est desire .

The process by which th e soul seek s to identify itsel f with

the obj ect of its noblest desire is prayer and th e consideration ,

of thi s will be reserved for the n ext chapter .

 C HAPTER XXV

The reader has alr eady seen th at the card inal doctrin e of
this teaching is the doctrine of agreem en t .

Th ere are three things th at are inseparably connected with

a pe rfect agreement .

Th ese three th ings are : forgiveness abstraction or coneen ,

tration and desire or prayer

, .

Abstraction is the attitude of th e mind viewed as withdra w

ing from th e th ings of sen sation .

Concentration is the same attitude of m ind viewed as co n

tem plating one thing .

Desire or prayer is the same attitude of mind v iewed as to

its rel ation ship to the subj ect of contemplation .

In Mark 2 6 you will find the condition s necess ar y to

-

“
effective prayer : Therefore I say unto yo u Wh at th ings soev er ,

ye desire when ye pray believe that ye receive th em and ye

, , ,

shall h ave them .

And when ye stand prayin g forgive if ye h ave au gh t agains t

, ,

an y ; th at your Fath er al so wh ich is in h eaven m ay forgiv e you

your tresp as ses .

But if ye do not forgive neith er wil l your Father wh ich is

,

in heaven forgive your trespasse s .

It is easy to be seen that Jesu s here makes forgiveness a

nece ssary precedent to prayer .

It will al so be seen that He identifies desire with prayer .

It is al so plain th at He identifies faith with prayer .

It will be well for u s to remember th e general state of m ind

that should underlie every prayer .

Jes u s Hi m self when He prayed gave u s an illustration of

, ,

thi s nece ssary condition .

He expres sed it in the se word s ; after hav ing expressed H is

des ire He said Neverth ele ss not my will but th in e be don e
,
“
, , , .

Thi s is a condition p ecede t to eve y p ye

r n r r a r— the will of
the Fath er instead of th e will of the supplicant .

We h ave been taught to pray for all th ing s spiritual bles s ,

ings but ou r Fath er h as never promised u s anywh ere that ou r

,

specific desir e s as to tem po ral ble ssing s should alway s be fu l

194 THE HEALIN G HAND

fends to know that his omni scient mind guides to know that
, ,

His great arm s of love are continually folding u s to His own

breast 7
Leave all oth er things for the Father s wisdom and the ’

Father s will and wh en we approach ou r Father in thi s att itude

’
,

of prayer one desi re in th e h eart one request upon the lip that
, , ,

of oneness with Him how do all other thing s pale into ins ig nifi
,

cance and di sappear "

What care I for the wealth of India when the rich es of th e

Father are mine "
Wh at care I for the wis dom of the world wh en th e F ath er s ’

wi sdom guides me I
‘

What car e I for fame or the appl au se of men when I realiz e

I am a child of a kin g "
Wh en I have realiz ed this oneness I am in harmony with ,

th e divine law .

The law wh ich brought me into being which keeps m e in ,

being is al so the law th at keeps thi s h arp of a thousand strings

, ,

the physical organi sm in which I dwell in perfect h armony in ,

all of its part s .

If I am one with th e Fath er I am one with the Law and in

, ,

coming into onene ss with Him I come from di scord into h armony
, ,

from ch aos in to cosmo s from disease into eas e from s ickn ess
, ,

into health .

Prayer so far as its temporal bles sings are concerned is a

, ,

condition of tru st .

“
Jesus says Seek ye first th e kingdom of God and His
, ,

ri ghteou sne ss ; and all th e se th ing s sh al l be added unto you .

He who wo uld remember thi s and remember th at as a con

dition of every prayer mu st be th e Fath er s will not mine will
’
, ,

see th at he mu st tru st th e Father for tempo ral blessings .

We do not tru st Him for spiritual blessings for He has ab so ,

lu tely promi sed th eir b estowance ; but He has never promi sed to
bestow indiscrim in ately at ou r desire any or every temmrs l
blessing .

In teaching the great lesson of trust Jesu s spoke in Matt , .

“
6 : 27 3 3 :
- Wh ich of you -by taking thought can add one cub it
unto his stature
 T HE HEA LIN G HAND 195

And why tak e ye though t for raiment " Consider the lilies
of the field how they grow ; th ey toil not neith er do they sp in
, , .

And yet I say unto you That even Solomon in all his glory
,
“

was not arrayed like one of th ese .

Wh erefore if Go d so clothe th e grass of the field whi ch to

, ,

day is and tomorrow is cast into the oven shall he not much
, ,
“
more cloth e you O ye of little faith 2
,

Th erefore take no th ought saying What shall we eat or

, , ,

Wh at shall we drink or Wh erewithal sh all we be clothed

,

( F or after all th e se things do th e Gentiles seek ) : for your

heavenly Father kn oweth that ye h ave need of all th ese th ings .

But seek ye first th e kingdom of Go d and h is righteousnes s ; ,

and all th e se thing s shall be added unto yo u .

Th i s shows conclu sively that so far as temporal bless ings ,

ar e conce rned ou r condition in re sp ect to th em should be a con

,

dition of absolute unqualified tru st

, .

But so far as the bestowal of spiritual blessings are con

ce rned we h ave th e promi se of th es e
, .

What He means wh en He says Whatsoever things ye ask

“
,
”
in faith believing th ey are yours already that is the realiza
.
,

tion of oneness with the Father come s in the act of faith which
asks it .

In the foregoing I have spoken most of prayer as desire

unexp ressed becau se th i s is one ph ase of prayer th at is too little
,

understood but it is not meant in any manner to depreciate oral

,

or expressed prayer .

We realize th e efficacy of th e expressed prayer as well as

the u n expres sed but it was only to call attention to th at which
,

is too mu ch o verlooked that the writer h as emph asized the nu

expressed de sire or prayer .

We remember th at Je sus said When thou prayest enter , ,

into thy closet and there pray unto th e Fath er and thy Fath er
, ,
”
which heareth in secret sh all reward th ee openly .

He was not depreciating the expressed prayer of the Phari

see but was calling attention to that ph ase of p rayer
,
u n ex ,

pres sed prayer which at that time as at the present day was
, , ,

too much overlooked .

To conclude th e matter then before th ere can be any prayer

,

there mu st be forgiveness .
19 6 T HE HEALING HAND

How can we hope to me into u n ion with the Fath er s law

co
’

of love wh en ou r hear ts are not attuned to th e same vibration s ,

because of mali ce hatred envy or an y ill feeling toward an y

, , ,

broth er 7
Again before th ere can be any prayer th ere mu st be sin cer e
‘

desire ; but before th ere can be s incere des ire th ere must b e ah
straction from th e thin gs of sen se an d concentrati on upon th e

thing de sired and a l onging to become on e with the obj ect of

desire .

When these conditions are complied with then we hav e th e

,

effectual fervent prayer which availeth much .

Th en are we back in the king dom ; th en doe s th e Father ru le

supreme in ou r th ou gh t s in ou r h ea
, rt s in ou r lives ; th en is ou r
,

citizen sh ip in heaven .

T h e di scu ssion of th is kingdom shall be reserved for ano th e r

ch apter .
1 98 THE HEALING HAND

In the heali ng of dis eases the relations hip between heal er

,

and patien t must be th at of th e positive mind in rel atio nshi p to

the passive mind .

The patient by his coming to the h eal er has made one little
advance in passivity He must be taught this condition and how
.
,

to attain it and h e mus t be assi sted in its attainment by th e

,

healer .

It is only wh en one mind is positive and the other pas s iv e

that a perfect agreement can be formed in regard to any exis tin g
diseas e .

The patient comes to you sufferin g pain That pain had its
—
.

origin in wrong thought activity therefore the remedy is r ig h t

-
,

thought activity ; and h e cannot think th e ri gh t thought if th e

-

pain is there .

He cannot think it is not there .

He is in bondage to that tho ught .

The healer is not so situated ; and he is not experiencin g th a t

pain not suffering from th at di sease He can think a th ou g h t
, .

of ease of pleasure in stead of pain

, , .

Now if the two minds one po sitive and the other passive
, , ,

shall be so s ynch roni zed like two tuni ng fo rk s so th at the sam e

,
-
,

thou ght vibration s that the heal er send s out enter the brain cel ls
-

of the patient and th ere start the same thou ght vibrations th at -

th e h ealer h old s .

This thou g t vibration will be reflect ed upon his physical

h -

organi sm and throu gh the s ym p ath eti c nervou s s ystem u ncon

, ,

sciou sly to th e patient and uncon sciou sly to himself heal ing wi ll
, ,

come becau se two mind s are sounding as one and h ave fo rm ed

,

an agreement .

Just in proportion to th e perfection of that agreement will

be th e cu re ; and times without number h as it been experienced
th at an agreement was so perfectly formed between h ealer and
patient th at th e cure was in stantaneou s .

This agreement cannot always be formed to perfection bu t ,

if the h ealer h as trained his mind to concentrate to hold one ,

thou ght to the exclu sion of every other thought and holds it ,

stead ily and i f the p atient sh all be so instructed th at he may be

,

come p assive an agreement in some de gree will be reach ed and

, ,

a c u re in some deg ree begun or e s tabli shed .

 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

This shows why thou sand s of patients have been cur ed ,

while they were h undreds and sometimes thou sand s of mil es

separated from th eir healer .

Space and time h ave no existence for the sp iritual being ;

th ey are only necessary conditions of ou r conscious being and ,

this is the ph ilo sophy of the so called absent treatment of

-

dis eas es
.

Man by his in genuity has fashioned instrument s so delicate

in their construction that they can send v ibrations out into the
eth er and another in strument of equally delicate construction
,

th ousands of mil es distant can receive the same vibrations and

,

respond to them and this is the ph ilo soph y of wireless tele

,

What more delicate instru ments were ever constructed than

the brain cell s in man I
‘

The positive mind the transmitting instrument and the pas

sive mind the receivin g in stru m ent .

When a patient comes to a h ealer the first thing that the

,

his patient how to ass ume the

passive attitude of mind .

Seat him in a chair ex plain to him that you are not going to
,

hypnotize him tell him to close his eyes and to call up some pleas
,

ing obj ect that is far away and look upon it as a mental picture ,

and while he is th u s engaged let the he aler lay his h and upon
his head ex erci s ing th e intention of placing him in sleep think
, ,

ing th e th ought of sleep and ease and soon h e will see by the
,

breathing of his patient by th e motion of his eyelid s that he is

, ,

in a somewhat different condition from wh at he was before .

He is perfectly consciou s but in gazing upon that mental

image he is withdrawn from sensation in a con siderable degree ,

and the mind is pas sive and in a condition to be receptive and ,

the vibrations th at come from th e mind of th e healer will have

effect upon the brain cell s of the patient .

Then when your patient is in th is condition be gin to give

him the treatment according to his need s .

Not only is the passive condition a benefit to the patient

while he is receiving treatm ent but it is of great benefit to him
,

in order that he may practice relaxation In ou r consciou s activ

.

ity ou r nervous and muscular systems are so tensed th at these

 THE HEALING HAND

gentle vibrations which are the laws of being are hindered from
, ,

sweeping th rou gh ou r bodies and building up th at wh ich is being

to rn down .

Hence it is that we are compelled by the law of ou r n atu re

every twenty fou r hou rs to sink down into slumber wh er e th e
-
,

activitie s of the consciou s mind the nervou s and m u s cu lar sy s

,

tems are relaxed and th ese finer forces the laws of ou r b ein g
, , ,

“
can sweep th rou gh and as S hake speare has said
, , kn it up the ,

ravelled sleeve of care rebu ild and repleni sh the tabernacle in

,

wh ich we live .

If th is is necessary for the ordinary heal thy person how ,

mu ch more is it necessary for one who se tenement h as been in

vaded by di sease and pain .

He need s more of this rel ax ation than comes to him th roug h

th e hours of no rmal s leep .

By the process of entering into the pass ive attitude of min d

the same relaxation that come s du ring the hours of sleep and th e
same upbuildin g t hat re sults from rel axation m ay be h is several ,

time s durin g th e day and thu s his decayed tenement may be

,

more speedily repaired .

Wh ile th e patient must learn the pass ive attitude of mind ,

it is h ighly important that th e h ealer should cultivate to th e ex

tent of h is powers the positive attitude .

A thought formulated in the mind for the definite purpose

of influencing anoth er mind is called an intention and the hold ,

ing of thi s th ought st eadily and unin terru ptedly is of prime im

portance in healing .

A thought formed in the mind for a definite purpo se th at ,

of influencing another mind th ere mu st be in the mind of the

,

h ealer a de sire for the accompli sh ment of th at purpos e I nten .

tion th en min gles with desire .

T he patient desires to be h ealed T he h eal er d esires to

.

heal Here we h ave agreement differing somewh at from th e in

.

tention of the phy si cal sounding as one It is the agreement of

, .

th e spiritu al mind and the phy sical mind .

Intention th en when used in th e sens e of h ealing has a

, , ,

broad scope It is of intens e impo rtance ; more is done by it th an

.

is supposed .
 C HAPTER XXVII
SUGGE STION
There is perhaps no word more frequently on th e lips of
those who are studying mental metaph ysical or any other form
,
“ ”
of psychic healing th an the term suggestion .

T o the Nancy School of Psychic Research is due the cre di t

of discovering and formu lating what is known as the law of su g

The law briefly stated is th is : Wh en th e cons cio u s mind is

in abeyance th e unconscious mind will do whatever you tell it
,

to do believe whatever you say to it

, .

With the enthusiasm that is always engendered by a new

discovery th e Nancy school would turn everythi ng into su g ges
,

tion in order that their di scovery m ight be far reachi ng

,
-
.

Too much credit cann ot be given to th is school for thi s won

derfu l dis covery yet th e student mu st not be led away by th e
,

enth usiasm of the di scoverer .

Suggestion pl ays an important part in psychi c healing bu t ,

that it is the whole of psychic healing as th e Nancy school wou ld ,

have u s believe is far from being true

, .

Again founded upon the hypoth esis th at the mind has tw

, o

distinct entitie s j ust as distinct as two individual s are distinct

, ,

has led to th e extension of the theory of sugges tio n .

Mark that I said an hypothesis for it is only an hypothes is ,

and has not been proved and in th e opinion of the writer cann ot
be proved as he holds that th e mind is one with two se ts of
, ,

facu lti es .

Sugge stion th en for convenience of con sideration has bee n

, ,

div ided into auto h etero direct and indirect suggestion .

Auto su gge stion mean s self suggestion and th ere is no oh

- -
,

—
j ection to th e term if We remember ju st w at it means that it
h
is a th ou ght of belief of the mind fixed determined and has its , , ,

origin in the mind itself .

Hetero suggestion has its o rigin with someth in g outs ide of

-

D irect sugge stion is a sugge stion di rectly given from one

mind to anoth er ; wh ile th e indirect suggestion is an inference of
th e mind from some fact or facts outside of itself .
 T HE HEALING HAND 203

These dis tin ctions are more ingenuous th an u seful .

Suggestion in its broadest as pect comes from the law of th e

associ ation of ideas .

No tho ugh t exists alone .

No idea ex i sts alone .

All are rel ated in some way or oth er .

If the read er will j ust study h imself for a short tim e as he

sit s down h e wil l see th at a train of th ou gh t is pas sing through
,

his mind and in t his train of th ou ght there is a rel ation ship be
,

tween all thought .

In oth er words th e th oughts are so related o ne to another

,

that one call s up or su ggests the oth er .

It is what is known in psychology as the law of associ ation

of ideas .

You have gone some day and passed a particular spot and ,

without effort a part of your train of thou ght was started be ,

ginnin g at the spot and following on in a train of ideas or

th oughts that that spot suggested to your m ind which train of ,

thoughts or ideas you had thought long since buried in forget

fu lnes s
.

It may be the face of a friend we meet on th e street su g

ge st s the face of another .

It may be the meeting of a stranger whom you have never

seen before and the re sembl an ce to some di stant friend is so
,

great and strikin g th at the mind immedi ately refers to the other ,

and then foll ows a train of ass ociat ed ideas started by that ,

That cas ual meeting was a suggestion .

If we examine ourselves more closely we will see th at a ,

very large proportion of the th oughts th at pas s th rou gh ou r

min ds are thoughts that have thei r ori gin in su ggestion in ,

some w ay according to th e law of associated ideas

, .

B u t thi s law of association of ideas is a faculty of th e con

Wh en we come to the unconscious mind the ntent and lim , co

“ ”
itation of the term su ggestion mu st be considerably modi fied .

You will remember that I said that when the con scious
mind is in abeyance the unconscious mind is governed by the
,

law of suggestion .
204 T HE HEA LI NG HAND

Wh en we remem ber th at the u nconscious mind absol u tely

controls all the fu nctions and activitie s of the physical org an ism ,

and when we remember th at th e unconscious mind is its el f con

trolled by the law of sugg estion th en if we can place th e con

,

scious mind in abeyance we can awak en the uncons ci ous m in d by

,

sugg es tion ; for it believe s what we tell it does what we com ,

Thus you see by a correlation of these two laws th e law

, , ,

of ph ysical control and the law of sugges tion th e heal er can ,

cau se th e un conscious mind of th e patient to h eal its own bod y .

Remember that this unconscious mind is the Divi ne in man .

It is the ray of light from the Ete rnal source of light .

It is the spark of the Infinite in telli gence ; it is a part of th e

Infinite power ; it is th e Infinite principle working in this fo rm
of being which we call man
This the law of being that is the efficacious cau se in th e
healing of disease .

If man lived in perfect accordance with the law of his being ,

th ere would be for him no such th in g as di sease .

But man does not live in accordance with the law of his be
ing he doubt s and he doubts th e ex i stence in himself of this
, ,

Etern al principle this Infinite intellig ence th is Omnipoten t

, ,

power .

Then by the law of suggestion when doubt of its ex istence

,

find s lod gment in the unconscious mi nd i t to all intents and pu r

,

poses ceases to exi st ; it does not perform its functions except

in a lim ited manner and in accordance with the beliefs en ter

S uggestion then in its lim ited aspect has to do particu larly

, , ,

with the unconscious mind of the p atient and its origin is in

, ,

the consciou s mind of the heal er .

The healer finds access to the unconsciou s mind o f th e pa

tient and th en when he has obtained control of that unconsciou s
,

mind he gives out the suggestion which if acted u pon by the pa

,

ti ent will bring h armony out of discord ease ou t of di sease

, , ,

pleasure out of pain .

B u t let u s rem ember that th ere is no power in th e s u g

206 THE HEALING HAND

You will see then that a suggestion is bu t a statem ent o f

, ,

the terms of the ag reement .

Recollect th en that su ggestion is but th e means for th e

, ,

bringing about of th at agreement between two minds wh ich

brings the law of being into operation agai n accordin g to M at
,

th ew which I have discu ssed in the chapter on Agreem ent .

Notice the distinction bet ween su ggestion and intention .

Sugge stion is a thought formulated and h eld by one m ind

for the purpose of influencing anoth er mind T h e intention has a
.

physi cal effect primarily ; su gges tion a spiritual effect prim arily
.
 CHAPTER XXVIII

LAYIN G ON OF HANDS

If the reader has been careful in his perusal of this work ,

he will have discovered th at it is the great Law of Being that is

th e efficient cause in any act of h eali ng .

Thi s Law of Being in exercisin g its power exercise s its

, ,

power through th e u n consciou s faculties of the mind .

I n other words the uncon sciou s mind is the agent thro ugh
,

which the Law of Being manifes ts itself .

He will have seen that th is unconscious mind controls the

functions and activities of the physical organi sm that it con ,

trols th e circulation of th e blood that it control s every gland in

’

the body contro ls every s ecretion controls every mu scle and

, ,

nerve control s every organ th at it is the great engineer and

, ,

machini st that keeps th e ph ysical organism in activity and in

rep air .

T he reader wil l h ave seen that this uncon sciou s mind is

contro lled by th e law of sugge stion and th at by intention su g , ,

g e stion a nd th e p er fect memo ry th e un con sciou

, s mi nd i s bro u h
g t
from wrong th ought activ ity to ri ght thought activity whi ch
- -
,

T he question will undoubtedly h ave arisen in the minds of

the reader if it is th e un conscious mi nd th at heal s the di seas ed
,

—
organism what is the u se in lay ing on of hand s is it not a
,

su perfluous act t
‘

T hi s is a legitimate question and one we will briefly con

sider in this chapter .

The ph enomena of dr eams give s u s a cl ew to the reason for

th e laying on of h and s .

When we are locked in the em brace of sl eep the conscious

T he uncon sciou s mind never slumbers never sleeps but is , ,

in con stant activ ity .

Ph ysical sensation s th at come at th e time wh en the con

sciou s mind is in abeyan ce are known by the uncon scious mind

as sensati ons only .

It cannot interpret the sensation and not being able to in ,

terpret the sensation accu rately it give s its own interpretation

, ,
2 08 THE HEALING HAND

and that interpretation may be a right interpretation or a wrong

interpretation .

T h e uncon sciou s mind m y be likened to a timid wom an sh u t

up in a lonely hous e and alone at night .

Sh e h ears strange weird noi ses on the outs ide ; she cannot
,

see wh at it is t hat is makin g th e se strang e noi ses and sh e gi ves

h er own interpretation to th em .

Sh e conju res up in h er mind burgl ars or wild beas ts and

immediately her ph ysical o rganism is tens e with fear wh en the,

fact was it m ay onl y have been th e wind moani ng th ro u g h th e

shutters or some h armle ss dog or cat di spo rting it self upo n th e

outside .

But when the timid woman had interpreted th e sensat io n

that come to her it was as real to h er as h er belief
, .

The unconscious mind repres ents that timid woman .

Wh en the mind is in abeyance it is cognizan t of

conscious
all ph ysi cal sen sations but cannot interpret them aright ; and it
,

g ive s its own interpretation like th e tim id wom an ; and in fea r

and in fri gh t th e ph ysical organi sm is ten sed .

Wh o has not awakened from a dream in wh ich the ph ys ical

organism had been inte rpreting physical s en sations wrong ly ,

while fear paralyzed and mu scles and nerves all were tense an d
, ,

the perspiration was standing upon the brow

If the uncon sciou s mind has the power of knowin g ph ysical
sensation s and h as th e powe r of mi sin terpretin g th em wh en we,

remember the law of su ggestion we will see th at th e uncon sciou s

mind can be made to interpret th e ph ysical sen sation in an y way

the su ggestion direct s .

Remember that the phy si cal sen sation remains th e sam e .

It is only the interpretation th at is chang ed and th e chang e

,

of the interpretation of the sen sation cau ses th e ph ysical effect .

Here then lies th e reason for the l aying on of h and s

, ,
.

To illustrate : Here on a stool before me sits a patient ; he

is afflicted with stom ach trouble .

S it down on his left side so that your right h and m ay be

placed upon the sp inal column and your left in front over the
210 THE HEALING HAND

In order that the conscious mind m ay be withdrawn from

the disease or pain instru ct the patient to call up to his m ind
,

a mental image of some scene or th e face of some dear friend ;

not formulating th ough t about eith er but simply lookin g at it ,

.

Then you mus t as sume the pos itive attitude of mind thi nk ,

ing th e though t you wi sh th e patient to exp ress th e th ou ght ,

of ease .

Soon you will see that the patient u nder your thou gh t wil l
become more and more passive and thoroughly relax ed and i t is ,

in that relaxed condition that the u nconsciou s mind is left u n

“
trammeled to do its work to knit u p th e ravelled sleeve of
,
”
care .

You will see th erefore that the laying on of hand s ass is ts

, ,

the suggestion in finding lod gm ent in the unconscious min d .

It mi ght be said to be the mask behind which the su ggesti on

enters unsu spected the unconsciou s m ind
, , .

The conscious mind cannot deny the ph ysical sensation and ,

a su gge stion going h and in h and with the ph y sical s ensation wi ll

not be ch allenged by th e conscious mind ; so ph ysical sensation
and s u gg estion goin g h and in h and find lodg ment in the u ncon

sciou s mind and accompli sh the purpos e whereunto they are sent .

Ther e is al so anoth er point You will remember that among

.

the faculties of the uncons cio us mind was th at of th e perfect

memory .

’
We can by going back in ou r lives to childhood s days or to
,

manhood s or womanhood s prime remember wh en every nerv e

’ ’
,

thrilled with life every mu scle throbbed with strength and life
, ,

was one long holiday of pleasure But a ch ange came over th e

.

sp irit of ou r dream s ; pai n took the place of pleasure weakness ,

the pl ace of strength dis ease the pl ace of ease

, .

Remember th at in that perfect memory every thought lies

bu ried ; remember th e intimate rel ation sh ip that exists between
the thou ght and th e nervou s condition attendant upon su ch
thought .

Wh en in treating a patient we stroke the spinal column or ,

any great nerv e center and arou se those l atent nerve s to renewed
,

activity they in turn r eact upon the brain cre atin g th e same vi
, ,

b rations th at went forth in th e day of health and stren gth .

 T HE HEALI NG HAND

The perfect mem ory is arous ed these oth er conditions are ,

recal led the min d had th ought that its fun ction throu h the se
, g
nerves was lo st forever but now it is reminded th at th ey exi st
,

again ; and then becau se of th at perfect memory th e mind again

, ,

takes hold of th e nerves that are dormant apathetic or nearly ,

dead and comm ence s new activities as of yore

, .

More th an we kn ow perh aps even more than we think does

, ,

thi s perfect memory operate as a factor in th e h ealing of di seas e .

B ear this in mind th at in all cases it is th e law of being

, ,

whos e agent is the un conscious mind that does the act of heal ,

ing ; that intention su gges tion and the l aying on of h and s are
,

but th e means by which this agent is again started into activity

to do its perfect work .

Remember th at when a patient is suffering from pain he ,

canno t th ink th e th ou ght of eas e in th at p arti cul ar locality .

The heal er can think the thought of ease and if the patient s ,
’

m ind will be passive and receptive to the po sitive mind of the

healer th e vibration s from th e h ealer s mind will act upon th e
,
’

brain cells of the patient s mind and establi sh the h ealing vibra
’

tions th ere which he could not establi sh for him self ; and so we
h ave the agreement of two minds by intention .

Remember that in suggestion we have only the formul ated

statem ent of th at upon which th e mind s agree ; and th at in the

laying on of hands we have th e means by wh ich th e suggestion

becomes responsive or is responded to in th e uncon sciou s mind
of the patient .

T h u s intention su ggestion and the l aying on of hand s are

, , ,

th e means to secure the perfect agreement which is the key

stone of th e arch of th i s system of h ealing .

A s thi s book is intended to be a supplement to th e autho r s

’

Mail Course of In struction and as th at mail cours e gives definite

,

and illustrated di rection s for treatment all th at will be need ed ,

here is a general view of treatm ent .

By th e treatment of a patient is meant the application of in

tention suggestion and th e laying on of hands in such a manner
,

as to change the wron g thou gh t activity of the patient to right

th ought activity .

T o so operate upon the uncon sciou s mind of the p atient that

that u ncon sciou s mind will be led to disch arge its hi gh preroga
 T HE HEA LI NG HA ND

tive of caring for the body and keeping it in repair in the p roper
manner .

In order th at intention suggestion and the laying on of

,

hands m ay bring abou t the d es ired result a few oth er exp e di ents ,

seem to be necessary .

The reader wil l remem ber th at th e laying on of h and s was

but th e physical sensation behind which the suggest ion en tered
the unconsciou s mind undoubted an d un ch alleng ed .

In order that th at physical sensation m ay be most effe ctiv e ,

it s eem s to be necessary to h eat th e hands before layin g th

on.

T ry thi s experiment : Raise the arms so that they wi ll b e

at ri ght angle s to the body p roj ecting sideways , .

Then from the wri st let the hands h ang limp and loos e .

Tense all the mu scl es of the arm for a second or two as h ard
as you po ss ibly can ten se th em .

Then drop the hands by the sides and you will feel a sen sa
tion of fullness in the h and s the blood ru shin g down into th em
, .

If you will breathe upon the palm s of the h ands so as to ,

impart a sli ght moisture th en ru b the hand s together b riskl y

, ,

you will be surpri sed at the amount of heat that will be developed

“
This process is call ed heatin g the hand s By a little prs c .

tice it will not be necessary to raise the arm s and tense th e

mu scles but the h and s can be h eated by friction as I have stat ed
,

This the reader will see makes the physical sensation mo re

, ,

noticeable to the patient centers his attention upon the ph ysical

,

sen sation more clo sely and enables th e sugges tion to reach th e
,

uncon scious mind without being doubted denied or ch allenged , .

Anoth er thing the heated hand s will do is to center the at

tention of the patient on th at spot and then when the su gges , ,

tion is given the suggestion is responded to more readily by th e

,

unconsciou s mind as it is th en engrossed in its attention u pon

,

the diseased part .

Anoth er aid to sendin g the suggestion to the u nconsciou s

mind is wh at is called imparted motion .

Lay the righ t h and upon th e pl ex u s which controls the or

g an y ou w i sh to t reat th en cont
,ract t h e bi ce ps and impart a
21 4 T HE HEALING HAND

From the Cervical Plex us all dis eases incident to th e h ead

are treated From the Brachial and upper Dorsal Plexu s es we
.

treat the th roat arms lungs and heart

, , .

From the Dorsal Plex us all di seases of the stomach bowels ,

From the Sacral Plexu s are treated all diseases of the pelv ic
organs . m
"
The reader mus t remember th at the success of any treat
ment general or specific depend s upon the influ ence ex er ted
, ,

upon the unconsciou s mind th rough intention su ggestion and th e ,

laying on of hand s .

Suggestion and intention will be effective just in pm portion

to the passivity of the patient and in proportion to the positi ve
attitu de wh i ch the h ealer as sum es toward h is pati ent .

T he first th ing th en before giving any treatm ent general

, , ,

or spe cific is to place the patient in the pas sive att itu de
, .

If the treatment were to las t t wenty or thirty minutes it ,

would be better to spend one half the time in pl acing the patient
in a passive attitude and the other half in giving the treatm en t
by intention suggestion and th e laying on of h and s
, .

The passive condition as has been de scri bed in the prev iou s
,

ch apter is not the hypnotic condi tion

, .

In the passive condition the cons ciou s mind is simply qu ies

cent the patient is not res i sting
, .

In the hypnotic condition there is a ch ange in the relation

of the con scious mind of the patient to th e ex ternal worl d .

Exp erience in hundred s of case s has sh own that in th e

h ypnotic condition a suggestion oft entimes tak es effect far more
rapidl y than in the passive condition yet not more effectivel y
, .

From indu ctions made in a vas t nu mber of cas es it appears

th at the cu res effected through su ggestion in the passive con di
tion are far more permanent th an the cure s effected throu gh the
hypnotic condition .

In a perfect h yp notic condition the consciou s mind of the

,

pati ent is in entire abeyance and upon awakeni ng or coming ou t

of th e trance th ere is no recoll ection in the consciou s m ind of
 THE HEALIN G HAND 2 15

T he conscious mind immediately begins to doubt and to ex

ercise th e same thought-activity that it ex ercis ed before being

placed in a hypnotic condition .

While in the pass ive condition both the consciou s and th e

unconscious mind s are active in receiving th e suggestions ; and
the conscious mind h aving been present when th e agreement
,

was entered into through suggestion and not h aving denied or ,

chall eng ed th e agreement , will not upon coming out of the pas
,

s ive condition doubt deny or ch alleng e in th e same degree that

, ,

it doubted deni ed or challeng ed when th ere was no recollection

,

of any agreement .

Wh ile a cu re brought about in the passive attitu de may not

be so rapid in developin g it will be more permanent
, .

I n concluding th is ch apter on T reatment th e writer wi shes ,

to urge upon the read er the importance of a thorough compre

hension of th e principle s involved so th at there may be in his
,

own mind no doubt of the res u lts he seeks to attain wh en the

condition s have been complied with .

Doubt in the mind of the healer is as bad as doubt in the

i —
mind of th e pat ent in fact it is worse , .

You will remember in the chapter on Telepathy th at the u n

consciou s mind has th e power of commu ni cating with oth er u n
conscious mind s by a law known onl y to its elf .

When the heal er approaches the patien t with u nbounded

confid ence the u ncon sciou s mind of the patient interprets th at
,

confidence and is affected by it .

This m ay be seen in nearly every walk of life .

Take a viciou s h orse ; let a man approach him with confi

dence and strong will power and th at horse will be obedient to
-

him ; but let a timid doubting person approach him and the horse
,

will triumph over him .

This is noth ing more or less than the same principle in op

cration of which I have sp oken .

Although the consciou s mind of the patient may be nu

aware of any doubt or l ack of confidence or hesitancy on the p art
of th e heal er th e unconsciou s mind kn ows it and acts upon it
,
.

This confidence can onl y be obtained through a knowledge

216 THE HEALIN G HAND

If there is an incomplete kn owledge confidence will be in ,

complete j ust in proportion to that l ack .

S eek then to famili arize yourself with every principle in

, ,

volved and th e law of its operation until it becomes second na

ture to you so that you KN OW not believe
, , .

Now brin g together all th e elements that are necess ary to

,

constitute a succe ssful h ealer .

There is first the mind trained by concentration to th ink

one thought to the exclu sion of every oth er th ought to wi th ,

draw his mind from th e th ings of sense and center them upon
th e things of the spi rit .

Th is is neces sary in order th at h e m ay ex ercise intenti on

and th at intention may do its perfect wo rk .

I n thi s power of oncentration lies his ability to place hi s

c

patient in th e passive attitude of m ind .

This he does by instru cting his patient to relax bodily and

mental tens ion and become receptive to him self .

Th en think th e thought for him until he becomes pass ive .

Th en by the laying on of hand s and suggestion an approach

is made to th e unconsciou s mind and the pe rfect memory with
,

the uncon sciou s mind act s upon the suggestion given and h eal s
its own di seas ed body .

T hee der will h ave perceived in the reading of the previou s

r a

chapte rs th at the brain is the m ind s laboratory and th e onl y

’

thing the mind can produce in that laboratory is thought .

He will have seen th at though t is a substance in motion an d

that motion is called a vibration .

He will have seen that thought waves go out fro m the min d
as electri c waves go out from th e t ran smitt in g in strument i n
telegraphy .

He wil l have seen that every thought caus e s a vibration in

th e brain cell s and thi s vibration is communi cated to th e sympa
thetic nervou s system which is but the brain extend ed and
, ,

th at th rough the sympathetic nervous system these th ought vi

bration s are re gi stered upon the physical organism either in
coarse di s in tegratin g vibrations o r in g entle re generating vi
, ,
21 8 T HE HEALI NG HAND

The consciou s mind being in perfect abeyance in s leep the ,

thought activity of the cons cio us mind ceasing, th e nerv ou s and

-

mu scu lar systems are thoroughly relax ed and the h ealth gi ving -

vibrations in which we live h ave free course to sweep thr ou gh

,
“
ou r phy sical organi sm repair the waste and knit up the rav el ed
,
”
sleeve of care .

Let me give a crude illustration : Here I am in a room into

whi ch it is necessary th at fresh air shall be freely admi tte d for
the preservation of my health .

At the window openings in the screens we find m esh es to

admit the requi site amo u nt of life givin g air -
.

If my thought activity h ad the power to close those meshes

-

by wrong though t activity and to open th em wide by right

-

thou ght activ ity we would th en see h ow it is that wrong

a
,

thought activity shuts out the life giving vibrations and the re
- -

laxed mu scul ar and nervou s s y stem s admit th ese same vibrations

T h e window openings with th e mesh es closed represe nt th e

muscul ar and nervou s sy stem s ten sed ; the window openings with
the meshes open wide rep resent th e nervous and muscular sys
tems relax ed .

Relax ation is of prime im mrtance as the law of ou r natu re

,

sh ows wh en by that law we are forced to rel ax in to slum ber in

, ,

order th at the life giving vibration s m ay repair the waste of the

-

day th at h as gone before .

T h e first act of self treatment the reader will see is perfect

-
, ,

rel ax ation of the ph y si cal organism by rel axi ng the nervou s and

muscu l ar systems .

Thi s condition is of greater importance th an we are aware

and the writer cannot too strongly impres s it upon th e mi nd of
the sufferer who woul d seek h ealing by h ims elf th at he sh ou ld ,

come into harmony with th e Law of Bein g .

An other condition necessary to self treatment is perfect t e -

l ax ation of mental powers .

In ou r minds there mu st be no tens ion that would keep ou t

th e h ealing vibrations in wh ich we live and move and have ou r
 We must dism iss from ou r mind every thought of anger, or
j ealousy , or malice or contention or strife which we have against
, ,

any brother in the world .

Becau se although we may volu ntarily strive to relax ou r

,

nervous or mu scul ar system so long as a single wrong thought

,

is hel d in th e mind that bodily rel ax ation cannot be perfect

, .

Th i s has been more thoroughly discussed in th e ch apter on

F orgiveness which the reader is advis ed to consider h and in
,

h and with th e pre sent ch apter .

Then when every thou ght of care worry anxiety or per

, , ,

p lex it y h as bee n di smis sed from th e mind the health giving vi

-
,

brations can go in and impre ss th emselves upon the brain cell s ;

th ese are transmitted to th e physical organism and health y
v ibrations es tabli shed therein .

In the chapter on Forgiveness you have learned th at what

e ver thou g ht we entertai n open s u p brain cell s to the reception

of the same thoughts that lie floatin g arou nd u s .

We open ou r mind s to tho u ghts of hatr ed envy or malice , .

Every thought of hatred envy or malice that is floating in

,

thi s universe of vibrations round about u s can enter into ou r ,

brai n cel ls and in turn be reflected upon ou r ph ysical organism ,

verifying in a scientific way that Whatsoever a man soweth

“
, ,
”
that shall he al so reap .

While if his mind sent out th e thoughts of kindness, gentl e

nes s sym pathy and brotherly love for all mankind
, all like ,

th oughts th at are floating in this universe of vibration s in which

we live and move and have ou r being can come in and establish
th e same vibration s and in turn be reflected upon the physical
,

organism giving health and strength establishing pleasure in

, ,

the place of pain ease in th e place of disease

, .

In the ch apter on Con sciousnes s the reader saw th at in con

sciou sness we come to a knowled ge of th e forms of being and
realize ou r s eparatenes s from them ; th at in conscience we know

Being and realize ou r oneness with it .

I n thi s relaxed bodily and mental condition if the patient ,

will continually look at Being and stri ve to realize his onenes s

with it, claiming his inheritance then his mind is open to the re
,

ception of th e Divine thought , the Law of B eing and th ese in ,

220 T HE HEA LING HAND

tu rn will be regis tered u pon his phy sical organism prom oting

He is but claiming his lost estate he is taking th e place of ,

th e heir . I n th is relax ed condition of which I hav e spoken h e

“
m ust think I am one with the Infi nite a ray of light from the
, ,

eternal sou rce of light a spark of intelligence from the eternal

,

su n th ereof .

I am u nder th e protection of Law; all power is mine all ,

wisdom is mine ; the Father and my self are one .

I am living in the kingdom ; all I have to do is to reach ou t

and tak e wh at I want of the abounding life that s urrounds m e
”
everywhere .

No wonder th en the Great Healer said Be not careful for

, , ,

tomo rrow —that is full of care ; be tru stful confidin g real izin g
’
, , ,

that you are one with Him who is too wi se to err and too good to
be unkind to the humblest of His children .

Remember th at it is not the will of the heavenl y Father th at

one of th es e little ones should perish ; but rather that all sh ou l d
come unto Him and h ave life this new life thi s ab ounding lif e
, , ,

th e life which the Mas ter said He came that we might have mo re
abundantly .

If we wil l at reg u l ar times in th e day seek the se mom ents

of rel axation and communion with th e Father as sure as day ,

follows night so sure will streng th follow weakn es s and pleasu re ,

follow pain .

When we go out and wal k the streets or ramble afield and ,

look u p into the azure sky let u s rem ember that th is u niverse is
,

a univers e of aboundin g life and we are a part thereof .

When we look aloft and see th e eagle soar in his place we ,

rem em ber we are on e with him

, .

Wh en we see the fi shes in the pool we remember that ou r ,

life is the same life th at is in th em .

Wh en we observe the beauty of the rose and the symmetry

of th e lily we remember that the Father 8 hand which painted
,
’

the one and fashi oned the oth er has fas hioned this tabernacl e
of clay in which we dwell .

The same Intelligence that placed the princip le in each of

h
t ese h as als o pl aced th e principl e in na —that is t h e king dom , .
 C HAPT ER XXI X
TELEPATHY AND T HO UGHT TRANSF ER ENC E
In the ch apter on Mind the reader will have noticed among
th e faculties of the u nconscio us mind was this :
“
T h e u ncon
scious mi nd has the power of communi catin g with oth er u ncon

sciou s minds by a law known onl y to itself .

Th is is th e most di fficult facu lty of the u nconscious mi nd

.

to demonstrate because of its very natu re ; but su fficient ex peri

ments have been made to warrant the deductio n expressed in the
law above stated .

If the th eory of thought being a vibration is true and if ,

thought tak es its place among the imponderable agents h eat , ,

li ght sound and electricity which are modes of motion then

, , ,

we will see at once the difficu lty of bringing into practica l u se

thi s faculty of the uncons cious mind or of demonstrating to th e
,

unthi nk in g the fact of its ex istence .

Let me illust rate : I n wirel ess telegraphy ins trum ents h av e

been so delicately constructed that they can throw into v ib ra
tion that rarefied form of matter known as eth er in which elec
,

tricity manifest s its activities and instru m ents have been so

,

del icately constructed th at they will respond to the vibrations

sent ou t by the first instr ument .

The one instrument is called the transm itter th e oth er th e

,

receiver It is clear th at some force must go from the transmit

.

ter to th e receiver .

It is easy to demonstrate that such a force ex ists , th at it

does its work ; but how much fu rth er on could we go in th e in
vestig ation if th ere were no code of signal s to enable u s to in
terpret the vibrations
To the ordinary mind standing by the receiving instru ment ,

the sou nd s th at it send s forth are meaningless .

He knows some force is at work making those su ccessive

sounds but th at is all he kn ows and th at is of no practical
,

importance to him .

But when he knows the meanin g of those sou nds then he ,

can interpret wh at is bein g sent along the line .

If m an had never invented the telegraphic code wh ich en ,

ables h im to in terpret th e force sen t alon g th e tel egraphi c win s ,

th e tel egraph would never h ave been of any practical im portance .

 THE HEALING H AND 228

So it is in thought transference ; we know that the force goes

-

from the mind of the transmitter to the mind of the eiver ;

rec

th at is, from the positive mind to the pas sive mind .

We know thi s j u st we know force goes from th e trans

as

m itter to the receiver in telegraph y .

We know that in the h ealing of disease a force goes from

th e mind of the healer to th e mind of th e pati ent and we observe ,

th e effect ; but th e patient canno t interpret the vibrations that

are sent and neither can th e h ealer .

Until therefore some means of interpretation sh all have

, ,

b een di scovered th ought transference will h ave no practi cal im

,
-

p o rta n ce save in the h ea lin g of di se as e .

If th e tim e shall ever come wh en some code of interpreta

tion in thought tran sference analogou s to a code of interpreta
-

tio n in telegraph y sh all by common consent become kn own to

m e n
, then an
,d not un til t h en ca n th ou
, g ht-trans ference be of
an y importance in sending messages It is of im portance in the
.

h ealing of di sease by establis hing the same vibration s in the

p a ss ive mind th a t are held by th e po s itive mind .

It would be well to mark out a di stinction that is not clearly

drawn in the mind s of writers upon thi s subj ect .

There is a distin ction between thou ght trans feren ce and -

telepathy .

You wil l see by th e definition given above th at that fac ulty

of th e uncon sciou s mind by wh ich it has power to communicate
with another uncons cio us mind by a law known only to itself is
known as telepathy .

Thought transference d iffers from tel epath y in this ;

-

though t tran sference has its origin in th e con sciou s mind of the
-

sender and is received by eith er th e con sciou s or th e un con sciou s

mind of the receiver .

Telepathy however st rictly speaking has its origin in the

, , ,

u n cons ciou s mind of the sender and find s lod gment in the u n
conscious mind of th e receiver .

It is said th at in th e Orient the adepts have so developed th e

uncon sciou s faculties of the mi nd th at th ey have discovered a
code of interpretation and are able to send mes sages by though t
22 4 THE HEALING HA ND

It has al so been said that in the priesthood of th e R o m an

Ch urch there have from the earliest times been adepts that h a t
.

practiced thi s method of thought trans ference -

.

It is said th at the death of General Gordon was kn own in

Egypt several weeks before it was possible that any mes s ag e
othe r th an th at of th ough t tran sference could have been se nt
-

from the place of his death to Cairo .

It is said by th e offi cers of th e Briti sh Army in India th at

their movements were always known in place s h undreds of m i l es
away long be fore any m es sage oth er than one delive red by
thou ght trans ference coul d have been sent from the place wh e re
-

the movement of troops initi ated to that of th eir de stinatio n

, .

Reverend M r C h inequ y who renounced the priesth ood of

.
,
“
the Roman C hurch state s in h is book Fifty Years in th e Ch u rch
, ,

of Rome that the death of President Lin coln was known in an

”
,

ob scure village of Minne sota two week s before any mess ag e

oth er than one sent by thought transferen ce could have b e en
-

s ent from Wash ington to the pl ace wh ere it was kn own railro ad s ,

and tele graph s not h avin g been in operation in Mi nnesota at t h at

early day .

M ay it not be th at such a fact was known in an obscure M in

u s scts vill age becau se o f th ought t ran sferen ce wh ich as I hav e
-
, ,

stated h as been affirmed to exi st amon g some of th e membe rs

,

of the Roman priesthood from th e earliest tim es to the prese n t

day "
These of course are matters of specul ation and are only
, , ,

cited for the purpo se of stim ul atin g inqui ry .

It is with thought transference rather th an with telepath y

-

th at we have to de al in the healing of di sease .

Keep the di stinction always in mind .

Thought tran sferen ce h as its ori gin in the consciou s m ind

-

of the send er and finds lod gm ent in either the consciou s or nu

con sciou s mind of the receiver .

Telepathy work s independent of th e con sciou s minds of

either ; it is th at constant communication of un con scio us mind
with unconsciou s mind which will account for m any th ings th at
appear stran ge .

When we remember th e difference th at exi st s in different

comm unitie s in regard to opinion s we will see th at this facu l ty
,
 T he W e l tm e r I n s ti tu te o f S u gge s ti v e T h e r a p e u ti c s
F ou nded in 18 9 7

NE VADA MI SS O UR I ,
. U S A
. . .

O ffice of

SID NE Y A W E LTM ER D T
.
, . . S,
.

Fou nder and Pres ide nt .

A PER SONAL MESSAGE

T O MY MANY F R I ENDS .

F or t h e pa s t t we n t y f i v e y e a r s , I h av e , t og e t h e r wi t h my
-

fe l l o w- wor k e r s , d e d i c at e d my l i f e t o t h e b e t t e r me n t of
h u man i t y , h e l p i ng , h e a l i ng an d t e a c h i ng t h ou s an d s ,
mak i ng i t p o s s i b l e f o r af f l i c t e d man k i n d t o e me r g e f r om
p a i n an d f a i l u r e i n t o t h e f r e e d om o f h e a l t h , h a pp i n e s s
an d p r o s p e r i t y .

Du r i ng t h e s e y e ar s t h e way h a s n o t b e e n easy . There

h av e b e e n t r i a l , p e r s e c u t i on , p r o s e c u t i an d c on
“

on ,

B u t i n t h e f a c e o f a l l we h av e
—
t i nn e l s t r u gg l e s .

p e r s i s t e d , f o r WE HA D B U T ONE GOAL t o f u l f i l l ou r d u t y
t o s u f f e r i ng h u man i t y .

T o day , w h e n I s e e wh a t we h av e a c c omp l i s h e d , w h at we
h av e b u i l t , t h e h e a l i n g t h at h a s b e e n g i v e n t o t h e man y
t h ou s an d s w h o h av e c ome t o Ne v a d a , o r t h r ou gh ou r Home
Me t h o d of He a l i ng , I kn ow ou r wo r k h a s b e e n we l l d o n e .

B u t t her e i s mu c h mo r e t o b e a c c omp l i sh ed .

S o l e t e a c h on e o f u s c on t i nu e d o i ng ou r u t mo s t , i n
f u r t h e r i ng t h e C au s e o f He a l t h , Hap p i n e s s , an d Pr o s
p e r i t y , b y p
s r e a d i ng t h e g l a d t i d i n g s o f wh at we k n o w
c an b e d on e f o r t h o s e i n d i s e a s e , p a i n , an d mi s e r y .

An d we h e r e i n Ne v ad a , wi l l c on t i nu e d o i ng ou r p ar t , i n
,

g i v i ng t h e v e r y b e s t i n a l l o f u s t o t h o s e w h o c ome t o
u s f or h e l p , w h e t h e r t h e y c ome i n p e r s on , o r we c on t a c t
t h em t h r ou g h c o r r e S p on d e n c e .

S i n c e r e l y y ou r s
 P R O FE SSOR SI DNE Y ABR A M W E LT M ER
Doctor o f S u gges tive Therape u tics
Probably there is n o greater au th ority in the pro
fe ss ion al wo rld on the su bj ec ts o f Su g gestive T herape u
tics and A pplied Ps ych olo gy than Professo r W e ltm er
, .

F or twenty fiv e ye ars P rofe s so r W elt m e r h as bee n

-

d em o nst rating the valu e of Su g gestive Therapeu tics as a

he al in g ag enc y to su ffe rin g hu m an ity
. T he re m arkabl e
re su lts he has secu re d h ave m ad e th o u san d s of frien d s
fo r h is I n s titu te
.
 T H E LIF E W OR K OF SIDNE Y A . W E LT M ER .

A S ho rt Ske tch o f the Fo u nde r s Earl y Ex pe rie nce ’

.

R O F E S SO R SID N E Y A W E L T M ER began th e s tu dy whi c h dev elop

P
.

e d i nto his pre sent wo rk fro m bo rro we d m edical boo ks which he

, ,

rea d laying open u pon his knees as he jo gged al on g cou n t ry roads

—
,

on a farm wa g o n a t night by the fli ckeri n g l ight of a tall o w wick and

at e ve ry othe r av ai la bl e m o m e n t he cou ld s pare from h is du t ie s as th e
olde st son of a fam ily tryin g to dig a li ving ou t of the gu ll y e tch ed red -
,

cl ay hill side s of an eighty acre farm in Central M is s ou ri .

A t the age of n ine teen he was al mo st qu ali fied to p ractice m edicine

—
bu t was adv ised by th e k n d cou n try p hy s ician len d er of the p reciou s
i
me d i ca l b oo k —
a to give u p his am b iti on to beco m e a D octo r an d dev ote
r

his energi es to chec kin g the rapid c o u rse of th e dise as e fro m whic h he was
su ffe ring. T he advice was s ou n d and practical bu t was given without a ,

ray of hope for ac co rdin g to the hig he st m edical kn owl e d ge of that day
,

his ai lm ent wou ld u ndou bte dly pro ve fatal .

R e al iz atio n of his own ph y sical co n di tio n had been gradu al l y taking

definite form in his m ind and even you th and ambiti on cou ld not b lind his
reas o n to the u ltim ate re su lt H e felt that his am biti on to m inist e r to the
.

nee d s of hu m an ity c o u ld no t fin d e xp re ssio n i n the way he d esired bu t like ,

many who su ffere d f ro m a so call e d incu rable m al ady hi s greate s t d esire

-
,

was to re l ieve the su fferin g of o the rs .

B ein g of a reli giou s te m pera m ent an d seeking an ou tle t fo r h is ambi .

tio ns to s e rve he natu rally tu rned to the stu dy of the Bible I n th e teach
, .

in g of Jes u s of N az are th he receive d th e in spirati o n an d in st ru ct ion which

res to red his he alth .

T HE S EA R C H
F ro m that tim e forward he sou ght in every direction for that which
wou ld de fine and e xpl ain th e p rin cipl es u nde rlyin g th e scriptu ral healing ,

as do n e by Jes u s and the D is c ipl e s to th e u n d erstan ding of the m od e rn m an

, .

His search l ed him into m an y s trang e path s of stu d y He r ea d ev ery .

thin g that seem e d to have e ven the sl ighte st bearing u pon th e su bj ect .

M e sm erism the th eo rie s of Davies B u ch an an an d th e wo rks on spiriti sm

, , ,

I n di an Phi lo soph y Ch ristian T he olo g y an d M ode rn Scien ce bu t n o n e of

, ,

the s e seem ed to hold th e t ru th h e sou ght H e con tinu ed to sea rch and .

p ray bu t he never dou bte d There was a D ivine Pri nciple that had sav ed
— —
.

him bu t h ow to g ras p
,
h old m ake it his own and im po rt its bl es s ings
to hu m anity ; that was his problem .

T he tro u bl e was that he was n ot yet ready to receive the t ea ching

which wo u ld enabl e him to tran sl ate the inspirati on he had fou n d in the
wo rk s of Je su s an d the D iscipl e s in to term s of present u sage , .

I t wa s o nly after he had enriched his life wi th a dee per u n derst a riing
of his fe llow be in gs in sh arin g their joys and s orrows in lend in g h i s xid
, ,

in th eir n ee d throu gh h is con ta ct wi th them in all cl as ses an d con d i t i o n

,

e was fitte d to in te rp ret th e tru th wh en he fou nd it .

He stu died m ankin d fr om th e m as ter s d esk of cou n tr y s chool s f r o m

’
,

the pu lp it of B aptist Chu rche s from the edi to r s d esk an d type ca s e o f a

’
,

c ou ntry n ews paper H e wrote Cou nty Histo rie s install ed and car ed f o
.
,

pu blic l ib rarie s sold te xt books to ru ral school bo ards can vassed f o r a m

, ,

tau ght in Coll e ge s His were nearly all the experiences of an earnest y o u n
.

m an trying to m ake hi s way in the wo rld .

DI S COVER I NG T HE TR UT H
H is wo rk n e ve r sm oth e re d h is u n s atis fied de si re Hi s m in d wa s e v e r .

o n th e al e rt fo r a gr ain of t ru th th at m igh t l ea d t o th e s olu ti o n of t h e o n e

gr eat probl em of h is life an d wh e n the first ray of light cam e to h i m
,
,
the ans wer to qu estio n he had asked of a boy les s than 1 3 years old with
a , ,

whom he was ex pe rim entin g in the dee p stage s of h n osis he fou nd hi m ,

self u nabl e to realiz e that his search h ad e n d ed an d t at wi th ou t m ys tery

, ,

m agic or su pe r natu ral revel ati o n s

-
.

“
How can I heal the sick as Je su s did 2 was the qu est io n and the eu
”
,

swer cam e with ou t hesit atio n .

“
Lay you r han d s on the sick and try it as Jesu s did .

W as thi s the tru e an swer to the probl em he had so l ong stru ggled to
solv e ":
“
Lay you r han ds on the si ck an d try it as J esu s did ”
No scien tific
j arg on—o r c o m plex form u l a—o nly a sim ple statem ent—a su ggesti on
.

Su rely thi s sim pl e answer cou ld not contain the principle of the gre at
tru th b e had sou ght .

Y et was it s o e xtrem ely sim pl e 2

Lay yo u r hand s on the sick and try it as
“
T he an swe r had bee n
”—“
,

Jesu s did , a s Jesu s did

”
A h " there was the gre at p rinci pl e
. He knew .

T HI S I S T IE HO M E OF PR OF ESSO R SI DNE Y A WE LT M ER WHE RE H E

FI N D S R EST A ND HAR M ONY A F T ER A LON G DAY OF MI NI ST ERI N G T O
. .

T HE SI C K . T HI S B EA UT I FU L H OM E I S KN O WN FO R I T S W ON DER FUL

th at th e h eal ing pe rfo rm e d by Je su s and the Discipl es was n ot accom

p l i s h e d by th e m e re ph y s ical c o n t ac t of t h e h an d with th e su ff erer
’
s b od y ,

for there were he ali n gs reco rde d in whi ch the re cou ld have been no po s sibl e
phy sical contact He rem em bered the incid ent of Jesu s an d the C e n tu rion
.

as reco rd ed in M att 8 A nd ag ain the reco rd of the wom an of

Can aan, in M att , 1 5 22 z28 , and even another instance of th e Greek woman
.
-

of Se phoenicia, to ld in M ark, 7
FAI TH VI T AL P R I NCI P LE
T HE
'

Faith had be en the on e thin g e xacted in al l these cas es and in all the
oth er healin g works of J esu s and the D isciples Their su cces s seem ed to
.

de p e n d u po n the am o u nt of faith ex erci s ed by the heal er and his p atients .

T he rec rod see m s phasize this one point ab ove al l others In M att
to em . .
,

an d M att .he fou n d r eco rd s of fail u res du e to u nbe h e f

, His .

o wn re sto ratio n had bee n the re su l t of h is u n qu esti o n in g be lie f an d faith

'

He re v iewed his B ibl e stu d ies in the ligh t of this n ew u n de rs tandi ng

and eve r ywhe re he fo u n d fai th e m ph asized as th e acti ve p rin ci pl e in the
he alin g wo rk s of Jesu s an d his follo wers Th is el em ent lackin g an d their
.
-
,

e ffo rts b rou ght n o re su lts .

HEALI NG T HE SI CK
He so u ght o u t h is frie nd s and t reated the m with su ch g rati fyi ng re
su i t s that he ne gl e c te d his othe r wo rk and d e vote d his tim e al m o s t en
t ire l y to heal ing .

I t was his am bitio n to h ave every ph ys ician in cl u d e his m e th o d s in

his m edic al e du cation a n d practice ; bu t l ike eve ry other inn ov a to r his
m e th od s were n ot s e riou s ly c o ns id ere d and in m an y in s ta nces were e n tire ly
discredited by the ph ysicians to whom he felt the application of h i s dis
cov e ries sh o u ld be en tru s te d .

He en d eavo red to intere st the physici an s in the p ractice of hi s m e th

ods so th at h e c ou l d d evote his tim e to the form u l at ion of a co m pl e te s ys
te m of Text B ook s th at al l m ankin d might have th e be n efi ts
, .

He was o anxio u s to give re l ef to the a ffli cted an d to esta b l is h his

s i '
m e th od s th at he gave his se rv ice n ight an d day wi th ou t thou gh t o f re
, , ,

m u ne rati on u ntil his fin an cial c o n di ti on had re ached a cri sis

, .

H e fo u n d that h e wa s ind ebted to variou s pe opl e for a total of ab o u t

an d th at the re was du e h im fro m th ose wh o m he had tre a t e d a ,

total su m of abou t His cred ito rs be gan to c ro wd him for a s e t tl e

m ent of their cl aim s He m ad e an appe al to th o se wh om he h ad s e r v ed
.
-

in th eir d is tre s s and of the du e him he rece ive d o nly wh i ch

was paid by a poo r old wom an who mad e he r own su pport by t a kin g in
was hing .

He had give n freely an d the fact that tho s e wh o m h e re l iev ed o f p ai n

and su ffe rin g did n ot pay him the am ou nt s du e , was a c r us hi n g bl o w t o
hi s e nthu sias m Ho wever after waitin g an d receiving no fu rther p a ym e n ts ,
.
,

h retu rn ed the p aid by the old wom an and sent receipts to al l th e

f
o hers .

T HE C ALL OF D U T Y
H e h ad re ach ed the c o ncl u sio n that it was his du ty to de vote h i s l if e
'

to the advancem ent and e xtension of the m e thods which it h ad b ee n h is

p rivil ege to dem onstrate in the m an y rem arkable resu lts he had obtai n e d .

He n otified his c re dito rs that he wou ld p ay them as s oon as p o s s i b l e ,

res i gn ed fro m the facu lty of the Coll eg e in which he had been te ac h in g
an d with a fam ily of s ev en , d e pe n d en t u po n him , h e e n tere d u p o n hi s
l ife wo rk, with the firm c o nvictio n that it was his du ty to serve the s ic k
’
an d l eave a rec ord of his wo rk fo r al l wh o sh ou ld co m e after .

His d ete rm inatio n reach ed an d brid ges bu rn e d , he started in to hi s w o rk ,

u n d e r a strict fin an cial , an d s o u nd s cie n tific pol ic y .

He end e avo red to h eal all wh o applied for treatm ent an d kept a t ru e
'

re co rd of al l the cases h e treated .

S oon he discovered that som ethi ng was l acking in tho se with wh o m

he fail ed . No re s pon se re warde d h is effo rt s to relieve them and h e
l e d, n atu rally, to c om p are his su cc es ses with h is failu re s T hi s an a l y si s
.

brou ght ou t, with u nm istak abl e cl eam ess, the n ecessity of teachi n g t h e
,

Philosoph y as well as p racticing the art of healin g .

A s h i s wo rk in c re as e d th e p robl em of arou sin g th e faith of hi s p a

t ie n t s i n th e Powe r th at H eal s b e cam e m o re an d m ore com pl e x He h a d .

l ittl e d ifficu lty with th o se who sh are d his u n qu esti o nable tru st in t h e
prom ise s of Je su s an d th o se who were am enable to su gge st io n, bu t h e
 FO UNDI NG HI S I N STI T UT I ON
I n establishin g an Institu ti o n of this ch aracte r the fou n de rs ha d n o
p re ced ent to gu ide them for this was the fi rst in stitu tio n of its kind ever
,

es t bl i h ed a nd there were n o pl an s ch arte d for its su cces s fu l an d safe

as
con uc

CR U CIAL TESTT HE
I n 1 900 a co n ce rte d attack was m ad e to d estro y the W eltm er M et h od o f
Healin g Persecu tio ns and prosecu ti on s followed one an other in rap i d
.

su cce ss io n u n til Novem be r 1 7 1 902 when th e litig atio n h ad fi n ally reach ed

, ,

the U ni ted State s Su prem e Co u rt which su st ain ed Profe ss or W el tm e r s

’
,

work an d am on g other thin g de cl ared his m eth od s and practice to be

,
“
s ou nd and p racti ca l l egitim ate an d lawf u l and in n o conflict with th e
,
"

l aws of Co ngress .

A
T HE ENT R NC E T O T HE S NI T R I TH S N DS A A UM
SI C K A N D A F OU A OF
P OP L AV A A M HA FO U D
.

F LI C I ED
'
E E H E M R I-1D OU R S N I T R I U AN D VE N
T HE P A
E C E A N D H E LI N A
W I C H A W AI T m) T HEG HE R E H M .

T his se ttl ed , for al l tim e , the l egal statu s of the W eltm er M ethod of
H ealing .

T HE OR I GI NAL M AI L
COU R SE
I n 1899 Profe sso r W eltm er wrote a M ail Cou rse in M ag netic Healin g ,

of which so m e fo rty fi ve thou sand Cou rses were distribu ted am on g the
-

lish speaking in habitan ts of al l arts of the wo rld s C ou rse was

E
T h i
n
ge m o re than a statem ent of princrples with instru ctions for the dem on
p .

li ,

stration of the p rincipl e s sta ted .

It was m ade as com p rehen sive as po ssibl e bu t was very brief I ts .

gre at ch arm and popu l arity were du e to the fact that ev ery statem en t was
a d e du c tio n fr o m th e ac tu al e xpe rien ce s of the au th o r e ve ry p rinci pl e ,
l ai d down was ca p able of po s1 tiv e an d p ractical dem onstration by any perso n
 v
of a erage in te lligence an d the who le r0 po siti on was presented that any
so
one wou ld kn ow j u st how to prove , y t rial , th e asse r tions m ade in the
les sons .

h e benefits to hu m anity, re su l tin pl t t

Tr f om t h ain t m of these
g
r e s a e en
r mc pl e s and e x pen e n ce s, can never f t ly t d t
0

p e de in i e e s i m a t e T h e e ac h .

m g f thrs On gm al C ou r se h as enabl ed th ou sand s to overcom e diseases

O

o
rn d an d body , and to cu re an d prev en t sickne s s in them s e l ve
of
m
wrthrn therr hom es A s the re su l t of this work there are, to day , Su ggest
.
s and

otheraprsts i n e very state , as well as in all part s of the wo rld wh o are

o

th e sick and affl icte d , thu s brin gin g peace an d happin ess to hu
,
heal i
mam n
g
T HE R EW A R D F OR HI S E FFOR T S

At this point let u s see the cu m u l ative effect of this great m ov em ent
toward free dom fro m di seas e and pers onal limi tati ons .

When h e first cam e to Nevada on F ebru ary 1 9 1 897 and established , ,

hi s Sch ool of H eal in g P ro fes s o r W el tm er s su ccess was as su re d becau se

,
’

o f his m an y rem arkabl e su cc e s se s in h ea l in g th o se who we re con sid ered

h o pe l ess inv al id s H is fam e S pre ad in all d ire ction s N atu ral ly he re vol te d
. .

a g a nst th e id ea that h e had an y m iracu lou s power an d h e qu ote d m an y

ir
s a y ng s of Je su s to expl ain th at m en ta l ph ysical an d s piritu al heal in g are , ,
a c com plrsh ed by th e Power of th e I n fin ite an d n ot by m an or by an of
.

y ,

his m aterial m ean s or c o ntrivan c e s .

From the very be gin nin g when he was asked by his stu dents if they
,
‘

co u ld m anifest th is s am e he al in g po wer his an swer was : ,

“
Y o u can do what I do when you kno w what I know , .

A nd I can te ac h you what I kn ow ”

.

I n 2 5 ye ars this S anita riu m an d Sch ool startin g with n othi ng ex cept
,
'
,

a m e th od that wou ld h ea l has ex ten d ed its in fl u e n ce an d servi ce to all

,

p arts of the world B y m e an s of ou r pers onal service C ou rses and pu blica

.
,

t io n s we h ave directly se rv e d an d ben efite d m o re than fiv e hu n dre d th ou

,

s an d pe opl e A n d each on e of the se in tu rn in thei r perso nal contac t

.
, ,

with rel atives friend s acqu aintanc es and au dience s have ext ended the
, , ,

b ene fits of the W el tme r M eth od Su g ge stoth er apy to a l arge n u m ber of

, ,

p e rsons .

B y m ean s of its teachings an d actu al practice thi s In stitu tio n has de ,

v e l oped th e S cien ce of Su gges toth erapy whi ch is th e twen tieth cen tu ry ,

m eans for the h eal in g of the sick the u nhappy and the poo r T hu s we are
, , .

a b re as t of the twen ti e th cen tu ry d evelopm en ts in other l in es of hu m an en

d e av or .

— —
T he W el tm e r M e thod Su g ge s to t e r py has s tood se veral sev ere ia
h a
v e s ti gation s the m os t se vere o f whic h resu lted in the re po rt t hat :
,

6 7 pe r cen t o f its patien ts had bee n cu red or perm an en tly ben efite d .

30 per cent add ition al were well pl eased and onl y ,

3 pe r ce nt we re dis pl eas ed .

S o this work h as been two fold healin g and teaching Profe ssor -
, .

W e l tm er not on ly es tabl ish ed a S anitariu m so those who cam e to N evada

co u l d h av e th e v er y be s t of atten ti on wh il e h ere h e h as co n tinu ally im ,

p ro v e d thi s p art of h i s wo rk a t th e c o s t l of th,ou san d s of doll ar s s o th at ,

t od a y the W eltm er San itariu m gives service e qu al to the best in the

T he sam e is tru e f hi s R esid en t C ou rse of In stru ction , for whi ch he
-o

h as adde d , fr om tim e to tim e , al l the l abo rato ry equi pm en t nece ssary to gi ve

th e stu d en t the m o st s cientific traini ng .

T h e co rrespo nd ence C ou rse s h ave been im proved, rev ised, added to ,

and in e erv y way m ade to corres pon d to the new dis coveries m eth ods and ,

im prov em ents that h ave c o m e to li ght .

T h e Ho m e M eth od of H ealing in which Pr ofes sor W e l tm er tak es the

,
'

g r e at e s t in te re s t be ca u s e of t he m an y an d re m arka bl e l i fe-
gi vi n g re s u lts
brou ght abou t in his patie nt s has al s o be en im proved in m a ny wa ys
, . F or
the pas t twe lve years exte n s ive ex pe rim ents in te le path y hav e be e n ca r
,

ri e d o n an d t he se h ave giv e n him v al u abl e in form ati o n whi ch g re atly h elps

,

him in his Ho m e Treatm ent S ervi ce .

So you m ay m ore cl early u n de rstand how thorou ghly we have l ab o red

to s e rve tho se who nee d what we have to offe r n am ely both hea lin g and
, ,

in st ru c tio n the d iffe re n t d e pa rtm e nt s of ou r Se rvi c e are de sc ribed i n the

,

follo win g p age s R e ad eve ry wo rd care fu lly so you m ay kn ow h ow th or

.
,

ou ghly we have pl an n ed an d bu ilt .

 T he prin cipal m odes of g iv in g su gge stio ns are the spoken wo rds t h e ,
layin g on of han ds and su g ge sti on by telepath y
, .

T he traine d Su gg es tothe rapist u n de rstan ds how to awaken the he a l in

po we r resi de nt in each patien t and when this is don e su cceeds in secu n n g
'

,
not o nl y a pe rfect bu t pe rm an en t healin
, g .

T HE PR OCESS .

T he actu a l process of givin g a pati en t at the W eltm er Sanitari u m , t h e

fu ll benefit of Su g gestothe rapy is as foll o ws
T he patien t m a descri be his con di ti on in a l etter o r we wil l , wi th
ou t cha rg e, sen d a d ia
g o sis blank to m ake the de s criptio n easi er
n T h e de .

ption in a l e tte r , o r on ou r diag no sis bl an k will be carefu l l y co n s i d e re d

we wrl l ad v ise the pati ent p ro m ptly, an d frankly , and withou t ch a rge ,

AN OT HE R VI E W OF T HE EN T R AN C E T O T HE S A NI T ARI U M SH O WI N G T HE
B EAUT I F U L GRO UND S AR O U N D B UI LDIN G
.

T HE .

the best pl an of treatm ent to follow W hen c onvenient the patient sho u ld
.

c om e to the S ani tariu m for c on su ltation and examin ation by one or m o re

of the co m pe ten t m em bers of ou r staff T here is n o ch arge for a pe rso nal
.

co n su lta tio n with a S taff me m be r p re p arato ry to acce ptin g a patien t f o r

treatm ent When an in dividu al wan ts an e xamination bu t does not des i re
.

treatm ent there is a n om in al charge for the e x am inatio n acco rdi n g to t he

, ,

tim e to m ake it .

Other examination s su ch as su rgica l and X ra y ex ami natio n s and e x

,
-
,

am i nation s of the u rin e blood spu tu m etc

, , are at the u su al rates
, .
,
W h en .

acce pte d for tre atm ent the p atient is as sig ned to a roo m in the Sanitariu m
,

and in tim e of ov erfl ow to a roo m in a n earby cottage

, T he Sanitariu m .

reserv es th e ri ght in al l cas e s acce pted for tre atm e n t to brin g th e p ati ent ,

into the Sanitariu m fro m an y n e ar by roo m when the best in terest s of the
-

p at ie n t an d the San itariu m re qu ire it A ll p a

.t ien ts whe th er in t he Sa n i
,

tariu m or a n ear by c otta ge take the i r m e al s in th e Sanitariu m di ning

-
,

roo m wh e n abl e to g o to the tabl e an d when n ot abl e to go to the table

’
,
the ir m eal s wil l be served in the patient s room at an additio nal charge ’

of te n cen ts .

M ea l s s e rv ed b the Sanitariu m are p rop erl y cooked by an experienced

y
c e f es pe ci l ly trarned in cookin g fo r pe opl e wh o wi sh to g ain e n er y an d
h a g
Vi tal i t y ra p i dl y and alth ou gh we u se m e ats an d v e geta bl e s an d al l so rts of
,

wh ol es om e f oo ds we avo rd m akin g comb in ation s of foods that when m ix e d

,
1n th e sto m ach wi ll pro du ce in ju rio u s ch em ic al " reac tions .

Patie n t s who are able will be re qui red to take ph y sic al cu ltu re ex ercise s
wi th th e c la s s for fifte en m in u te s be gin nin g at All patients are
0

a m , . .

re qu i r ed to p ractice dee p breathin g Som e are re qu ired to take walks etc.

, .

I n th e treatme nt roo m a patient is given skil l fu l local tre atm en t to

an y par t th at ne ed s s pecial atte ntio n Pain is al m o st al wa ys re lieve d by the
.

trea tm e n t n o m atter what th e cau se of the pain m ay be F or the gen eral

, .

be n e fit o f m o st patien ts a Su gg estotherapy tre atm en t inclu d es th orou gh

m as sa ge f ollowed by the re vitalizi n g stim u l atin g m an efl u vi al ( ma gn etic
, , ,

o r M a nu a l re fl ex ) treatm e n t with app r opriate su gg e st io n s to en abl e the pa

tien t to h old the benefit of the treatm ent u n til the benefit of the next
tre atm e n c an be ad ded .

I n th e Lectu re R oo m a patien t is given free admis sio n to the M o rni ng

,

Le ctu re a nd Healing Service c on du cte d by Profes sor Sidne y A W e ltm er

,
.
,

fr om 1 1 A M to
.

. . N oon each m o rnin g T h is l ectu re an d heal in g ser vic e .

m ak e s it eas y and natu ral for th e atients to kee p their th ou ght s in h arm on y
with G od s healin g pu r pose besi es givin g the patient s ystema tic in stru c
’
,

t ion an d training in m en tal and ph ysical hygiene .

OU R SANIT A R I U M CA R E
Ou r San itariu m Care m ake s heal in g c o ntinu o u s T W E NT Y F O U R
H OU R S EV ER Y DA Y and the prog res s of each p atient is care fu lly con
,

si dere d and di scu ssed ev ery M o n da y by th e e ntire S taff of the Sa nitariu m ,

in con su l tation This brin gs to the service of each patient the skil l and
. ,

ex pe ri ence of the entire S taff .

A physi cian and su rgeon who is al s o a D o cto r of Su ggestive T he ra

,

p e ti d vote s hi en t ir e ti me to th e pa ti ent s an d i s su bj ect to ca ll day

or ni gi t
u c
, e s ,

A trained Nu rse who is al s o e xperien ced in Su ggestotherapy devotes

, ,

her e n tire tim e to the p atien ts ; l iv es in the Sani tariu m an d is su bj ect to call ,

ni g h t or day .

A l l Special Nu rses in the Sanitariu m are u n d er th e direct o rd er of the

San itariu m Physician and the su pervision of the Sanitariu m n u rse .

Special Nu rses and atten d an ts are su ppl ied at co st .

A U X ILIA R Y S U GG E ST I ON S are su pplied throu gh scientific ma s

s ag e h ydroth erapy
,
ph ysical cu ltu re and el abo rate instru ction s that teach
,

th e patient h ow to re l ax both bo dy an d m in d .

Au tom obile rides all d ays ex cepting Su n day when advisabl e for the
, , ,

be n efit of the patient .

M E DICAL TR EATM EN T i s su ppl ied when a p atient deman d s it an d i s ,

admi nistered u n der the dire ct ion of ou r h ou se phy sician by the h ou se nu rse ,

or s om e p ro m inent phy sician in Ne v ad a .

SU R GER Y
We have treated with su ccess m an y cases of gall stones, appen dici tis ,
tu m ors and variou s form s of pelv ic di sorders, by Su ggestothe rapy alone ,
ou r patien ts the dan ger an d expen se of op eratio n s M an y people .

have c om e to u s , after an o peratio n h ad fail e d to stop the pain or dis

com fort and ou r treatm en t and S an itariu m care h av e given l as ting rel ief .

However, there are cases where su rgery offers qu ick relief, with small com
p ara tiv e dan ger I n su ch case s.we rec o mm end op erati o ns Ou r t re atm en t s , .
 befo re and im m e d iate ly after an o pe ratio n m ake the sh ock les s sev e re an d
,

assu m o re rap id recov ery an d m o re ce rtain ty of a c o m plete an d l astin g

r
e
resu t .

We q ipped to do all so rt s of m in or su rg ical work in ou r Sani

are e u
tariu m W e do th is wo rk at the u su al rate s
. .

I N M A JOR OP ER A T I ON S whe n n ece s sa ry we c all in special ists an d

, ,

e x e rt ope rato rs and have th e wo rk do n e in ou r N EW s pecial ly bu ilt o per

p
at i n g roo m or in the ope rat in g roo m s of one of the h o s pital s he re in Nev ad a
, .

I n ca s es o f M ajo r Su rge ry we acce pt n o p art of the fee paid the su r

,

geon and we g e t the lo west po ss ibl e rate s for the bene fit of ou r patients
, , ,

from the su rge on s doing the work

R OOM S —A ll r oom s have o u tsid e windo ws te l e ph one s hot and co ld
.

, ,

water ste am heat el ectric l ight an d acce ss to bath an d toil et on the s am e

, ,

floo r one fo r l adie s an d one fo r gentl e m en to e ve ry fiv e room s

, , .

Every roo m in the S anita riu m is sanita ry and c o m fo rtabl e T ho se wi th .

g re a t e r con v en ie noe s and l u xu rie s natu rally c o st a high er price .

Twenty roo m s have p rivate bath ad joining

M EAL S —
.

T he m en u s are p re pare d by the Diet Co ok and ou r Hou se

Nu rs e s pec ially train ed in food c omb inatio n s and valu e s and are the n
, ,

app rov e d by the staff m e m be rs who t re at the vari ou s patie nts

, .

However an y pe rs o n de siring s pecial food n ot on the daily m enu m ay

, ,

have it re pared and s e rved prov id ed it do es not conflict with th e die t p re

,

scrib ed n his ca s e .

T he charge s for su ch s pecial o rde rs will be base d on the actu al co st of

pro cu ring pre paring an d se rvin g
, .

O U R R A TE S
W e ltm er Sanitariu m p atients are k ept in the San itariu m when po s sible ,

bu t du rin g ove rflo w pe ri od s th e m o re abl e bod ied patien ts are located in

,

ne arby ho m e s bu t all take the ir m e al s fro m the S ani ta riu m D iet K itchen
, .

T he roo m s in ne ar b y h o m e s are p aid for by the S anitariu m and when

-
,

you pay the we ekly b ill rend e re d by the S anitari u m al l charges conn ected ,

with you r treatm e n t room s m eal s an d san itariu m care will be inclu d ed
, , .

T he wee kly rate inclu de s t reatm en t room m eal s and sanita ri u m care, , .

Price l is t and conve nient rail way co nnec tions fu rnished by retu rn mail
witho u t an y c harge .

T he Sanitariu m will fu rnish with ou t charge an I d entificat ion Ed g e

an d th e be s t rail wa y co nne c tio n s to an y atie nt who will write for them .

T he I de n tifi catio n B ad ge will e nable th e tation Age nt of the Sanitariu m

to kn o w wh o m he is to m eet .

T he rail wa y c o n nections will en abl e th e patie nt to kn ow the exact tim e

he will re ach N ev ada s o th at arran g em en ts m a y be m ade in adva nce t o
, ,

g ive th e patie nt the be st po ss ible s ervice f ro m th e m ome n t h e leaves th e

train at Nevad a
.

T h e San itariu m m ake s no charge for co nve ying patien ts and attendant s
from the statio n ex cept where an am bu l ance is requ ired T he ambu l ance
, .

cha rge is
A D EP OSIT is re qu ired coverin g al l charges for one m onth in adv ance
, ,
fo r an y ch ild or he lple ss p atie nt in ou r care .

A n y fu rthe r in fo rm atio n you m ay d e si re will be given yo u u po n re qu est .

 An exten si n o of Su g gestotherapy is the dem ons trati on of su g ges ti o n
thr ou gh
organ of 8
m
the W eltm er
m g on of hands

In stitu te.
T h1 s is a scientific stu dy of the han d as an
.

Ins tru ctio n on this p articu l ar su bj ect can only be had at

Professo r W eltm er delive rs twenty two l ectu res in the series T here are
-
.

thirty th ree h ou rs d evote d to ac tu al Chapel heal ing serv ice

-
T his sh ou l d be .

of es pecial interest to mini sters of the go spel wh o wish to do spiritu al heal

ing in th e ch u rches an d de s ire to accu s tom th em selv es to th e effectiv e rou
,

tine of th is won derfu l Christian m eth od of healing the sick of any condition
that in te rferes with h eal th happ in ess and p rosp erity
, , .

T he com pl e te Clinical Co u rse is arran ge d to teach th e fu ndam ental

principl e s and drill the stu de nts in the te chn iqu e of Su ggestothe rapy in con ,

s altati o n diagno sis treatm en t and bu sines s arrangem ents etc wi th pa

, , , .

T HE SI D E YARD I S AN OT HER SHAD Y P LAC E WH ER E P AT I ENT S EN J OY

T H E W ON DER F U L C LI M AT E W E H A VE H ER E I N N E VADA
. .

tien ts I n this cou rse th e stu d e nt rec eive s su ffici ent prac tical inst ru ctions ,
.

pe rson al drillin g an d clinic al expe rie n ce to en able him to achieve profes

sional , fi n an c ial an d s o c ia l adva n c em ent in th e p rac ti c e of the s ol id and
rap idly gr owin g p rofes sio n of Su gg e stoth erapy .

F or th e pe rso n fu lly in fo rm ed in Su g gestotherapy, this cou rse is an ex

cel l en t review of the e nti re body of l e arnin g incl u d ed in thi s field , and fi ll s
al l gen eral d e m and s for po st g radu ate wo rk
-
.

R e m e m ber, this is a d em o n st ration of what we teach in ou r corres pond

ence C ou rs es I t is a dem o n st ratio n of the p rincipl es of healing
. .

Profess o r W eltm er the o rigi nato r him se lf will be you r teacher

, , .

There are fou r su ch co u rse s e ach ye ar A nd fou r tim es a year we issue

.

a s pecial c ircu l ar d e sc ribin g in fu ll the c o m pl ete p ro ram of th e com ing

cou rse S o write u s for a R e side nt Cl as s Pro gram D
. o this now s o yo u
.
,
m ay arran ge you r tim e acc o rdin gly and be in Nev ada for the next class
, .
PR EPA R A T OR Y C O U R SE IN SU GGEST OT HER A PY
B Y C O R R E S P O N D E N CE
T his C ou r se has be e n writte n to m eet th e n e ed s of stu d en ts all ov er the
world wh o wish only to u nde rstand th e p rac tic al p rinc ipl es and m e th od s
”

which en abl e them to h elp thems elves .

This hom e s tu dy Cou rse is the rsonal wo rk of Profe ss o r W eltm er

his pe rs o n al i n st ruc tio n in Su gg es tot crapy to you .

I n thi s C ou rs e he t e ache s you h ow to give tre atm en ts for s pe cific

di sease s an d h ow to give tre atm ents for gen eral u pbu ildi n g of h ealth,
stren g th , an d vital ity of m in d an d body .

Y OU W ILL FI N D I N P R O F E SS OR W E LT M E R S C O U R S E S TH A T
’

HE TAL K S T O Y OU , TH R O UG H H IS LE SS ON S , JU ST AS IF Y O U
WER E SITT I NG B E F OR E H I M I N H I S P R I VA TE R OOM .

H e m ake s ev e ry ste p e as y fo r you All you have to do is to follow

.

his in s tru ctio n s an d you are s u re to ge t re su lts Wh en he g ives you a

.

l es s on h e re qu ire s you to DO the thin g he is teachin g you Thu s you .

know by actu al te st that you are m aster mg the su bj ect .

Th ere is no grop ing , n o gu ess wo rk Y ou kn ow that you kn ow . .

H e re is a co n de n se d revie w of P rofess or W el tm er s hom e stu dy, Pre

' ’

parato ry C ou rs e in Su g g e s totherapy R e m em be r th at thi s is bu t an ou t

.

lin e an d that it cou ld n ot an d does n ot do’ j u s tice to the con tents of the
C o u rs e , or the qu ality o f P rofe s s or W e l tm er s in stru ctions .

Y o u re ally h ave to s ee th e l e ss o ns fo r you rse lf to appreciate how wo n

derfu l the y are . R e ad th is ou tl in e c are fu lly an d the n m ake u p you r m in d
that you are going to t ake u p this pro fitabl e stu dy at on ce .

T h e C ou rse c o ns ist s of a se ries of s ixte en l e sso n s , inclu din g the in

tro du ct l o n .

T h e first th re e l es so n s tell you h ow to think, how oth e r pe opl e think ,

an d h ow to harm o niz e you r th ou ghts with oth e rs .

T he se c o n d l e s s o n , e s pe cially , d eal s with th e nat u re of the m in d and

ho w it wo rks in c o n t ro l lin g ou r th ou ght s an d act io n s T h e third l e s s o n
.

tel l s you how to m obil ize all of you r th ou gh ts in su ch a m an ner th at you

ca n u se the m m o st e ffe c tiv e l y in he lpin g o th ers .

T he fo u rth l es so n te ach es you h ow to d ire ct yo u r own th ou ght in su ch

a m an n e r th at it wi ll re ac h th e u n d e rst an di n g an d su pply the needs of
th e in di vidu al who ask s for he lp .

T he fifth an d s ixth l e ss o n s te ach m o st effec tively h ow to so state or

e xp re s s in ac tion th e he lp y ou h ave to offe r s o you wi ll in variably secu re
th e right res pon s e o r re su lt fro m you r patie nt .

T he n ext three l e s s on s b rin g in to cl e ar v iew a s y st em atic arran gem ent

of the p rincipl e s of heal in g a s tau ght and practice d by Je su s an d His Dis
c ipl e s , as se t fo rth in the N ew T e s tam e n t part of th e Scriptu res .

Les so ns ten , el e ven an d t we lve d ea l specially with the thre e su b

j ec t s : Ge n e ral T r e a t m e n t ; S p e c if ic T re atm e n t ; a d
n S e lf -
H eal in g T hes e .

l e ss on s are of s pe cial v alu e an d are well worth the price of the en tire
cou rse .

Le sson s thirtee n fou rteen fifte en an d sixteen l ike l ess on thre e are a
, , , ,

s p ecial rev iew c ritically p resen tin g th e m o s t im po rtan t phase s of Su g gesto

,

therapy D efinitio n s of te rm s as well as the application of the princ iples

.

for wh ich th e te rm s st an d r eceive s pec ial atten tion

, T h e l ead in g te rm s
.

de fin ed are be l ief faith and kn owl edge together with the scientific term s
, , ,

which c orre l ate .

T he l aying on of han ds is d efine d both from the B ibli cal and the,

scien tifi c s tan dpo in t to gether with dire ctio ns teachin g how to ap ply the
,

han d s as a su gge stion These fou r l e ss on s will con stitu te a su mm ary and
.

re capitu l atio n of the Cou rse .

 A nu m ber o f practical exam pl e s of the treatm ent of particu l ar ai l
m ent s are 1 nc lu d ed in this series of l e s s o n s .

H OW T HE CO U R S E B E NE FI T S Y O U A N D Y O U R S .

Mo st p e opl e who t ak e this C o u rs e , do s o to ac qu ire the fu nd am e ntal

.

p n l es of Su g ge s to th e rapy, a s 1t is s o sim ply writte n an d i s vita lly in

r1 c 1
p
st ru c t1v e from the first pa ge s to the en d .

Ev e n sh ou ld you h ave n o d e sire to p rac tice Su g ge stotherapy, this

Co u rse W 1 11 be of wonde rfu l val u e to you in c ou ntl ess ways I t wi ll en able
.

" I ET U A ND REST AR E T O B E F O UN D HE RE IN ABUN DANC E .

you to heal you rself or an y m e m ber of you r fam il y of any disease that m ay
al re ady be p re s en t ; al s o to p re ve nt s ickne s s an d su ffe rin g th at m igh t oth er
wis e de ve lop .

This Cou rse will rid a fam ily of sick th ou ght s l eavin g its tim e and ,

en e rg y free fo r su cc e s s in v ario u s u n d e rtakin g s It s aves do ctor bill s M an y

. .

fam ilies have n ot paid a doll ar doc tor bill s in the l ast te n to twenty years
s ince o n e m em be r of th e fam ily took Pr ofes s o r W el tm er s in st ru ct io ns
’
.

T he C ou rs e te ac he s you the h idde n power an d m y ste ries of the m in d

s o th at y o u m ay u se the su btl e tie s of th o u ght in in s tru ctin g others to work
h arm o n iou sly with you fo r the acc om pl ishm en t of the im po rtan t pu rpo se s
of you r l ife s wo rk ’
.

Now you can ge t a d efinite c on den s ed and p ractical Co u rse by Pro

, ,

fe ssor W e ltm er by m ail .

On you r satis facto ry c om pl etion of the C ou rse we give you FR E E , , ,

a h an d s om e c e rtificate wh ich you ca n fram e an d han g i n you r h o m e or

you r office .

S o you can see that the W eltm er I n stitu te is offe rin g you a tru l y g reat
OPP OR T U N IT Y D ec ide to day to take advan tage of it
—
. .

h
T e p ric e of t h e C o u rs e i s v e r y sm all o nly $ 36 A n d you m ay ha ve
.

ea s y terms to pa y fo r this a l ittl e do wn an d a l ittl e eve ry week

, Cou ld any .

offer be faire r W e m ake the p aym ent s so sm all that you scarce]
"

m one y .

W rite u s today for descriptive folder .

 WHAT T HE C OU R S E T EA C HE S Y OU .

T abl e of Conten ts of the Com plete Finis hin g C o u rse b y Corre s ponde nce , ,

1n Ps ychol o gy , Gen eral Phil os o ph y S u gges tive T herape u tic s , ,

and R i ght Livin g .

B y Profess o r S A W eltm er . . .

SEC T I ON l —MI N D Mi d a P w SE C T I O N l l —A PPER C E PT I ON n A pp s er or

A t i i ty f M ind A ti
o
I fl Li f St t ral A o
. . . . .

T h g htou an c d cep ti
v o i c on an ve n u e n ces n e. ru c u
f T h g ht T h P we th t H a l ti ity in H
.

R ac ti
e on o ou li g e o ea n
T h A ti y A
r a e s. v
I t n ables yo to de el p the p o t
. .

e Fa t
c in Eve m p lis hm
c or t Se ti v er cco en c on e u v o s
vati n
.

s a
ti n 1 in t rod u
usa o you to the t dy f e f gen al b
ces s u o rs o er o ser o .

SE C T I ON 1 2 —M EM O RY P
c

T HE K I N G D O M
ides P
SE C T I ON 2 Fi di g f ct I d a l f W k f Heali g C n t F i l r . . ov er
-
n n
V i wp i t of Je n a no a
. .
e e or or o
W P Ge ner l Uti l ity
.

th K ingd m
e o I a se e o n su s . n c re
f P w
he ly T r sted
U ity of
.
p n ro er u . a .

o o S l C er. i ou o n sc ou sn ess . n
Pw o P s ibi lity f P f ti n H w to T inin g Wh t it R ally i
e r. o s o er ec
bt in C o m p l ten
o o e s.
ra a
.
,
o a e ess .
Secti n i t t ac he yo to se you r m esa o e s u u
S tion 3 t a hes an
ec nd tan din g
e c f th y as a p e fe t facu l ty u e rs o e or r c
f Nat ral Law in h u man l i f
.

1 8 —FA C ULT Y OF PHY SI C A L

p ra ti
o e on

SEC T I ON 8 —T H E I N FI NI T E
o

U i
u
SE C T I O N
e. '

C O NT R O L M f D term in i g N m l
.

l n v e rsa
S b ta c f Mi d a d M t
.
th d .
e o o e n or a
A
.

u s I t
n e R l ati n e r- e on
I m po ta ce to Su gg ti ni t o n
Th n a
G d d E il T h P t ti l P w ti on . r n es o s e
.

c
H li g M n t l F
.

ter oo an v e o en a o er
C h i t P hi l P y ch l
. .
ce ea n e a or
f M
.

o T han . p hy e r s o so s
p in cip l e
H a li g
o
S ti n i t t h y u th f.
ec o eac es o e r s o
l f h lin g a d el f m a te y
o gy d R l i g i n i n R l ti
an e t o e a on o e n
you a P hil f Li f
.
se - ea n s - s r .

S ti on 3 gi
ec p hy ves o so
—
o e.
—
SEC T I ON 4 C O N S C I O U SN E SS C S E C T I O N 1 4 R E S P O N SE T O S U G G ES
t l
O M P M o n ro
.

Li f M n C n
. .

i g I fl T I N t h d f U se h y i a l t l e o o s c en a
i C i
M f
'
n n u e n ce n o n sc o u s
O
,
e a s o . .

Pw Val K w
.

i
sc o u s o f C er i d uer a l A n y
o
u t id e I l ce
o n sc ou s
E ff c
no an o . s n u en e

O r Means f r lik p
.

l d ge i g In
the po w f l
e . u o res s n n er
P w ro e S ctio n 14 t a h se of di e e c es er u u

4 en abl e you to d v l p P rson

.

S ti ec on t s nd indi ct to gg t i n e e o e rec a re au -su es o .

S E C T I ON M an i f
al i ty
15 ta
SEC T I ON 5 —S PI RI T U AL C O N SC I O US
.
es
M th d f U Phy i l M ta l and
.

ti ons. o s ca en
Val f U d t di g K n wl dge M ral Va l
e o se
I n t iti nal D i gn i
. . .

N ESS ue o n er s a n n In o e
A tt ined M an C t i g Li nk wit h th
o ue u o a os s .
t K
. . .

wl dge
’
a st iti al S p
o n n ec ki g I nh n e u on ea n e re n no e
in the id n ti fi ation
. . .

I fi ite
n n S ti 15 i t y
Se tion 5 nabl s N u to reali
ec on ass s s ou e c
in t itiv
.

e a d unan i e
f t im p l es n
f t I di idn li ty
c ze o ru e u e u s .

— L P A Y
n v 1
es
O
.

S E C T I ON 6 — T HO UGH T M t h d f Di S E C T I N 1 6 T E E T H O m nip e r s
f Mi d Et h i W ves Th A t l
' . .

. . e o o
e n ce o n er c a e s ra
e ti n g an d I te i fyi n g T h g h t T h Pr
M A
. .

r c n ns ou e o
f M ag E ff t U p n t h
C ti th d f U tti t d f
.

p o nce on e o o se u e o
d ti ti m
f T l p t h ic M A
. .

uc on o ne s ec o e
E ffect B i C ll E f R iv S d tti t d f
.

g en er o e e a e ssa e s. u e o
N Sy t m
e rv ou s s e
Hea lin g Acq i ing S l f R li
.
M di m f T
on
mi i
ra n
M thod
e s .

ece e r. e u o ra n s ss o n . e
f Rece p t i n f M es ag V
.

fi cacy i n u r e - e a n ce
al f T l
. .

o o s es ue o e e
A p p l i ati n in Ab n t
o
6 t a h th
.

S ti ec on y n tu e c p s es ou e a re , roces ,
p at hy c o se
gh t
f M n tal
” in n t ol a d f Th
.

r se . co r n u se o ou
th
.
Se ti n 1 6 tea h
S EC T I ON 7 — P ER C E P T I ON D iff n ti i t h g p r cess c o c es e o o e
'
ere
b tw
. .
n e rc an e.
ti S n ti l d I t it i l on a an n u on a
PO SI T I VE AT T IT UDE
a on e ee n e sa
P p t R lt f
r ece s. T i i
n ng E
es uff t f S E Co T I O N l 7 — ra ec s o
P pti Up th P g s f th I di d U c
. . .

er ce on on C i e ro i re s i Su b
o e n o n sc o u s an n o n sc ou s ex erc se.
id l Th S lid F dati n f r M m y j ti Ph ou n P hy i l gical Ph se T he o e or ec ve ase s o o a
S g g t the p i t A ttit d
v ua e o o
d v l pm
. . . .

S ti 7 t h th p e eac t es roc s s , e e o en u e s o- ra s u e
ble y t ev l e a fo ce
ec on e
b rva ti
.

an d l f k n
va u e o ee S ti o se 17 on . ec on en a s ou o o v r

SE C T I O N 8 C O N C E P T I O N M t l I f l p n a l i ty en a n
u e rso .

f th A t Di ff b twe e
-

A T T I T UDE
.

P A SSI VE
.

a g es o l e ti t i c u a SEC TI ON 18 er e n a on e n
Pw R P y h lo g i a l P s ivity Di f f
.
. .

S ensa ti d I t it i a l C o ept
on an n u l f on nc s o er
f M m
u e o r. s c o c as er
b
.

d U
.

o f C pto n ceS p p li t s y P u t w n th
es s or e o ( h l t ed lt de or er
H li g an n cu u re
e n ce e ee i ur
.

A
e
M
.

f t I d al
ec f e s or ea
i d Th n tti t d f th On R c i i n g n u e or e e e e v
H
e
.
.

S ti n 8 h l p y
ec o i m ki g e pe ri n ce
e s al i g ou n a n x e

t ib te to y
e n
abl s y p lace you rsel f
.

con r u s cce ou r S ti n 1 8 u ss .
t ec o en e ou o
SEC T I ON 9 R E A SO N D d cti nd i t n wi th th I fi i t e u on a n u e e n n e.
f E v id
-
. .

I dn
P cd
ti n
uc S
Pu p
o
f R
.
M th d f
o u r ce s
S E C T I O
o
N 1 9 — R E S I S T A N T A
e n ce .
T T I T U D ES
e o o

f R
ni g Pr d t
O
.

ro e u re . r o se o eas o n o uc
M t F lty
. .

i g i n ta U f R i sta nce r o es i s n ce . se o es
J dgm Th
R i t nce
.

u t en e as e r acu
f N
.

U
.

se o on - es s a
Se c ti o n 9 t each es yo u to do the righ t
.

Sectio n 1 9 teache s you the secret of har

th in g at th e ri gh t tim e
— O C on tro l in e e ry W LL
.

v m o n y in e v ery day li e f .

SE C T I N 1 0 I
D Lf H O A T T ENT I ON
— M
. .

SE C T I N 20 odes of
'
e p a rtm en t o f i e Vo l itio n in e a li n g
H P M M P A
. .
.

a p p iness an d ros per ity a atte r o f an s

’
E x p re ss io n ass i v e a nd ctive U se F i x
A D
. . .

C h o ice a tio n o f tte n ti o n irect C o n sciou s R es u lt

f f P A
. .
.

Se ction 1 0 t h l -di re ctio n se l C au ses o f ass ive tt e n tio n

b
e a e s yo u se
f
c .
.

e x erti o n an d s e l -re lian ce I n c reased in i ti Sect ion 20 e n a les you to re act to im part
v ff
.

ati e an d e icien cy . a n t ex pe rien ces .

 Phy s ica l Mental Valu e
a nd A M eans of

A V v
.

“
Pu m a
of dm itted a lu e i n M em C o n e yi n g T hou g h t
i t nabl
er
H A
.
.

ory T rain i n g
"
I n M en tal ea lin g Mo Sectio n e yo to es u the p ro m
re al ise

U M Lf
. .

mentary A ct sed E v ery o m en t in i e ise in M ark and to in terp re t th e p ro

b
. .

Section 2 1 en a les you to o v ercom e las i ce ss in to te rms of m ode rn sci e n ce

—
.

ness. su s tain en th u s ia sm a n d secu re de fin SEC T I N 82 O T R EAT ENT G EN E R AL M

b M A P P
. .

ite resu l ts fo r you r l a o r e th o d o f pp licati on o sitio n o f ati e n t

L
. . .

SE C T I ON Sou rce o f 22 —I N T EN T I ON en g th of T im e o f T reatm e n t E ssen tial

M A A
.

P A V it
. .

ower
’
a l E le m e n t o f Su g ge stion is t s e n tal t titu des pp lies to Gene ral Dis .

P
.

R em edy E sse n tia l to atien t s

'
R ecov e ry
M
. .

e thod o f U se Section 83 ex plains the p rocesses for re

b b
.
'

Sectien 22 en a les you to im u e e very vi talh tu g e very tiss u e of you r patien t s

thou g ht wi th dyn am i c powe r
SEC T I ON 2 8 — S U GGES T I ON A to S g
.

SE C T I N 88 OS EC I F I C T R EAT E NT —P M
M A L
. .
u - u
d m ini stration en gt h o f T i m e
. .

e th od o f
g tion
es H t S g g ti I ndi t I fl e ro-
Of A
.
e u es on . rec n u
V il d S s
.

o f T reau nen t &rgg es ti on fe re d p p lies

nce Di t U I t d
f
. .
e re c se . a ra v a e or e e u
Sp i f D i ti M th d f
.

g sti on
e ec ic r ec on. e o o
to S p eci i c D isorder s .

Awak n i g P w A ti I n flu Secti on 88 teaches you t o fo cu s the hee l

.

El m en t
e
t ib t i g F
n i g o er . c on. e nc n
f
in g o rces u po n l ocali sed diso rde rs
e C ltie Sp i l on r n acu s. ec a
— LF A M
.
u
Valu f Sp k W itt O
.

o d T l p thi en . SE C T I N 84 SE T R E T ENT Me
A
e o r en an e e a c
M d f R pti n L w f M
. .

S gg ti
u es o n s. thod o f dm in istr atio n Su cceedi n g e n tal
A A f
o e o e ce o a o
A ti n Hi d A ti n A id t A
. .

t tt itu de s R e m edy l ways E fectu al Ph y

Ab
c o n ran ce o c o s o o
M f E ff i g E ff t
. . . .

ti no an ne r C o ac n ec s . au se s ic ia n Nev er se nt
f all A t ivi ty i Li f M tal nd Phy
. .

o n Se ction 84 teaches you to di rect you r in

f
c en
b
e. a
sim l V l Th P i pt i n f th S g he re n t orc es to th e u p u ildi n g of m en tal
ff
a ue e r es cr o o e u
B t Ally
.

g ti n i t Th S l m an d p hysi cal e ici en cy

'
es o s e a es an s es
S ti n 28 gi v —AB
.

A M
. .

ec y a w kin g kn wl d g
o es ou or o e e SEC T I N 85 O SEN T
'
T R E T ENT
M A
. .

of th e o nl y p o wer that yo u can l egitim a te ly e n ta l ttitu de o f Su g ges tot he rapis t M en

A P M A
.

u se to con trol othe r s. ta l t titu de o f atie n t e thod o f d m in

24 —F OR GI VE NFA SS P
.

SEC T I N O o we r
istratio n S u rety o f Su ccess l e g al Sta tu s
P V P f A W
. . .
. . .

R e ward hys i cal a lu e R e lat ion to Heal Sec tio n 85 ex plain s ro essor 8 e lt
B
. .
. .

in g T he ib lica l T r iad m e r s m e thod of u til iz in g his m ost che rished

’

b f
. .

Sec ti on 24 e na les you to m ak e ailu re o r dis co ve ry .

di se ase con tribu te to h eal th or su ccess S E C T I N 88 O HY N T I S Errb odies P O M

P P
.

A GR M
.

SE C T I N 2 5 O
EE ENT e n er a l G o n ly a Sm al l a rt o f th e he nom e n a p ro
M
. .

U se P rodu cts T he I n i tia ti ve e n ta l A o~

du ced by Su gg estion Hy p n oti sm an d Su g
H ff
.
. . .

tiv ity in e al in g T he Su g g e st io nist s R e

'
ge sti o n D i e re n t iated Esse nt ials to Pro
M A
.
.

l iance du ctio n E s se n t ial e nta l tt itu d es R e la

P
. .

b
.

t io n to N atu r a l Slee p De g rees hy s ica l

Se ct io n 25 e n a les you to re al is e the prom
M M
. .

ise m ad e in M att S ta ge s e n tal Sta ge s Su gge stio n s ost

v M P b
. .
.

R e adi ly R ec e i ed
SE C T I N 26 — ER O ethod of E x PRAY M M
C o n ditio n
A
ad e oss i le.

A
H A P by e n ta l tt i tu de g ree m e nt E sse n tia l
. .

n swe r
b L
.

p ress i o n ind ran ce to

.

hysica l C o rrec ti o n o f B ad Ha its

H A A e n g th o f T im e
. .

nswer to Praye r
ff v F G Hb
.

ea l t h C o n stan t P o r
P A A E ec ti e T he o rm i n g of ood a its
.

l wa ys n swe red
P M M P B
.

T he r ay er T ha t is
.

cess hy s ical e n ta l and

b oral hase s
.

f
e ne
.

W K
. .

Section 28 en a les you to re al ize th e p resu wen t he n R i g ht ly Di rec te d no wl edg e

M P
.

ls e in J ame s 18 .
N eces sary to ake ra ctica l
A b b
.

SEC T I N 27 - S O
EST I VE T HER UGG Sectio n 86 en a les yo u to p rohi i t or p re
B A
.

P EU T I CS as i s of ctio n IN ndam en ta l du ce hyp n osis

M A SE C T I ON 87 —H YPN OT I SM IN DAI LY
.
. .

Doctri ne ethod of dm in istration of

P M LI F E I m p t n ce F m Unq li fi d A o
.

R e m edy hys ical and en tal V alu e

0
Phr or a
M
or s ua e
D n ge f an A pt d I d
. . . .

si ca l and et a p hy si ca l R e l atio ns N atu re s

’
-
pt a n ce . a
M
ce r o cce e ea .
T ke P
.

et h od o f H eal in g H w t I d On t i n f
f b
o o n u ce e o a osse ss o o
B i t h ig h t f P w
.

Section 27 gi v es yo u the s cien ti i c asis Th i e r r r o o er .

fo r the u se o f all he al in g power S ti ec 87 abl s y
on to h an g f men e ou c e ro
S lf M a t y
.

SEC T I N O
C ENT ER S 2 8 —N E RVE
n it U Sl a y t
ve r o e - s er .

SE C T I ON 88 —M A GN ET I SM Ph il p h
. .

o f N erv e Str u ctu re N erv e Stim u l i as a o so

b M
. . .

Su g ge s tion I n s tru m en t s o f Em odied ind i l Id

ca C mmo e a. Co n cepti M an fl
o n on. e uv
b M th d f D m n t ati n O ig i
. .

Se ction 2 8 e n a le s you to correlate Phy i m

u e o o e o s r o r n.
P M g ti m —Vit l A im l d Per n l
. .

sio l ogy an d sy ch o lo gy a ne s a n a an so a
M App l i at i
. . .

S EC TI N 29 O
I N T UT T I ONA L DI AG e
f h n sn i ssi n
an s o
' '
a Re r o . c on.

O P P P
.

ts
N SI S ower
su
u rp ose os ses sed Es
M A L 88 t a h e y u h w to d
. .

S ct i l p
.

e on e c s o o eve o a
se n ti al
R eq u i re d
e n tal ttit u de en gt h of
h y s ica l C o ndi tion o f R ece iver P
tim e .

Mag ti P ne ality
c e rs on .

M SE C T I ON 89 —T H E C ON SC I O US F A C
. .

T he Su g g estion ist s '

e thod o f D iag n os is
b U LT I E S OF M I ND M t l
.
.

Section 28 en a les yo u to an al yse the m en R l ti n t e a o o en a

S i n ti fi T h in ki g Re lt f
.

tal state of you r patie n ts P

F
. oces ses . c e c n . su s o

SEC T I O N 80 I R TI N E ffacin t VB A O t se .

v M Vb A Sect io n 89 teaches you ho w to

. .

re la te yo u r"
De s tru cti e
actio n
en tal i r atio n s ctio n
Su g ge stio n i st s m ean s for Co n ey
Re
'
. .

v se l f
to you r en vi ron m en t .

H — U
.

in g T ho u g ht ar m o n y .

v SE C T I N 40 O
T HE N C N SC I S F AC O OU
OF M
.
.

Sec tion 80 gi es you an in si ght in to th e I ND R e latio n Con

m yste ries o f ein g b .
U LT I E S
sc iou s F acu lties l a ws o f ct io n
to
R u les fo r
.

A
SE C T I N 81 —T H E O LAY G R
. .

IN ON OF e la ti o nshi p B e twee n the C o nsc io u s

'

U se
A M b F U F
. .

H NDS e n ta l C o n t ri u tin g acu lt ie s and n con sciou s acu lt ies

M A M A
. . .

e thod o f pp l icatio n e thod o f ction Sectio n 40 acq u ain ts you with you r u n con
A U
. .

Natu ral I m p u lse Len gth o f T ime sed . . sciou s facu l ties an d th eir u n l im i ted ac tiv ity .
 O
S EC T I N 41 T H I N I N A N D K G SE C T I N 44 — O T HE I O SO OF PH L PHY
O GH V A H G f
. .

TH U T alu e H o w to U se Co n T E C IN " u a l i icat io ns o f the T m c he r

v v F
. . . . .

st ru c ti e T hou g h t De st ru ct i e T hou g h t ir s t I n st ru ct io ns T he I m p or ta n t T h i n g s
R O W M P P A
. . . .

e la t io n t o Eac h t he r a nd t he o r ld e th od o f re se n tat io n e rso n a l tt it u de

Ob
. . .

Sec tio n 41 teac h es yo u ho w to th in k in T h e T e ache r s De p e nde n ce T e a c he r s

’ '
li
f P
.

ha rm on y wi th the I n i n ite
f gg
P ti il s iilfo r k
’
u rpose a rio n Ess e n t ial to
g
a
g
. e

I D EAT I O N
.

M ki g i
.

S E C T I O N 42 — a n Po s u cce s s c m p l t i0 “
ib l G t A h i v m t T h H ig h
.

“l
. .

s e re a c e e e n s. e es t o f S e ction te aches
A ll M t l P
en a M t h d f it
roce s ses . e o or s U se q u e s ti o n s .

wi th "
.

Se ctio n 43 W “ h" b Pre v N - S E C T I O N 45 E XT EM P O R A N E 0 s U

m in e " fo r m AK G M A
.

i t M fl h S PE IN e n ta l t tit u d e N ecessar y
O B L Df M
.

S E C T I N 43 — E I E F
.

e i n i t io n Co n F acu l tie s o f in d E m p lo yed P re p ar ati o n

U B f v M P P
. . . . .

sc io u s a nd n co n sc io u s e l ie T e n ta ti e e th od of ro ced u re os it ion an d Ge s
U f B f A f D
. .

a nd n q u a li ied e l ie H o w to cq u ir e t u re s I n l ec ti o n a nd Ehn p has i s es i re

K R B f H R
. . . .

n o wled g e e su lt o f F i x ed e l ie s Es I n ter e s t T ru st ind ra n ces esu lt s to

H R A
. . . . .

se n t ia l in ea l i n g S pe ake r e l at io n of S peake r to u d ie nce

b v
. . .

Sec tio n 48 e n a l es y ou to p ro e all th in gs Se cti o n 45 t each es you ho w to al ways be

f
to h o ld as t to th a t whi ch is goo d . b
at e ase a n d a le to talk o n an y s u j e ct b .

ADDE D FEATU R ES
A ttached to e ach of the se forty five sect io n s is a l ist of qu estion s tha t -

e ach stu d e nt an swe r s an d sen d s in o n bl anks fu rn ish ed with th e c ou rse .

These qu e stion pape rs are c orrecte d B Y I N S E R T IN G T H E C O R R EO ,

T I ON S I N R E D I NK T he pape rs are grade d an d retu rne d to th e stu den t

.

for fu rt he r c o n sid e ratio n T he se c o rr ec te d qu e stion pape rs c o n stitu te a com

.

p l e te se t of b ri e f n ote s f o r f u tu re re fe re n ce .

T he l ife tim e s erv ice by c o rre s pon d e n ce g ive n to s tu d ents of ou r C o r ,

respo n d e nce D e p artm e n t an d th e pl ain sim pl e l an gu a ge u s ed m ak e it ea s y

, , ,

for any one who can u n d ers tan d wh at he read s in the n ews pa pe rs to
, ,

su cc ee d in th e s tu d y of this c o u rs e .

T he stu dy o f the C ou rs e invariably be c o m e s ve ry in terest in g a nd fas

cin atin g be cau se e ach l es so n en abl e s th e stu d ent to do s o m eth in g new th a t ,

he had n ot bee n abl e to do be fo re .

T he followi n g de scri b ed te xt boo k is fu rn ish ed a s a part of the C o m

p l e te C o rre s po n dence C ou rse
PR A C T I C E OF S U GG E STIV E TH ER A P E UT I C S by Ernest W e lt ”
,

m er D S T
, . bou n d in fl ex ibl e l eather 6 55 page s siz e 6x 9 inches abo u t
. .
, , , ,

word s This m anu al is fu lly illu strated h avin g 3 16 line a n d half

.
,

tone cu ts and 4 fu ll page colo r pl ates

, .
 PR O FE SSI ONAL R E COGNI TI ON
T he Am erican Su g e stiv e Thera peu tical As s ociati on acce pts as m em
bers an y one who su pp es su itabl e references an d sati sfac tory evidence that
'

the y hav e gradu ated from the stu d y of the Com plete F in ishing C orrespon d
ence C ou rs e of the W eltm e r I ns titu te T he Am erican Su ggesti ve T herapeu .

tical As sociatio n is an organiz atio n which holds annu al c onventions pu b ,

li sh e s a m onthly Jou rnal and is devo te d entirely to the adva ncem en t of the
general interest of the profe ssion .

BE NE FI T S T O Y O U
This Cou rse teaches you right livin g so you wi ll kn ow how and be able ,

to tell others how to thi nk e xe rci se wo rk re st e at d rink b reathe and

, , , , , , ,

e li m i n ate so th ere wi ll al way s be n orm al fu nc tion in m i n d an d body wi th a

,

su rpl u s of en erg y an d v itali ty u ni m p aired by i n te rn al disse ntio n .

T he C ou r se teaches how to l earn an d ho w to effectu ally teac h wh at is

le arned How to unde rstand the th ou ghts th at cau se othe r people to do
the v an ou s thin g th e y do and how to teac h the m to ch an ge thei r tho u ght s
so th e y will do the thin gs th ey ou ght to do This ability is in v alu abl e .

wheth er l eadin g an arm y or developing and u n foldin g a chi ld s mi nd or ’

,

leadi n g a chi ld or adul t away from the bo ndage of variou s bad habits in ,

clud in g fea r an d v ice I t is al so v alu abl e in sell in g on e s services to th e ’

or to s ell m e rch an d ise —

.

sick o r to an y othe r e m ploy er

, , in fac t where v e r
su c ce ss d e pen d s en ti rely upo n the a bility to cau s e peo pl e to thin k thos e
thou ghts which res u l t in res pons ive acti o n .

Pu rcha sers of this Cou rse have the privile ge of attendi ng the residen t
Clin i cal Cou rse h ere at Nevad a for the pers on al de m onstration of what
, ,

t he y l earn in the correspo nden ce Cou rse .

R e m em ber m an y su cce sfu l Su gg e stoth erapists h ave had n othin g but

ou r corre s pon enc e Co u rse i n s tru ctio ns Ho wever the am ou nt paid for .
,

the co rre s po nde nc e Co urse stand s as a perm an ent credit toward payme nt
of tuitio n te xt books and school ch arge s in the pe rs on al resident cl as ses
, , .

Fu rthe rm o re the co rres pondence Cours e Ce rti ficate of Gradu atio n en

‘
,

titl e s its l egal holde r to thre e m o n th s adv an ce sch ol arship stan din g in ’

pers on al cl asse s .

A 1 00 PER CE NT I NVE ST ME NT
This Cou rse enabl es you as it has othe rs to earn and save m o re from
, ,

the p racti ce of Su gg estotherapy th an you can e arn an d sav e at you r ,

re gu l ar wo rk .

Not o n ly will it pay for itself in a very sho rt tim e it will sav e you ,

its co st m an y tim es ove r in the si ckn e ss you will be abl e to avoid th rou gh ,

the ex ce pti ona l ins t ru ct ion you receive .

Un less you pay for it n ow you will pay for it again and again ev ery
, ,

year of you r li fe by tryin g to l ive withou t it

, .

B UT B Y S U BS C R IBIN G F OR THE CO U R S E Y OU A R E ENT IT LE D ,

T O A LI F ET I ME S E R VI C E OF O U R C OR R E S PONDEN CE D EPA R T
MENT Thi s featu re alo ne is wo rth m any tim es over th e pri ce of the
.

c ou rse .

T HE SM ALL P R I CE O F TH IS M ASTE R C O UR SE

T he p rice of th is com pl ete cou rse is $ 1 2 0 p ay able in sm all m on thly ,

in stallm ents .

Or by p ayin g cas h in adv an ce it is $9 0 Y OU SA V E $ 30

—
.
, .

Th is is ou r M AST ER C OU R S E by corre spo ndence the Cou rse all ,

stu de nt s in te re s te d in this field ultim ate ly en roll for an d s tu dy It is com .

pl ete i n ev ery d etail

, . .

I ts val u e to you cann ot b e estim ated A n d it will incre as e in valu e .

to you, ye ar by year .
 So if you are tru l y am bitiou s to su cceed in life if you want to choose
,

a professi on whi ch will en able you to h e al th e sick a s well as p ro s pe r

,

in a mate rial way th en this C om pl ete fi ni sh in g C ou rse is th e C ours e you

,
shou ld enroll for

Health—"for you rsel f you r fam il y and for those you com e in contact
.

with in you r daily life .

Su ccess and Pr o sperity All th ese thin gs are within you r gras p
. .

So do n ot wait I f you h av en t an enrollm e nt bl ank h andy write for

’

T ODAY
.
,
one. .
 H OM E M ET HO D OF H E ALI NG .

F or the be n efit of the f

a fli c t ed w h o are u n able to c o m e to N ev ad a fo r

re gu l ar S an it ariu m he ali n g ca re an d att en tio n P rofe s s o r Weltm e r h as fo r

, , ,

the p ast twen ty fiv e ye ars exten ded a s pec i al s e m c e c alled the H om e

-
, ,

M ethod of H eali n g .

This m ethod or s ervi ce o ri gin ated with P rofe s so r Welt m e r in the early
, ,

years of his ca ree r as a P s ycholo gi st an d duri n g the past twenty nv e ,

-

years thou sand s of suffe rers in al l p arts of the wo rld h ave thu s re ceived
, , ,

help and h eal i ng .

To expl ain the Operation of thi s m ethod

M an has c ont rol of h is physic al fo rce s ju st in propo rtion to his u n
derstan din g of the Law of Lif e an d it s m an n er of ope ration His body
,
.

becom e s stro n ger an d he alth ie r as he obeys the l aw an d we ake r and m ore ,

di se ased as he di sobeys it .

T he Law of Life oper ate s thr ou gh al l thi ngs wheth er for the pu rpo s e ,

of bu ildi n g up bodily ti s su e or for e li m i nati n g di s e as e or alleviatin g p ai n

, . .

W hen m an h as pl ac ed h im self wi th out the p ale of thi s l aw he fin d s it ,

extrem ely difficult to get back to he alth agai n Di s e ase and p ai n are re g .

iste re d upon his phy si c al o rgan i sm an d he c ann ot u se th e e xe cutive p art of

hi m self—the W ill—to set him self fre e
,

H ere is wh ere you r Teach er and He al er com es in .

T he pu rpo se of the Te ache r an d He ale r is to i nst ru ct the p atien t s o he

will kn o w h ow to live in h arm on y with thi s Law of Life which if pr ope rl y , ,

observed will e nabl e him to u se this po wer for the upbui ldi n g of hi s body
.

.
,

A s a Te ache r he le ad s him i n to a kn o wled ge of th is l aw A s a He ale r

. .
,

h e u n ite s him in thou ght an d pu rpo se with the Law .

The He ale r n ot be in g affl i cted can thi nk the ri ght thou ght The su f
, , .

fe re r can as su m e the rec eptive attitu de toward the He ale r Then whe n the .
,

two m i n d s a gree wh ateve r is de s ired by the m in the way of he ali n g i s

do n e u n to them of the F athe r whi ch is in H eaven
,
“
S ee M atthew .

Thi s agre e m e n t of two m i nd s i s the c on di tio n u n de r whi ch the La w of

Life take s ef fe ct a g ai n h avi ng be e n t ran s gre s s ed So we m ay s ay th at the
, .

ag re e m e n t i s th e form al c aus e of he ali n g but the re al the effi c ie n t ca u s e , ,

is th e h arm on i z in g of the p atie n t with the Law of Life F o r whe n eve r .

,

you r attitu de to wa rd the Po we r th at Heal s is the p rop er one the re su lts ,

you wish for an d ask for are attai ned .

Thi s Ho m e M eth o d of H eali ng has accom pli shed wonde rful re su lts du r
in g th e p a s t t we nty fiv e ye ars
-
E ach ye ar added expe rience h as e n abl e d
.

P rofe sso r W eltm er to in c re as e th e ben efit s to his p ati ent s u n til now , ,

th rou gh the rev i sed an d en l arged i n stru ction s he is able to help all cas es ,

a cc epted for tr eat m en t in s o m e s ub s tan ti al way

, A n d in m o st cases l astin g .

hea lth h as been r estored .

Y O U R HE ALTH A ND HA PP I NE SS .

The Law of Life whi ch works in al l thi ngs is the way to the Power
, ,

th at keep s you b reathi n g keep s you r he art be ati n g an d keep s you liv in g
, ,

wh ile you are asleep or whe n you are u n co n sciou s

, .

It is the sam e Po we r whi ch co nti nue s to hold life in you r body even
wh en you are m su ch suffe rin g th at you can actu ally wish for de ath .

P rofe ss or Weltm er who h as h elp ed thou sand s to h ealing who were in

,

gre ate st pam and m is ery b ecau se of his u nde rstan di n g of the Law of
E i; e s ay s :
l ,

,
“
Y o u can do wh at I do whe n you kn ow what I know , .

A n d I can te ach yo u wh at I kn o w .

Profe sso r W eltm e r s gre at ex p eri enc e covering twenty fiv e years
’
,
-
,

ju stifie s him in thi s conte ntion .

 Aside fro m the gene ral ins tru ctio ns which are se nt to ev e ry patie nt ,
Pro fes sor Wel tmer dictates additional ins tru ctions, which, fro m his exten s iv e
kno wled ge o f cas es, assis ts in secu rin g qu ick and permanent re s u l ts .

T he applicant fo r treatm e nt is fu rnish ed with a di ag no sis blank , which

he is re qu 1red to care fully fill ou t T he pati en t is then giv en re po rt b lan ks
.

and instru cte d to re rt his co ndi tion at leas t o nce a week, and as m u c h
o ftener as he m ay esire I n thi s way Professor W eltm er keeps in clo se
.

tou ch with hi s p ati ents and is ac qu ain ted with ea ch new dev e l op m en t i n
the co nv al escing st ages .

PR OF E SS OR W ELT MER W ILL G IVE H I S EXP ER T O P IN IO N ,

FR EE OF CH ARG E ON T HE CA SE OF AN YONE F ILLI NG OUT A ND

,

R ET U R N I NG T HE DIA GNO SIS S H EET .

I F Y OU W A NT OR NEE D HE L P
I f you are su fferin g from sickness if you are u nhappy de res se d o r
, ,

u n su cces sfu l then Y O U W AN T T O DO S OM ETH I NG TH A T W

, L TAK E
Y O U OUT OF T H I S C ONDIT I ON Y ou nee d the H o m e M e tho d of Healin g
.

Som etim es a sick pers on gets tem po rary rel ief whi ch make s the af ,

fl iction en du rable from sou rces that do n ot offer com plete heali ng
, .

It is not necessary to disc ontinue an y h elp you m ay be rec eivin g T h e .

B ene fits of the Hom e Method o f Heal in g C A N B E A DDE D to an y he l p yo u

are now rece ivin g .

Wh en beg innin g thi s treatm ent patient should start in with the
, th e
de termination to co ntinue u nti l he is h ealed .

M an y of Profess or W elm er s patients have been h eal ed in two wee ks

'
’
,

bu t in s om e rare case s it h as re qu ired fro m three to s ix m o nths to ge t

perm anent resu l ts .

T h e v ery fi rs t step is to fill ou t sign an d retu rn a DIA GNO SI S

,

BLANK Ge t P rofes sor W el tm er s exp ert opi n ion F R E E "

.
’

Then if he feel s that hi s treatm ent will help and heal you h e will te ll
, ,

yo u so f rankly
—
.

T he ch arge for the H om e Tre atm ent S ervice is $5 pe r m onth a v e ry

sm all ch ar e for a Se rvice whi ch inc lu de s ge ne ral ins tru cti on follo wed u p ,

wi th fou r etters of special in stru ction s .

This fee of $5 a m o nth is on ly a no m in al one and m u ch les s than

m edical tre atm en t A ND I F R E S U LT S C O U NT F O R A NYTH IN G I T IS
.
, ,

THE B E ST T H A T C A N B E HA D A NY WH ER E AT A NY PR I CE .

S o write Profe ss or W eltm er toda y Tell him you r p robl em s you r ill s
,
.
, .

Profe ssor W eltm er can help you A dd ress .

,

P R O FE S SOR S A W E LTME R D S T
. .
, . . .
,

Nev ada M isso u ri , .

 HE LPF UL B OO K S .

B y Pro fess o r S idn ey A W el tm e r D S T .

'

, . . .

R e ge neration T he pio neer book teachin g th e bene fi ts of con sciou s

.

contr ol of the m o rtal li fe pri nci pl e This won derful book whi ch has at . ,

tracte d world wide attentio n was fi rst pu blishe d in“ 1 89 8 w”as rev“ised and
-
, ,

enl ar ged in 1 908 by addi ng two ch apters entitle d Courage and I C an ,

.

It al so has an appendix givin g de finite di rection s for att ainin g lo ngevity .

R e gen eration is n ow in its twe nty six th editi o n and the 1 37 th thou
“ ”
'

s an d . I t is bou nd in flexi ble bl ack m orocco l eather with stai ne d ed ge s ,

r ou n d c orners and i s s tam ped in g old

, H as a h alf to ne of th e autho r op .

po site the titl e page .

Mail ed postpaid to an y p art of the

“
Day D re am s is a book of in s pi ratio n of parti cu l ar in te rest fo r th e
, ,

you n g as well as for the m atu re thinki n g pe rso n I t sho ws how a thou ght
, , .

h ol ds the in div i du al th rou ghou t li fe and it shows how and why certai n
su gges tio ns rec eived in e arly l ife cau s ed twelve of the wo rld s grea te s t
’
,

m en an d wo m en to achieve their am bitio ns .

Thi s book is beautifully boun d an d illu strate d I t im presse s you with

—
.

th e on e i dea j u st ho w to m ake an ide al m an i fes t .

Pri ce po stp aid

,

T h e He al in g H an d i s a book of ove r two hu nd red p age s an d tell s

”
, ,

th e s ecret of al l he ali n g I t de scribe s in deta il the th ree fold m etho d of -

h ea li n g—su ggestion throu gh the hand su gge stion throu gh the spoken wo rd
.

, ,

a nd su gg e s ti on by tel e pathy Shows wh y the hands wi ll s o othe p ai n

. .

M ake s clear why the laying on of hand s has accom pl i sh ed m ore wonde r
“ ”

fli l eal ing th an has be en acc om pli s hed by an y o ther m ethod m entio ned in
h
hi st‘ ry .

Professo r W eltm er origin ally publi s hed this as a booklet an d th re e ,

large edition s we re s old of it in th at form but becau se of the gre at am ount ,

of g oocl ac co m pli shed th rou gh its te achi n gs he has revi sed an d con side rably ,

e nl arg ed it .

Thos e who h av e a copy of the booklet as“ well as all othe rs will profit ,

greatly by secu rin g a c opy of the n ew book T h e Healin g H an d which is ”

—
, ,

bou n d in he vy bu
a ck r am It is in al l r e pects a beau t ful book o ne you
s . i
will be p roud to o wn .

Price po stpaid
R e al iz atio n by Ernest W eltm e r D S T T his book qu otes som e
, , . . .

200 p aragraph s fro m the B ibl e re gardi n g heali n g the sick an d te ll s th e

, ,

fasci n atin g sto ry of h ow a you n g m an found I N THE BIBLE forty ,

ag o, su ffi ci en t i n s pi ration an d h elp to m ake hi m well stron g an d u s eful ,

to day afte r bein g told fo rty years ago that he wou ld in two m onth s di e of
,

c ons u m ption“ .

B ou n d like T h e H ealin g H an d po stp aid ,

“
Life Le ssons ”
A book of . words by Grace M Brown C om . .

prise s a prac tical New Thou ght te xt for the solutio n of daily p roblem s
B ou n d in m aroo n silk bu ckram
.

Price postpaid
T HE JO U R NA L OF T HE A M ER IC AN S U GGES TIVE
TH ER APE U TI C A L ASS OC I A TION .

Th ere is no be tte r way to keep info rm ed regardin g Su g gestotherapy

the Scie nc e of T ru e H ealin g — t han by subs c ribi n g fo r and rece ivin g th e
Jou rnal m o nthly
, .

I t will brin g you m ore abu ndant health h appin es s and pros pe rity for
, ,

it is al ways full of articl e s whi ch te ll you wh at to do an d how t o do them , ,

s o you wi ll th ink the tho u ght s whi ch will ove rc o m e di se ase u phappine s s
, ,

and pove rty .

T he se rv ice of the Jo u rnal is d efi nite and practical because it has be

hi n d it the defi nite and ractical ex rience of al l the Su gge stive Thera
,

p i s t s i n ac tu a l p ra c tic e t a l.s o has hi n d it the offic e rs an d staff of the

Hom e School an d San itarium with twenty five years of steadily increas
,
-

ing succe ss in th e p racti ci n g and teachi n g of Su gge stoth e rap y .

T he Journal has help for e v e rybod y e ve ry da y e ve rywhere

, , .

The faith cou rage and wer of one i ssue will stay with you u ntil the
,

other e leve n i ssu es are ad ed to it and as your conce pts becom e clear
, ,

Faith Cou ra ge and Power will stay with you always

, , .

Profe ss o r S A W eltm c r s be s t S E LF HE LP l ect u re of the m onth is

. .
’
-

publi shed in the Jou rn al THAT IS A NO THER R E AS ON W HY OU R

.

R E AD ER S G ET EV ER Y ISS UE AN D K EEP EV E R Y I SS U E .

H e re is you r op po rtun ity to get in tou ch with the l ate st rese arc h and
di s covery in thi s field .

T h e Jou rnal is publi shed m o nthly T he sub sc riptio n price is o nly one
.

doll ar pe r year .